Home

ALPs User`s Manual.book

1. D A WARNING A k ar eee eaten fe fe Power FR Pa NSA 20 V v om s Low input A N S voltage module WARNING Owe S E digital NEn S i PPERATED ala Owe S 7 inputs Ous S S F On Off aa 3 Oon Si Low Oof HIS voltage Ours digital Power oon S outputs input Ftd As Sensis O fe fuse box Standard AC CAN ports Device power input indicators Figure A 2 Back of Device Controller ALPs User s Manual A 4 Device Controller A 1 1 Device Controller Specifications Specifications for the Device Controller are found in Table A 1 Table A 1 Device Controller Specifications Item Description Environment Indoor use only Input Power Requirements US Europe 110 240VAC 6 3A 50 60Hz For high voltage output channels US Europe 110 240VAC 3A HV1 HV4 50 60Hz Dimensions 12 wide x 8 deep x 7 5 high Weight 5 Ibs Ambient Operating Temperature 5 30 C 59 86 F Humidity Restrictions lt 85 30 C 86 F Altitude Restrictions Up to 2000m 6562ft Installation Category Category I Pollution Degree 2 Input Fuses US 250VAC 6 3 amp 5x20mm SLO BLO UL approved Europe 250VAC 6 3 amp 5x20mm SLO BLO UL IEC approved Output Fuses US 250VAC 3 15 amp 5x20mm Fast Acting UL approved Europe 250VAC 3 15 amp 5x20mm Fast Acting UL IE
2. Method1 BiomekFX BiomekFx ETC 0 00 03 Figure 16 6 SPE step and configuration 2 Select the Operation performed by the SPE ALP from the options listed below e Create assembles the various pieces of an SPE stack e Destroy disassembles an SPE stack 3 Select the location of the Filter Source used by the SPE stack Note The Filter Source is the location on the deck of the filtered microplate that is placed on top of the SPE ALP stack 4 Select the location of the Manifold Source for the SPE stack The Manifold Source is the location of the manifold which is referred to as the collar in the this manual Beckman Coulter Inc id Phase Extraction SPE Vacuum Manifold ALP 16 11 Select the location of the Receiver Source for the SPE stack The Receiver Source is any filtered microplate that is positioned inside the SPE Collar and the SPE ALP If no receiver microplate is defined the fluid flows through the source filtered microplate into the SPE ALP Base The fluid is removed from the base via the vacuum hose Note Filter Source Manifold Source and Receiver Source all change to Destination when Operation is set to Destroy Select Receiver plate has a holder if the receiving microplate is positioned in a filter holder The filter holder is used to keep the tips of a filtered microplate from touching the base of an ALP stand Note A filter microplate withou
3. zair Se Tne Ss Instrument Setup Command A Q Wi Load tips from TL1 i HS Transfer DER B Finish Command see Select the action for the device to Device Aion Combine execute here Some commands require Select the device to Wi a further configuration control here Tip Loader ea g Device Action step configuration Pause The Device Action step configuration for the Orbital g Shaker ALP allows the configuration of the action completed by the ALP and the parameters required to S perform that action The step configuration for the ALP changes based on the selection made in Command Current deck display Method6 BiomekFX BiomekFX ETC 0 00 22 Figure 14 17 Device Action step and configuration 2 In Device select the desired OrbitalShakerALP OR Click on the Orbital Shaker ALP in the current deck display to select it The configuration for the ALP appears Figure 14 18 Note Any devices installed in Hardware Setup except Tip Loaders and Device Controllers are listed under Device in the Device Action step configuration Note When an Orbital Shaker ALP is selected in Device the ALP is highlighted by a blue border in the current deck display ALPs User s Manual 14 22 Orbital Shaker ALP 3 In Command select the desired action for the Orbital Shaker ALP e Shake shakes labware at the in
4. Figure 17 12 Right side bottom shield with solid and cutout blanking plates ALPs User s Manual 17 18 Span 8 Disposal ALP 17 4 5 Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide in R3 When a Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide is installed in R3 on the Biomek FX deck Figure 17 10 orient and install the blanking plate with the cutout as follows 1 Remove the four fasteners holding the solid blanking plate 2 Remove the solid blanking plate 3 Orient the blanking plate cutout as shown in Figure 17 12 4 Attach the blanking plate with the cutout to the bottom shield This creates an opening next to R3 for a slide Note Do not attach both blanking plates Store the unused blanking plate in an environmentally controlled area 17 4 6 Span 8 Disposal ALPs with Slide in Both R2 and R3 When Span 8 Disposal ALPs with Slide are installed in both R2 and R3 1 Remove the four fasteners holding the solid blanking plate 2 Remove the solid blanking plate This creates an opening large enough for two slides 17 5 Framing Instructions No special framing is necessary for the Span 8 Disposal ALP with or without Slide Framing the ALP occurred when the deck was framed with the Shift Deck command For more infromation refer to the specific user s manual for the instrument Beckman Coulter Inc Span 8 Disposal ALP 17 19 17 6 Removing the Span 8 Disposal ALP without Slide WARNING The waste bag may be contaminated Follow the ap
5. Tiptoader Uwe Method view 6 The Device Device Action step configuration f The Device Action step configuration Action caption Pause specifies an operation performed on the TARE Orbital Shaker ALP device and its Comment command Method BiomekFX BiomekFx ETC 0 00 22 Figure 14 18 Device Action step configured for a continuous shaking motion on an Orbital Shaker ALP 2 In Shaking speed indicate the desired shaking speed in RPM Note The minimum Shaking speed allowed is 0 RPM while the maximum Shaking speed allowed is 1800 RPM Refer to Section 14 4 1 Establishing a Safe Maximum Shaking Speed for more information ALPs User s Manual 14 24 Orbital Shaker ALP 3 In Time to reach full speed enter the duration in seconds the Orbital Shaker ALP takes to reach full shaking speed Note The minimum value allowed in Time to reach full speed is 0 5 seconds while the maximum value is 600 seconds 4 In Direction select whether the orbital shaking motion shakes in a CounterClockwise or Clockwise direction Note The default Direction is CounterClockwise Beckman Coulter Inc Orbital Shaker ALP 14 25 14 4 3 2 Configuring the ALP to Run for a Specific Length of Time Shaking operations on the Orbital Shaker ALP can be configured to run a specified length of time The Timed Shake configuration co
6. COULTER ALPs Automated Labware Positioners User s Manual Beckman Coulter PN 987836 Revision AC September 2004 Beckman Coulter Inc 4300 N Harbor Boulevard Fullerton CA 92834 3100 Copyright 2004 Beckman Coulter Inc Printed in U S A Except as provided in writing signed by an officer to Beckman Coulter Inc this system and any related documentation are provided as is without warranty of any kind expressed or implied including that the system is error free This information is presented in good faith but Beckman Coulter Inc does not warrant guarantee or make any representations regarding the use or the results of the use of this system and related documentation in terms of correctness accuracy reliability currentness omissions or otherwise The entire risk as to the use results and performance of this system and related documentation is assumed by the user Except as expressly provided herein Beckman Coulter Inc makes no other warranty whether oral or written expressed or implied as to any matter whatsoever including but not limited to those concerning merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose nor is freedom from any patent owned by Beckman Coulter Inc or by others to be inferred LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY Beckman Coulter Inc shall not be liable to any extent whatsoever for any damages resulting from or arising out of the use or performance of this system and related do
7. vie Thumbscrews Of o qL ms I I I Figure 12 6 Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide thumbscrews bottom view 6 Attach the disposal slide to the Multichannel Disposal ALP by lowering the upper tabs into the grooves in the Disposal ALP base Figure 12 7 The disposal slide rests its lower tabs on the front of the Multichannel Disposal ALP base Multichannel Disposal ALP slide Upper tabs Lower tabs Grooves for tabs Upper tabs slide into Lower tabs rest here Disposal ALP base Disposal chute Figure 12 7 Multichannel Disposal ALP slide attachment ALPs User s Manual 12 10 Multichannel Disposal ALP 7 Insert the ground screw through the tab on the back of the disposal slide and into the threaded hole in the Disposal ALP base Figure 12 8 Note This screw is necessary for proper ESD grounding of the ALP Tab on the Disposal ALP slide Pa o j Disposal Ground screw chute Disposal ALP base Figure 12 8 Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide ground screw placement 8 Place a trash receptacle at the end of the disposal chute to catch disposed items 9 Look down through the disposal chute or drop a test item into the Multich
8. 23 1 Overview The Tip Loader ALP Figure 23 1 is an active ALP that loads disposable tips onto a 96 well head or a 384 well head mounted on a Multichannel Pod The Biomek system supports up to four tip loaders on the deck at one time however only one Tip Loader ALP can function at a time The Tip Loader is controlled through a Controller Area Network CAN Note The Tip Loader ALP supports only Beckman Coulter tip boxes Note The Tip Loader ALP is only intended to load and unload tips therefore no labware other than tip boxes should be placed on the Tip Loader ALP No pipetting operations are allowed on the Tip Loader ALP The sections in this chapter include e Installing the Tip Loader ALP Section 23 2 Framing Instructions Section 23 3 Using the Tip Loader ALP in a Method Section 23 4 e Controlling the Tip Loader ALP Locking Rods Outside a Method Section 23 5 e Removing the Tip Loader ALP from the Deck Section 23 6 e Storage Section 23 7 e Preventive Maintenance Section 23 8 Troubleshooting Section 23 9 ALPs User s Manual 23 2 Tip Loader ALP Figure 23 1 Tip Loader ALP 23 1 1 Tip Loader Air Requirements CAUTION Clean dry air must be provided for proper operation of the UN Tip Loader ALP The Biomek instrument requires clean air input of 40 psi The air is regulated to the air output ports on both towers and increased to meet the 110 115
9. 8 2 High Density Passive ALPs 8 1 1 4x4 High Density Passive ALP The 4 x 4 High Density Passive ALP can hold up to sixteen pieces of labware Microplates can be added to the ALP by a lab technician or by the Biomek gripper Note Labware positioned on the 4 x 4 High Density Passive ALP is gripper accessible and stackable Figure 8 1 4 x 4 High Density Passive ALP Labware positions Thumbscrews Four thumbscrews are used to secure the 4 x 4 High Density Passive ALP to the deck There are two more thumbscrews on the opposite side of the ALP Figure 8 1 4 x 4 High Density Passive ALP Beckman Coulter Inc High Density Passive ALPs 8 3 8 1 2 4x 3 High Density ALP The 4 x 3 High Density ALP Figure 8 2 is a Passive ALP that can hold up to twelve pieces of labware Microplates can be added to the 4 x 3 High Density ALP by a lab technician or by the Biomek gripper Note Labware positioned on the 4 x 3 ALP High Density Passive ALP is gripper accessible and stackable 2 4 x 3 High Density ESERS Passive ALP ap el ae ee se KOREKORE labware positions Three DE S ey ED a el el ae gt ope CaORO O labware positions are ORED es So indicated here Front of the ALP Thumbscrews Four of the six thumbscrews on the base of the 4 x 3 High Density Passive ALP are used at any one time to secure the
10. Place the waste container under the lab bench or in an accessible space lower than the Biomek instrument height Attach the drainage tube to the waste port on the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP Figure 18 1 Run the opposite end of the drainage tube to the waste container by passing the tube through either the access holes between the towers at the back of the instrument or between the light curtain and the deck on the side of the Biomek instrument Note Make sure the tube routing does not interfere with the operation of the Biomek instrument or the light curtain Cut the drainage tube to the appropriate length to ensure there is no excess that could cause a rise or bump in the drainage tubes route from the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP to the waste container Note Since the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP is gravity fed it is crucial that the drainage tube run down hill without any rises between the ALP and the waste container Ensure that the supply container contains the desired system cleaning fluid Span 8 Tip Wash ALP 18 5 18 3 Framing Instructions Special framing instructions using Manual Teach are necessary for the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP to ensure that the tips and probes on the Span 8 Pod access the eight cleaning wells of the ALP without causing any damage to the tips probes pod or ALP Since the eight cleaning wells of the ALP are relatively small it is crucial that the tips on the probes be framed as accurately
11. 0 cece cece eee teen e eee e ee ee en tn ees 6 22 Figure 6 12 Expanded Position Properties for deck positions 0 0e eee eee 6 23 Figure 6 13 Instrument Setup step configuration 0 0 000 cece eee eee 6 24 Figure 6 14 Labware Properties ii0isa 4 cae gece an baked bene eadd Rese Rake MESA RHE 6 25 Figure 6 15 HDR Tool Cleaning step configuration 0 000s eee eee 6 28 Figure 6 16 HDR Tool Cleaning step new cleaning operation configuration 6 29 Figure 6 17 HDR Tool Cleaning step configuration for a wash operation 6 30 Figure 6 18 Dipping Conhieurguo 6 4 65265 sad he wees eke awe 4s Ree RS MR eR ES 6 32 Figure 6 19 Custom Height prompt 44 4 lt 4eei4s 648d eave hearse sd Rh eee hes ewes 6 33 Figure 6 20 HDR Tool Cleaning step new cleaning operation configuration 6 34 Figure 6 21 HDR Tool Cleaning step configuration for a drying operation 6 35 Figure 6 22 Custom Height prompt va s 048 s444seGioes cP SNS ee EVER ee 6 36 Figure 6 23 Device Action Step 2 44 44 sen 2 oot eed hea deta ee et euke pea tana ey 6 37 Figure 6 24 Device Action step for the Circulating Reservoir 0 000 00 6 38 Figure 6 25 Device Action step for the fan 2 2 eect eee 6 39 Figure 6 26 Advanced Manual Control for a Device Controller with Fanon 6 40 Figure 7 1 Heating and Cooling ALP top view 0 ce cece eee eee ee 7
12. Combine a ib Comment Method6 BiomekFX BiomekFx ETC 0 00 22 Figure 14 24 Device Action step configured to home the microplate shaking platform on an Orbital Shaker ALP Beckman Coulter Inc Orbital Shaker ALP 14 35 14 4 4 Stopping and Restarting a Method D If a need for manual control is realized during a method run and the method is stopped using either the Stop or Snap Continuation buttons refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 25 11 2 Snapping a Continuation the Orbital Shaker ALP does not automatically restart the shaking procedure when the Continuation method is started In order to restart a shaking operation a Device Action step must be inserted into the Continuation method Snap Continuation stops the method after Biomek instrument completes the move in progress and creates a Continuation method refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 25 6 Light Curtain Errors may occur when executing a Continuation method To avoid crashes delete any partially completed Orbital Shaker ALP steps and reinsert them into the Continuation method CAUTION If using Biomek FX Software version 2 1c or prior crashes Note Manual Control is available only when a method is not being executed Note Ifthe method is in the process of performing a move such as aspirating or dispensing the Biomek instrument completes the move however the instrument may no
13. Choose Advanced Controls Select the desired Positive Position ALP Advanced Manual Control for the selected Positive Position ALP appears Figure 15 5 From Command choose Unclamp Choose Go The clamps disengage Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control Choose Exit to close Manual Control ALPs User s Manual 15 12 Positive Position ALP 15 5 2 Verifying the Sensor on the Positive Position ALP Operates Properly Manual Control may be used to verify the sensor on the Positive Position ALP operates properly Generally the only time the sensor is verified is during troubleshooting To verify the sensor operates properly i 2 3 A UO N Beckman Coulter Inc Place a piece of labware on the Positive Position ALP Choose Instrument gt Manual Control Manual Control appears Choose Advanced Controls Select the desired Positive Position ALP Advanced Manual Control for the selected Positive Position ALP appears Figure 15 5 From Command choose VerifyLabware Choose Go The Positive Position ALP recognizes the piece of labware unless an Error appears Figure 15 6 Note Ifthe following Error Figure 15 6 appears the sensor does not recognize the labware present on the Positive Position ALP because the sensor is not operating properly or the ALP does not recognize a specific type of labware Note Contact a Beckman Coulter Service Engineer if several types of labware
14. Installing a Source Waste Sensor Section B 2 Using the Source Waste Sensor in a Method Section B 3 e Controlling the Source Waste Sensor Outside a Method Section B 4 Preventive Maintenance Section B 5 Troubleshooting Section B 6 ALPs User s Manual B 2 Source Waste Sensor B 2 Installing a Source Waste Sensor Installing the Source Waste Sensor includes attaching the sensor with the supplied velcro strap to the source or waste container and inserting the sensor cables to the correct Source Waste Sensor Controller connection Using CAN communication cables the controller is connected to the Biomek instrument WARNING Do not place the controller or the source or waste containers uN on the Biomek instrument deck To install the Source Waste Sensor 1 Place the source and waste containers at an off deck location 2 Place the controller at an off deck location near the source and waste containers and the Biomek instrument 3 Plug the source sensor cable into the SOURCE connection Figure B 1 4 Plug the waste sensor cable into the WASTE connection Figure B 1 Source connection connection Figure B 1 Source Waste Sensor Controller 5 Using the supplied velcro strap secure the sensor to the source container at the desired level Make sure the face of the sensor is flush to the container and the velcro is pressed against the velcro strap Figure B 2 Note
15. center the microplate platform on the ALP base Unclamp release the clamp allowing removal of the labware from the ALP To open Advanced Manual Control for a specific Orbital Shaker ALP 1 Choose Instrument gt Manual Control Manual Control appears Figure 14 26 2 Click on Advanced Controls and a list of all the installed pods and devices z appears Figure 14 27 Advanced Controls Ss a Advanced Controls DeviceController0 OrbitalShakerALPO OrbitalShakerALP1 Pod PositivePosition4LPO PositivePositionSLP1 ShakerALPO Shaker4LP1 SpeedPump0 SpeedPump1 StirrerSLPO StirerALP1 TiploaderO Tiploader1 Figure 14 27 Selecting an Orbital Microplate Shaking in Advanced Manual Control 3 Select the desired Orbital Shaker ALP Advanced Manual Control for the selected ALP appears 4 Configure the device to perform the desired action Beckman Coulter Inc Orbital Shaker ALP 14 39 14 5 1 Manually Controlling a Standard Shaking Procedure To configure the Orbital Shaker ALP to shake labware Note The default configuration for the Orbital Shaker ALP is to shake labware CounterClockwise with a 1 one second ramp up to 300 revolutions per minute RPM 1 In Command select Shake Figure 14 28 Command She O H Shaking speed soo O RPM 0A1800 Time to reach full speed Poo seconds 1 600 Direction CounterClockwise Go Abort Figure 14 28 Using Advanced Man
16. s u susanne eee eee nee 14 21 Device Action step configured for a continuous shaking motion on an Orbital Shaker ALP s6 65445 024 Rbsb4decne pegs oid pea teens 14 23 Device Action step configured for a timed shaking motion on an Orbital Shaker ALP 2 ocsce at ooaasen ts apneee dapat ssabaeees 14 25 Device Action step configured to run a previously designed shaking profile on an Orbital Shaker ALP 0 000 000 ee eee 14 27 Device Action step configured for a pulsing shake motion on an Orbital Shaker ALP 244 4 4 40e lt aveunvaicn ehaxeee tae eee aa ees 14 29 Device Action step configured to stop all shaking motion on an Orbital Shaker ALP su 2cca de pts ka Ree ki based Grea ie r urkia ka 14 31 Beckman Coulter Inc List of Figures xxxv Figure 14 23 Device Action step configured to actuate the clamps on an Orbital Shaker ALP o4 044 6 00 4 200 sa0e00bauans de doawbodaadne 14 33 Figure 14 24 Device Action step configured to home the microplate shaking platform on an Orbital Shaker ALP 14 34 Figure 14 25 Confirms Manual Control is connecting 00 0 c eee eee eee 14 37 Figure 14 26 Manual Control i4 36 64 5 cede e 444 VR EES AERA R AMO CREE E TOA REE RES 14 37 Figure 14 27 Selecting an Orbital Microplate Shaking in Advanced Manual Control 14 38 Figure 14 28 Using Advanced Manual Control for a continuous shaking motion on an Orbital Shaker ALP 2 24tcccd nacnnag cea bad ad ed
17. Disposal chute Ground screw for the Span 8 Disposal ALP Grounding tab on the Span 8 bagging extension Disposal ALP bagging extension Span 8 Disposal ALP base Figure 17 9 Span 8 Disposal ALP ground screw placement ALPs User s Manual 17 14 Span 8 Disposal ALP CAUTION Bagging extensions are not interchangeable between the UN Multichannel Disposal ALP and the Span 8 Disposal ALP Each Disposal ALP must use the bagging extension designed for that ALP 8 Snap the bagging extension onto the Span 8 Disposal ALP base by lining up the springs on the bagging extension with the cutouts on the Disposal ALP base Figure 17 9 9 Apply downward force to the top of the bagging extension The springs slip through to the inside of the Disposal ALP base and lock into the cutouts Figure 17 9 10 Insert the grounding screw through the hole in the grounding tab on the bagging extension and into the threaded hole in the Span 8 Disposal ALP base Figure 17 9 Note This screw is necessary for proper ESD grounding of the ALP 11 Place a trash receptacle at the end of the disposal chute to catch disposed items 12 Look down through the disposal chute or drop a test item into the ALP to make sure the trash lands in the receptacle Adjust the placement of the trash receptacle as required Beckman Coulter Inc Span 8 Disposal ALP 17 15 17 4 Installing Pro
18. Introduction to ALPs 1 5 2 Select the desired detected device or devices and choose Install The device is added to the installed devices under Devices in the left pane Note An asterisk next to a device indicates the device has been modified since the workspace was loaded A blue question mark before the installed device indicates the device has not been fully configured A red X before the installed device indicates the device is not detected Make sure the device is properly connected to a CAN port Note For more information about Hardware Setup refer to the specific user s manual for the instrument ALPs User s Manual 8 Channel Active Wash ALP 2 1 Overview The 8 Channel Active Wash ALP is an active ALP that washes fixed or disposable tips on the probes of a Span 8 Pod The ALP provides a flow of wash fluid from a source reservoir for tip washing A peristaltic pump circulates the fluid through the 8 Channel Active Wash ALP from a source reservoir to a waste reservoir Information in this chapter includes the following Mounting the 8 Channel Active Wash ALP Section 2 2 Framing Instructions Section 2 3 e Using an 8 Channel Active Wash ALP in a Method Section 2 4 e Removing the 8 Channel Active Wash ALP Section 2 5 e Storage Section 2 6 e Preventive Maintenance Section 2 7 Troubleshooting Section 2 8 ALPs User s Manual 2 2 8 Channel Active
19. Multichannel Disposal ALP 12 7 12 3 Installing a Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide Installing a Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide includes choosing a deck position and mounting the ALP to the deck Note Since the slide of a Multichannel Disposal ALP extends beyond the edge of the Biomek deck the deck must be modified to accommodate the slide Refer to Section 12 4 Installing Protective Shield Blanking Plate for more information on modifying the deck to accommodate a Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide 12 3 1 Choosing a Deck Position for the Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide CAUTION The Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide must be mounted in the 2nd or 3rd row in the left and right outside columns of the Biomek FX deck to avoid collisions CAUTION Make sure the correct Disposal ALP is chosen when configuring the deck setup in the Deck Editor Disposal ALPs vary in height and failure to choose each Disposal ALP correctly in the software may result in collisions between pod s and Disposal ALPs during operation gt amp The Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide can be placed in one of the two center positions in the outside columns and extends off the edge of the Biomek deck When adding a Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide on the left or right outside column of the Biomek deck the ALP must be associated with that deck position in the Deck Editor To associate the Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide with a
20. Note ADR2 is set to a default address of zero 0 If only one Microplate Shaking ALP is on the deck ADR2 is the default setting Beckman Coulter Inc Microplate Shaking ALP 11 5 11 3 Framing Instructions Frame the Microplate Shaking ALP according to the instructions in the specific user s manual for the Biomek instrument 11 4 Using the Microplate Shaking ALP in a Method To use the Microplate Shaking ALP in a method it must be installed in Hardware Setup refer to Chapter 1 3 Installing and Configuring ALPs Note Configuration in Hardware Setup is not necessary for the ALP The Microplate Shaking ALP is controlled and operated through the Device Action step in Biomek Software refer to the Biomek Software User 5 Manual Chapter 22 6 1 5 Configuring the Device Action Step for the Microplate Shaking ALP FX NX only The speed shaking time and ramp time are all configured through the Device Action step for use in a method CAUTION Set the shaking speed at the lowest setting and increase A N slowly to the desired setting This helps prevent spills or splashing ALPs User s Manual 11 6 Microplate Shaking ALP 11 5 Controlling the Microplate Shaking ALP Outside a Method Use Advanced Manual Control for e Turning On the Microplate Shaking ALP Outside a Method Section 11 5 1 Timing a Shaking Operation Outside a Method Section 11 5 2 Turning Off the Microplate Shaking ALP Outside a Met
21. Positive Position ALP 15 5 15 2 2 Leveling the Positive Position ALP Once the Positive Position ALP is installed it must be leveled To level the Positive Position ALP 1 Loosen the three leveling screws two full counterclockwise rotations 2 Load tips to the pod if tips are not already loaded 3 Lower tips until slightly above the top of the Positive Position ALP 4 Level the X axis to the tips using the two X axis leveling screws by turning the screws clockwise one at a time Figure 15 2 and Figure 15 3 Note Tightening a screw lowers that side of the Positive Position ALP 5 Level the Y axis to the tips using the Y axis leveling screw by turning the screw clockwise Figure 15 1 and Figure 15 2 Labware sensor Thumbscrew Y axis leveling screw X axis leveling screws Positive Position Thumbscrew ALP clamp Figure 15 2 Leveling screws for the Positive Position ALP top down view ALPs User s Manual 15 6 Positive Position ALP 15 2 3 Aligning the Top of the Positive Position ALP with the Multichannel Head or Span 8 Probes Once the Positive Position ALP is installed and leveled it must be aligned with the pod accessing it Proper alignment prevents damage to the pod head probes tips ALP and labware To align the Positive Position ALP 1 Load tips to the pod if tips are not already loaded
22. Table 10 1 Troubleshooting the Magnetic Bead ALP IF The magnet does not engage or disengage THEN Make sure the labware type is defined properly in the Labware Type Editor Make sure a good power connection has been established The magnet stalls or does not move properly Using Advanced Manual Control home the magnet refer to Section 10 5 1 Homing the Magnet The magnet is not drawing beads to the desired position Make sure the labware type on the Magnetic Bead ALP is properly identified in Instrument Setup Adjust the magnet engage height for the labware in the Labware Type Editor refer to Section 10 4 2 2 Setting Magnetic Bead ALP Position Properties The clamps are not grasping the labware Make sure the labware type is defined properly in the Labware Type Editor refer to Section 10 4 2 2 Setting Magnetic Bead ALP Position Properties The sensors are not functioning properly Verify the sensors recognize the labware type refer to Section 10 5 5 Verifying the Sensor on the Magnetic Bead ALP Recognizes a Labware Type 11 1 Overview 11 1 Microplate Shaking ALP The Microplate Shaking ALP is an active ALP designed to mix solutions in microplates using a linear shaking motion Figure 11 1 The sections in this chapter include Installing the Microplate Shaking ALP Section 11 2 Framing Instructions Section 11 3 Using
23. The HDR Pin Drying ALP includes components such as an adaptor plate fan and guards and collar refer to Section 6 1 1 1 Components of the HDR Pin Drying ALP The reservoirs that may be used with the HDR Pin Drying ALP include static refer to Section 6 1 2 1 Static Reservoirs and circulating reservoirs refer to Section 6 1 2 2 Circulating Reservoirs The sections in this chapter include e Installing the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs Section 6 2 Installing and Configuring Devices Associated with the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir in Hardware Setup Section 6 3 e Adding the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir to the Deck in Biomek Software Section 6 4 Framing Instructions Section 6 5 e Using the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs in a Method Section 6 6 e Controlling the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir Outside a Method Section 6 7 e Removing the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir from the Deck Section 6 8 ALPs User s Manual 6 2 HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only e Preventive Maintenance for the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir Section 6 10 Troubleshooting the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir Section 6 11 6 1 1 HDR Pin Drying ALP The HDR Pin Drying ALP Figure 6 1 is an active ALP that dries pins on the HDR Tool Body during a method A fan provides airflow su
24. ALPs User s Manual 2 20 8 Channel Active Wash ALP 2 4 Using an 8 Channel Active Wash ALP ina Method The 8 Channel Active Wash ALP is used automatically when the a Transfer or Combine step is configured to wash tips in the Tip Handling configuration or a Span 8 Wash Tips step is inserted into the method However if multiple wash ALPs are installed on the deck some extra steps are required to ensure the desired wash ALP is used for each wash operation 2 4 1 Configuring Multiple 8 Channel Active Wash ALPs on an Instrument The 8 Channel Active Wash ALPs are referred to as wash ALPs in the Biomek Software To ensure that the correct wash ALP is used on an instrument with two or more wash ALPs each wash ALP must be configured to use a unique liquid type To configure a unique liquid type for a wash ALP 1 In the Liquid Type Editor create a new liquid type or copy an existing liquid type for the wash ALP for example create a new liquid type called WS1_Liquid Note Each liquid type must have a unique name for example WS1_Liquid or WS2_Liquid Note Refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 8 2 Creating New Liquid Types for more information on creating new liquid types and Section 8 4 Copying and Pasting Liguid Types Within a Project File for more information on copying liquid types 2 In the Instrument Setup step double click the desired wash ALP Labware Properties for the wash ALP appears Figure 2
25. Alignment Incorrect Laser Alignment Correct Laser _y A A Beckman Coulter Inc Figure 3 2 Bar Code Reader Laser beam position over bar code label 4 Turn the height adjustment screw under the bar code reader on Bar Code Reader ALP until the laser beam is correctly aligned on the bar code WARNING If labware other than that specified in the Labware Type Editor is used an increase in bad reads or no reads may occur WARNING If a label is applied by any means other than the SAGIAN Print amp Apply device an increase in bad reads or no reads may occur Bar Code Reader ALP 3 5 3 3 Applying Labels to Labware Incorrect label positioning or poor quality labels can result in inaccurate reading of bar codes therefore the use of an automated bar code application instrument such as the SAGIAN Print amp Apply or prelabeled microplates is recommended Increasing the vertical height ofthe bars on the label is also suggested to enhance the accuracy of the bar code reader Note Ifa label needs to be applied to the microplate it is recommended that a SAGIAN Print amp Apply device be used to properly position the label on the microplate Figure 3 3 0 03 0 02 in Figure 3 3 Bar Code Reader Label positioning on a microplate 3 4 Framing Instructions Frame the Bar Code Reader ALP according to the framing instructions in the user s manual for the Biomek
26. Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP 4 2 2 1 Mounting the Peristaltic Pump Head and Routing the Tubing The pump head must be installed on the controller before routing the tubing No tools are required to mount the pump head To mount the pump head and route the tubing WARNING Turn off the pump drive and disconnect the CAN cables before installing or removing the pump head or tubing 1 Place the controller on the back side so that the ports and mounting holes are facing upward 2 Insert the thumbscews into the pump head Figure 4 2 The thumbscrews protrude from the back of the pump head Locking Motor shaft lever Mounting holes Thumbscrews Figure 4 2 Mounting the peristaltic pump head on the controller 3 Align the thumbscrews with the mounting holes on the controller 4 Turn the thumbscrews until the threads catch in the mounting holes but do not tighten them further Oo wo N A 10 11 12 Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP 4 5 Push the locking lever to the left to open the pump and rotate the rotor slowly in either direction until it aligns with the notch in the motor shaft The pump head rests flush against the controller when the pump rotor and motor shaft are properly aligned Note Refer to the pump head manufacturer s instructions for more information Tighten the thumbscrews until the pump head is fir
27. Each time a directional button is selected the pod moves by the amount shown in Delta The total amount moved in each direction is displayed in Total Moved From Start cm Hysteresis compensation Leave Hysteresis compensation at the default setting of Off It is not necessary to compensate for hysteresis in the Z axis Figure 18 6 Manual Teaching Teach Z 19 In Delta select the magnitude of change applied to the tips each time a directional button is selected Figure 18 6 Note The default Delta value is 0 05 cm If the tips are a considerable distance above the ALP increase the distance traveled by increasing the Delta value maximum setting is 1 0 cm If the tips are almost to the desired location reduce the Delta value minimum setting is 0 005 cm 20 Select the directional button representing the motion required to physically move the tip into position over the white framing points on the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP Note Each time a directional button is selected the pod and tips move the distance specified in Delta in the indicated direction 21 Select Finish The Span 8 Pod moves in accordance to the Delta value Manual Teaching closes and Position Properties Figure 18 2 appears 22 Choose OK to close Position Properties 23 Choose Save to close the Deck Editor The Span 8 Tip Wash ALP is framed Beckman Coulter Inc Span 8 Tip Wash ALP 18 11 18 4 Removing the Span 8 Tip Was
28. FX Manual Framing Wizard The instructions are the same e loading disposable tips to the probes if necessary e aligning disposable or fixed tips with the framing targets on the 8 Channel Active Wash ALP Figure 2 7 A Framing targets Align the tips to these small white dots on the ALP COND Jidididididld 5 Figure 2 7 Framing targets on 8 Channel Active Wash ALP top view 8 Channel Active Wash ALP 2 11 To frame using Biomek NX Manual Framing Wizard gt FX The 8 Channel Active Wash ALP on a Biomek FX instrument is framed using the Biomek FX Manual Framing Wizard The instructions are the same 1 Choose Start gt Programs gt Beckman Coulter gt Biomek Software to open Biomek Software 2 From the Instrument menu choose Deck Editor Deck Editor appears Figure 2 8 Deck1 Default Deck D x i e a New Deck Delete Deck Rename Deck OpenDeck Clear Deck Renumber Delete ALP Properties Save Cancel PositivePositionALP Shaker ALP SpansActiveWashLefl StackerCarausel StirrerALP TrashLeft zl Coords cm 7 757 0 802 fs 539 H Figure 2 8 Deck Editor 3 Open Position Properties for the 8 Channel Active Wash ALP by double clicking on the deck position Position Properties appears Figure 2 9 Name wi ALP Type SpangActiveWashLeft Xfcem Y cm Zfcm Precision Podi Coordinates 47 757 0 802 9 039 Not Framed Advanced MC Teach
29. Note Make sure the tube routing does not interfere with the operation of the Biomek FX instrument 6 2 2 2 Operating the Circulating Reservoir Note Prior to running a method make sure there is enough wash fluid for the method in the supply container and that the waste container does not overflow during the method The circulating reservoir automatically turns off at the end of a method A Device Action step may be used to turn the pump on or off at any time in a method refer to Section 6 6 2 1 Configuring the Device Action Step for a Circulating Reservoir The HDR Tool Cleaning step turns the pump on prior to dipping the pins in the reservoir and off at a set time after leaving the reservoir refer to Section 6 6 Using the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs in a Method Once turned on the pump remains on until turned off as a part of the HDR Tool Cleaning step a Device Action step or the end of the method Note The circulating reservoir can also be controlled using Manual Control in the Biomek FX software refer to Section 6 7 Controlling the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir Outside a Method If a Light Curtain violation occurs while the pump is powering on or off the action is completed The state of the pump does not change when the light curtain is violated or during a pause in a method Beckman Coulter Inc HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 6 13 A 6 3 Installing and Configu
30. 11 5 11 5 Controlling the Microplate Shaking ALP Outside a Method 11 6 11 5 1 Turning On the Microplate Shaking ALP Outside a Method 11 6 11 5 2 Timing a Shaking Operation Outside a Method 11 7 11 5 3 Turning Off the Microplate Shaking ALP Outside a Method 11 8 11 5 4 Clamping or Unclamping a Plate Outside a Method 11 8 11 6 Removing the Microplate Shaking ALP 0 0 cee eee eee ee 11 9 11 7 ROTA SS oy 5 aot Scat oe tie pent red HA eee od Gh heh SHA ae Mah oNER Cah ae 11 9 11 8 Preventive Maintenance 24 05 4 ox exces CGR TAGES Ge ENO ERS RS ROGERS EERSS 11 9 11 9 Troubleshooting sneer vin cade ound ateeee cathe ee Ear EEVEE REEERE 11 9 ALPs User s Manual xxvi Table of Contents 12 Multichannel Disposal ALP T21 OVGRVIOW ense Ns teenage eahakes Haha EEEa Gea eenes ena mus 12 1 12 1 1 Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide 04 12 2 12 1 2 Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide 12 3 12 2 Installing the Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide 12 4 12 2 1 Choosing a Deck Position for the Multichannel Disposal ALP WUDOUL Sid s ssh oe anes oR eer dened oe hake ome e aan a iaaa 12 4 12 2 2 Mounting a Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide 12 4 12 3 Installing a Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide 12 7 12 3 1 Choosing a Deck Position for the Multichannel Disposal A
31. 2 Orient the test tube rack so position labeled A1 on the test tue rack is on the front left side of the ALP Figure 22 7 and Figure 22 8 Beckman Coulter Inc Test Tube Rack ALPs 22 9 3 Lower the test tube rack so the locating holes in the bottom of the rack slip over the locating pins on the Test Tube Rack ALP Figure 22 7 and Figure 22 8 1g CO test tube rack Sty yt yt SOO screw holes OGOTO OCOD z DOK OOF OOS OO ESS GOS _ FO OB OOO SS Orr OOS OOO OOO PO OOOO FO OO OOOO SS iF OOOO OS OOOO F_ OOOO OOOO OOO ES OR _ OO OOS SOLS OOOO SO Zz SABO OOOO CODO OOOO DOC OOO DOCO OO l SLLLS OOO l CEP l l Test tube rack locating hole There are two locating holes A on each test tube rack M Locating pins TERT S There are two Labware positioning screws a ees locating pins for The labware positioning screw must each test tub rack be next to labware position A1 on the test tube rack eal Figure 22 7 Mounting tube racks to a 1 x 2 Test Tube Rack ALP left facing ALPs User s Manual 22 10 Test Tube Rack ALPs Labware positioning Labware position A1 on a test tube rack screw holes eS oem fo O SO em O SESS om sMenu neka O V SAO DOSSO om CReNc mo xo momo OO SCE om SOSS O SDSS SOS m DOSSO CLES
32. 2 Position a microplate on the top of the Positive Position ALP 3 Lower tips until slightly above the labware on top of the Positive Position ALP 4 Verify that the microplate wells align with the tips If necessary tighten the rotational adjustment screw using the screwdriver provided to rotate the top of the Positive Position ALP counterclockwise Figure 15 3 OR Loosen the rotational adjustment screw using the screwdriver provided to rotate the top of the Positive Position ALP clockwise Figure 15 3 Positive Position ALP clamp Labware sensor X axis leveling screws Rotational adjustment screw Thumbscrew Figure 15 3 Rotational adjustment screw for the Positive Position ALP left side view Beckman Coulter Inc Positive Position ALP 15 7 15 3 Framing Instructions When using the Positive Position ALP with high density labware the ALP may need to be manually framed using Manual Teach to ensure that the tips can access the wells without causing any damage to the tips probes pod or ALP Manual Teach is accessed through Position Properties in the Deck Editor To frame the Positive Position ALP using Manual Teach follow the instructions outlined in specific user s manual for the instrument Note When using labware other than 1536 well on the Positive Position ALP the standard framing procedure using the AccuFrame is usual
33. 21 9 3 Ensure the instructions are followed on the Adaptor Warning and choose OK Teaching Instructions appears Figure 21 9 Teaching Instructions The location is 58 597 cm 18 751 cm 16 750 cm The change is 3 937 cm 0 088 cm 1 050 cm What would you like to do C Shift ALP Shift position Cancel Figure 21 9 Teaching Instructions 4 Choose Shift ALP 5 Choose OK Position Properties appears again and the Storage ALP is framed with the Multichannel Pod 6 Choose OK to close Position Properties 7 Choose Save to close the Deck Editor ALPs User s Manual 21 10 Storage ALPs FX only 21 4 Configuring the Storage ALP Move Step The Storage ALP Move step is used to move labware to and from the Storage ALPs This step is available on the Integrated Devices step palette when the Storage ALPs are installed Figure 21 10 Note Ifthe Storage ALP Move step is accidentally deleted from the Integrated Devices step palette the Storage ALP installation must be reinstalled Edit Project Instrument Execution Options Help Deo BRS Ye ele ale mo xs Integrated Devices Step Palette The Storage ALP Move step appears here along with steps for any other integrated devices on the workstation Tutorial BiomekFX ETC Figure 21 10 Integrated Devices step palette Beckman Coulter Inc Storage ALPs FX only 21 11 To configure t
34. ALP to the deck Five of the six thumbscrews are shown on this graphic The sixth thumbscrew is partially visible on the top right corner of the ALP base Figure 8 2 4 x 3 High Density Passive ALP with a microplate being placed in a labware position ALPs User s Manual 8 4 High Density Passive ALPs 8 1 2 1 Adding a Liquid Level Sensing LLS Plate to the 4x 3 High Density Passive ALP The 4 x 3 High Density Passive ALP stand supports an LLS plate option Figure 8 3 which when installed improves liquid level sensing capabilities in labware positioned on the ALP An LLS plate can be installed in any or all labware positions on the ALP Note Labware positioned on a 4 x 3 High Density Passive ALP with the LLS plate option installed is gripper accessible and stackable LLS plate mounting screw holes S Four mounting screws are used to secure the LLS plate to the ALP There are two more screw holes ES on the opposite side Figure 8 3 LLS Plate Top View Beckman Coulter Inc High Density Passive ALPs 8 5 8 1 2 1 1 Installing the LLS Plate Option on a 4 x 3 High Density Passive ALP To install an LLS plate complete the following 1 Turn the High Density Passive 4 x 3 ALP upside down 2 Position the LLS plate upside down in the desired position on the ALP stand Figure 8 4 LLS plate mounting Bottom of LLS plate To
35. APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS OF 21 CFR 1040 AT THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE The Biomek Bar Code Reader ALP Figure 3 1 is an active ALP that scans bar code labels applied to the narrow sides of labware The Biomek Bar Code Reader is powered through an external power supply AX Bar Code Reader ALP Note Due to the bar code reader weight and its extension beyond the edge of the Biomek deck a counterweight has been added to the opposing side of the Bar Code Reader ALP The following bar codes are supported by the Bar Code Reader Code 39 Codabar 12 o0f5 UPC EAN Code 128 The sections in this chapter include Installing the Bar Code Reader ALP Section 3 2 Applying Labels to Labware Section 3 3 Framing Instructions Section 3 4 Using the Bar Code Reader ALP in a Method Section 3 5 Removing the Bar Code Reader ALP Section 3 6 Storage Section 3 7 Troubleshooting Section 3 8 ALPs User s Manual 3 2 Bar Code Reader ALP Labware is positioned here Bar code reader unit Thumbscrews Beckman Coulter Inc Figure 3 1 Bar Code Reader ALP Bar Code Reader ALP 3 3 3 2 Installing the Bar Code Reader ALP gt Pp ee Installing the Bar Code Reader ALP includes choosing the deck position on the deck mounting the ALP to the deck and properly aligning the laser 3 2 1 Deck Positions for the Bar Code Reader ALP Bec
36. Deck2 Default Deck Bnet antint att het mee for oe 2 2 New Deck Delete Deck Rename Deck OpenDeck Clear Deck Renumber Delete ALP Properties Save Cancel I Three 1 x 1 Storage ALPs OneByThree added to the deck OneByThreeStorage OrbitalShaker ALP PasitivePosition amp lP ShakerALP SpansActiveWashLefl Span8ActiveWashRigl Span 8TipTrashLeft Span TipTrashRight Span8TrashLeft Coords cm fo fo fo gi Figure 21 6 Three 1 x 1 Storage ALPs and three Standard 1 x 1 ALPs added to a Biomek FX deck ALPs User s Manual 21 8 Storage ALPs FX only 21 3 Framing Storage ALPs Storage ALPs are framed using the AccuFrame and the red Framing Adaptor Figure 21 7 To frame a Storage ALP 1 Gently mount the Accuframe on the red Framing Adaptor provided with the integration refer to the Biomek FX Laboratory Automation Workstation User 5s Manual Section 5 2 3 Installing AccuFrame i Figure 21 7 Framing Adaptor 2 Frame the Storage ALP Position with the Multichannel Pod according to the instructions in the hardware manual refer to the Biomek FX Laboratory Automation Workstation User s Manual Section 5 2 4 Framing the Position Adaptor Warning appears Figure 21 8 Adaptor Warning Make sure to have the adaptor plate mounted between the position and the Accuframe tool Cancel Figure 21 8 Adaptor Warning Beckman Coulter Inc Storage ALPs FX only
37. Figure 10 18 Advanced Manual Control for a Magnetic Bead ALP with Manual Engage Magnet selected 0 cece ee eee eee 10 26 Figure 10 19 Advanced Manual Control for a Magnetic Bead ALP with Move Magnet selected nnna oven Obes ee Cae eee eee eee 10 27 Figure 10 20 Magbead configuration for the selected labware type 10 29 Figure 10 21 Advanced Manual Control for a Magnetic Bead ALP with Manual Clamp selected 2 05 ca4 0i0easdwrddavewend eedeiadss 10 30 Figure 10 22 Advanced Manual Control for a Magnetic Bead ALP with Verify Labware selected nnn duceeieieuetdeceabuatdbes eek 10 32 Figure 10 23 Error indicating labware not found at sensor 0 00 eee eee 10 32 Figure 11 1 Microplate Shaking ALP 0 eee eneneae 11 2 Figure 11 2 Microplate Shaking ALP connections 00 0 c eee eee eee eee 11 4 Figure 11 3 Advanced Manual Control for a selected Microplate Shaking ALP 11 6 Figure 11 4 Advanced Manual Control for a Microplate Shaking ALP with Timed Shake choices s 2 5 6k4 sy e446 eee ee enews ee esee see WRe pease 11 7 ALPs User s Manual xxxiv List of Figures Figure 12 1 Figure 12 2 Figure 12 3 Figure 12 4 Figure 12 5 Figure 12 6 Figure 12 7 Figure 12 8 Figure 12 9 Figure 12 10 Figure 12 11 Figure 13 1 Figure 13 2 Figure 13 3 Figure 13 4 Figure 13 5 Figure 13 6 Figure 13 7 Figure 14 1 Figure 14 2 Figure 14 3 Fig
38. Framing for the 1 x 2 Test Tube Rack ALP left facing 22 5 Figure 22 4 Framing for the 1 x 3 Test Tube Rack ALP left facing 22 6 Figure 22 5 Labware positioning screws on a 1 x 2 Test Tube Rack ALP left facing 22 7 Figure 22 6 Labware positioning screws ona 1 x 3 Test Tube Rack ALP right facing 22 8 Figure 22 7 Mounting tube racks to a 1 x 2 Test Tube Rack ALP left facing 22 9 Figure 22 8 Mounting tube racks to a 1 x 3 Test Tube Rack ALP Left facing 22 10 Figure 22 9 Septum Piercing Tube Rack positioned on ALP left facing 22 12 Figure 22 10 Septum Piercing Tube Rack with side plates left facing 22 13 Figure 22 11 Septum Piercing Tube Rack with top adapter plate left facing 22 14 Figure 23 1 Tip Loader ALP 44 3 4 044 444040 ge Gia 560 Ne Abbe ha oe ROR Ewes IRE Ra dE OOS 23 2 Figure 23 2 Tip Loader ALP Connections 64 4 4c54 40s dsew edd sad oxdahdsadesaedun 23 4 Figure 23 3 Tip Loader ALP Pneumatic Connections on the Biomek FX Towers 23 5 Figure 23 4 Tip Loader ALP with locking rods extended 0 00 02 eee eee 23 7 Figure 23 5 Advanced Manual Control for a selected Tip Loader ALP 23 8 Beckman Coulter Inc List of Figures xxxvii Figure A 1 Front of Device Controller 2 0 0 eect eens A 2 Figure A 2 Back of Device Controller 24 4 46s404 o4doe4s4eeaseedidaverssosa
39. OR From Command choose Unclamp to deactivate the clamp on the Microplate Shaking ALP 5 Choose Go 6 Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control 7 Choose Exit to close Manual Control Beckman Coulter Inc Microplate Shaking ALP 11 9 11 6 Removing the Microplate Shaking ALP To remove the Microplate Shaking ALP 1 Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before removing any active ALP Detach power communication connection Shut off manual air valve on the tower Detach air tubing Loosen the thumbscrews on the base of the ALP nH nA A U N Lift ALP straight up to clear the locating pins on the base of the ALP from the locating holes on the deck 11 7 Storage Return the Microplate Shaking ALP to the original packing materials and store in a dry dust free environmentally controlled area Note It is desirable to allow the Microplate Shaking ALP to air dry before returning it to the original packing materials 11 8 Preventive Maintenance Clean up all spills immediately with a soft cloth dampened with appropriate cleaning compound 11 9 Troubleshooting Do not remove covers for any reason Do not attempt to repair the Microplate Shaking ALP without first contacting a Beckman Coulter Service Engineer Table 11 1 Troubleshooting the Microplate Shaking ALP IF THEN The Microplate Shaking ALP is not Make sure a good power connection functioning has been established The clamps are not g
40. Passive ALP LLS plate mounting screws Top of 1 x 1 Passive ALP Figure 19 3 Installing an LLS Plate on a 1 x 1 Passive ALP Beckman Coulter Inc Standard Passive ALPs 19 5 3 Attach the LLS plate to the 1 x 1 Passive ALP with the four mounting screws provided by turning the screws clockwise The LLS plate is now installed Figure 19 4 1x1 ALP with LLS plate option installed Labware rests on top of the LLS plate Installed LLS plate Figure 19 4 1 x 1 Passive ALP with the LLS plate option installed ALPs User s Manual 19 6 Standard Passive ALPs Beckman Coulter Inc 19 1 2 1x 1 Passive ALP with Indented Sides The 1 x 1 Passive ALP with Indented Sides occupies one deck position and is placed on the deck next to an SPE Collar Stand with an SPE Collar Since the gripper fingers must open wide enough to grip the SPE Collar and would hit the adjacent ALP the position would be lost without using the 1 x 1 Passive ALP with Indented Sides This ALP allows enough clearance for the gripper to extend and move the SPE Collar without hitting it Indented sides Thumbscrews Figure 19 5 1 x 1 Passive ALP with Indented Sides Standard Passive ALPs 19 7 19 1 3 1x3 Passive ALP A 1x3 Passive ALP occupies three positions on the deck and holds up to three pieces of labware in one col
41. indefinite period of time and display a message prompt refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Section 15 5 2 Pausing the Whole System and Displaying a Message Beckman Coulter Inc Bar Code Reader ALP 3 11 3 5 1 1 Validating Methods When Read Bar Codes for Decision Making is Selected Reading bar codes for decision making creates a dependent operation based on the results of the bar codes read Since bar codes are not read during the validation process during method building the process will stop because the software does not know which operation to validate next To ensure validation completes satisfactorily the Bar Code Reader step provides the option to enter a value that is substituted in place of actual bar codes during validation To configure a substitute value used during validation 1 In Use for method validation enter a substitute bar code value to be used during method validation for example ABCD 2 In an If step enter a VBScript expression that checks for the substitute bar code for example e Labware BR1 Properties Barcode ABCD checks for an exact match to ABCD Left Labware BR1 Properties Barcode 3 ABC checks for any barcode beginning with ABC In this expression Left instructs the software to begin the match from the first leftmost character in the substitute bar code 3 instructs the software to look at only the first three
42. on the appropriate deck locations by dragging and dropping ALPs from the ALP Types List onto the Deck View When the Deck View reflects the configuration of the current physical deck proceed to step 3 Orbital Shaker ALP 14 11 3 Double click on the deck position in the deck view that contains the AccuFrame Position Properties appears Figure 14 12 Note The coordinates displayed in Position Properties are default values the software must be taught precisely where the ALPs physical position is on the deck Name Orbitan ALRT ype OrbitalS haker LP x em Y cm Z em Precision Pod1 Coordinates 24 434 7 233 15 7 Not Framed Advanced MC Teach More gt gt Manual Teach Auto Teach 7 Cancel Figure 14 12 Position Properties for the selected Orbital Shaker ALP 4 In Pod choose the pod used to frame the ALP Pod 1 or Pod 2 gt FX Pod is available only if the Biomek instrument is configured as a dual pod instrument Note Any pod accessing an ALP must be framed to that ALP 5 Choose Auto Teach The pod moves to the position being taught The framing probe on the framing fixture should be above the AccuFrame in that position 6 Visually verify that the framing probe is positioned to lower within the AccuFrame Tool without hitting the walls of the AccuFrame 7 Choose OK to begin framing the position Note The pod lowers and moves around inside the AccuFrame automatically until it b
43. place the bag band below the inside the widest part of the bagging l bagging extension extension using the dashed lines as a guide Span 8 Disposal LA ALP base 9 Figure 17 5 Span 8 Disposal ALP without Slide rubber band placement 10 Pull the bag through the Span 8 Disposal ALP so the opening looks like the photo in Figure 17 6 Beckman Coulter Inc Span 8 Disposal ALP 17 9 disposed tips Pull the bag through the ALP to create the correct opening for disposed tips Figure 17 6 Span 8 Disposal ALP with correct bag placement ALPs User s Manual 17 10 Span 8 Disposal ALP 17 3 Installing the Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide A A Beckman Coulter Inc Installing the Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide includes choosing a deck position and mounting the ALP to the deck Note Since the slide of a Span 8 Disposal ALP extends beyond the edge of the Biomek FX deck the deck must be modified to accommodate the slide Refer to Section 17 4 Installing Protective Shield Blanking Plate on the Biomek FX for more information on modifying the deck to accommodate a Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide 17 3 1 Deck Positions for the Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide CAUTION The Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide must be mounted on the outside columns of the Biomek deck to avoid collisions CAUTION Make sure the correct Disposal ALP is chosen when co
44. s Manual defined A 1 digital inputs A 9 digital outputs A 9 high voltage outputs A 9 installation procedures A 5 B 2 manually controlling A 9 preventive maintenance A 10 replacing high voltage output fuses A 10 replacing power input fuses A 10 setting address switches A 6 specifications A 4 troubleshooting A 11 voltage requirements A 1 Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP calibrating sensor amplifier sensitivity 4 9 connecting cables to controller 4 6 controlling outside a method 4 14 defined 4 1 framing 4 10 mounting the pump head 4 4 mounting to the deck 4 3 preventive maintenance 4 18 removing from deck 4 17 routing tubing 4 5 storing 4 18 troubleshooting 4 19 using in a method 4 11 F framing See individual ALP chapters fuses changing high voltage output Device Controller A 10 changing power input Device Controller A 10 H Half Position Disposal ALP defined 5 1 framing 5 14 mounting 5 3 preventive maintenance 5 14 removing 5 6 storage 5 14 Beckman Coulter Inc Half Position Disposal ALP with Slide defined 5 7 mounting 5 10 Half Position Disposal ALP with slide removing 5 13 Hardware Setup installing a Microplate Shaking ALP in 11 5 installing a Positive Position ALP in 15 8 installing a Stirring ALP in 20 4 installing a Tip Loader ALP in 23 6 installing an ALP in 1 4 installing an Orbital Shaker ALP in 14 14 installing and configuring a Magnetic B
45. 0 00 c eee eee eee eee 10 4 Figure 10 3 Motion error resulting from magnet reaching Positive Limit 10 5 Figure 10 4 Attaching magnet to mounting plate 2 0 0 eee eee 10 6 Figure 10 5 Motion error resulting from magnet reaching Positive Limit 10 7 Figure 10 6 Hardware Setup Magnetic Bead ALP configuration 10 9 Figure 10 7 Warning appears because an ALP is about to be placed where it overlaps another ALP 2 4 i ci cdaccvanav aude idedededeaneseas 10 10 Figure 10 8 Position Properties for Deck Positions 0 e eee eee eee ee 10 11 Figure 10 9 Miniskirted labware on closed and open centered deck positions 10 13 Figure 10 10 Position Properties i4324 24 4cad 40sbeasheed ees tiees bees hGeaeax 10 14 Figure 10 11 Per Labware Offsets e249 aid ew io Vdd e eo eS eee 10 15 Figure 10 12 Labware Vype6is 1ds ceeds ee band etadcbae ivan dsabetegeisa det ius 10 17 Figure 10 13 Basic Information for the selected labware type 0 0005 10 18 Figure 10 14 Magbead configuration for the selected labware type 10 19 Figure 10 15 Device Action step and configuration 0 000 e cece eens 10 21 Figure 10 16 Device Action step for the Magnetic Bead ALP 24 10 22 Figure 10 17 Advanced Manual Control for a Magnetic Bead ALP With Disengage Magnet selected 4 14 vaiccvaveusws eeod eee ed oeaNauaews 10 25
46. 150 47 800 1800 plus Ethanol Greiner96Ubottom MagneSilRed 150 47 1000 1800 plus water Greiner96Ubottom MagneSil 100 31 800 1800 Yellow plus Ethanol Greiner96Ubottom MagneSil 100 31 1000 1800 Yellow plus Wash Greiner96Ubottom MagneSil 100 31 1000 1800 Yellow plus water Configuring a New Labware Type for Use on the Orbital Shaker ALP Orbital Shaker ALP 14 17 14 4 2 Configuring a New Labware Type for Use on the Orbital Shaker ALP CAUTION Only labware compliant with the Society for Biomolecular uN Screening SBS proposed microplate standards is recommended for use on the Orbital Shaker ALP Non compliant labware may not be securely grasped by the ALP or may cause physical damage to the ALP If a piece of labware other than that supported by Biomek Software is used on the Orbital Shaker ALP the parameters of the labware must be configured in the Labware Type Editor Use the Labware Type Editor to configure parameters for each new piece of labware Note Refer to the Biomek Software User 5 Manual Chapter 7 Creating and Modifying Tip and Labware Types for more information on creating and modifying labware types To configure a new piece of labware for use on the Orbital Shaker ALP 1 Choose Project gt Labware Type Editor Labware Types appears Figure 14 14 Labware Types APS6 20uL APG _20uL_LL BCDeep96 Round BCDeep96 Square BCFlatS6 BC
47. 17 Labware Properties Liquid Type RET OK Cancel Figure 2 17 Labware Properties for a Wash Station ALP 3 In Liquid Type select the unique liquid type created for that wash ALP for example WS1_ Liquid 4 Choose OK to save the change and close Labware Properties 5 For each additional wash ALP repeat steps 2 through 4 selecting the appropriate liquid type for each wash ALP Note Each wash ALP must use a unique liquid type 6 In any steps where tips are washed such as Transfer or Combine select a specific wash ALP by selecting the appropriate liquid type in Wash tips in Beckman Coulter Inc 8 Channel Active Wash ALP 2 21 2 5 Removing the 8 Channel Active Wash ALP WARNING Always wear protective gloves when draining the 8 Channel Active Wash ALP of fluid WARNING The waste fluid may be contaminated Follow the appropriate disposal procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer WARNING Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous materials WARNING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials CAUTION Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer CAUTION SPILL HAZARD gt be PERE To remove the 8 Channel Active Wash ALP 1 Turn the waste and source ports on
48. 2 Figure 7 2 Heating amp Cooling Unit lt 4 ja pice tc kd etched betas Pe abG ase dawadiaabaaaces 7 4 Figure 7 3 Heating and Cooling Unit mounting bottom view 02 00 ee 7 4 Figure 8 1 4 x 4 High Density Passive ALP 0 ccc eee eee teens 8 2 Beckman Coulter Inc List of Figures xxxiii Figure 8 2 4 x 3 High Density Passive ALP with a microplate being placed in a labware position 5 246 540 edb ores axes ea Soadd oases nando Byodwa seg 8 3 Figure 8 3 LLS Plate Top View seinen ceserns ci nannan OR Re eR ee EROS a KER eA 8 4 Figure 8 4 Installing an LLS Plate on an High Density 4 x 3 ALP 0005 8 5 Figure 8 5 High Density Passive 4 x 3 ALP with the LLS plate option installed 8 5 Figure 8 6 Thumbscrew positioning on the base of the 4x 3 ALP 005 8 7 Figure 9 1 Biomek NX Span 8 High Density 4x3 ALP 0 cece ee eee 9 2 Figure 9 2 LLS Plate Top View v 26 sth voa dicaed ee nsdn edae dad eew eect aa eed eeads 9 3 Figure 9 3 Installing an LLS Plate on an NX S8 High Density 4 x 3 ALP 9 4 Figure 9 4 NX S8 High Density 4 x 3 ALP with the LLS plate option installed 9 4 Figure 9 5 Thumb screw positioning on the base of the NX S8 High Density 4 x 3 ALP nic vatdiuvcdeedawdegad miner ehidaesstak dans 9 6 Figure 10 1 Magnetic Bead ALP 1 2 ee cc eect tenn e nent eees 10 2 Figure 10 2 Magnetic Bead ALP CAN connections
49. 4 3 Configuring LabwareTypes for Use on the Magnetic Bead ALP Note A Magnetic Bead ALP must be configured in Hardware Setup refer to Section 10 4 1 Installing and Configuring a Magnetic Bead ALP in Hardware Setup and placed on the deck in the Deck Editor refer to Section 10 4 2 Configuring a Magnetic Bead ALP in the Deck Editor prior to using the ALP in a method Beckman Coulter Inc Magnetic Bead ALP 10 21 10 4 5 Configuring the Device Action Step for a Magnetic Bead ALP The Device Action step is used to configure the actions of the Magnetic Bead ALP on the deck during a method such as positioning the magnet verifying the presence or absence of labware or actuating the clamp Note The magnet position remains in the engaged or disengaged state until another Device Action step engages or disengages the magnet D Insert a Device Action step into the Method View Figure 10 15 OESS Note The Device Action step is located on the Devices Step Palette Refer to the Device Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 22 2 Displaying the Devices Step Palette Action to display the Devices Step Palette Biomek Software Method6 New j loj x File Edit Project Instrument Execution Options Help D Ss ERM ce oi m o x Ea Device amp B Start Device M lt Select the device to S control here a Instrument Instrument Setup Command z k Device Setup p
50. 5 Meet the conditions and when conditions have been met select OK The Biomek instrument homes the pod in the X Y Z and D axes Beckman Coulter Inc Orbital Shaker ALP 14 7 CAUTION Make sure there are no tips on the head 6 Attach the framing fixture Figure 14 6 to the pod by holding the framing fixture against the head with the framing guides pressed to the outside of the back row and left column of mandrels Note Make sure the front of the framing fixture is to the front of the instrument and the framing guides are to the back and left of the instrument Figure 14 6 Back of ee framing fixture Front of framing fixture Framing probe Thumbscrews Four thumbscrews attach the framing fixture to the Multichannel head Figure 14 6 Framing fixture 7 Gently pull the framing fixture to the front and right Verify the framing guides are touching the mandrels 8 Tighten each thumbscrew by turning to the right until the framing fixture is firmly attached to the head The pod is now ready for framing Now that the AccuFrame Tool and the framing fixture have been installed continue the framing procedure by homing the microplate platform and actuating the clamps ALPs User s Manual 14 8 Orbital Shaker ALP 14 3 2 Homing the Microplate Platform and Actuating the Clamps The framing process for the Orbital Shaker ALP continues by
51. 9 5 as follows Note The NX S8 High Density 4 x 3 ALP has a single base plate When fastening the ALP to the deck two thumb screws on the base plate must be used e When positioning the ALP along the front of the deck use the 1st front and 3rd thumb screws e When positioning the ALP along the back of the deck rotate the ALP 180 and use the 1st and 2nd thumb screws 3rd thumb screw J tJ lo le D q A D a a K A A 1st thumb 2nd thumb screw screw Figure 9 5 Thumb screw positioning on the base of the NX S8 High Density 4 x 3 ALP Beckman Coulter Inc 9 4 9 5 9 6 9 7 High Density 4 x 3 Passive ALP NX S8 only 9 7 Removing the High Density 4 x 3 ALP from the Deck To remove the NX S8 High Density 4 x 3 ALP from the Biomek NX deck 1 Remove labware from the ALP 2 Loosen the two thumb screws on the base of the ALP used to secure the ALP to the Biomek NX deck 3 Lift the ALP straight up and off the deck so that the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP clear the locating holes on the deck Storage Return the NX S8 High Density 4 x 3 ALP to its original packing materials and store in a dry dust free environmentally controlled area Note It is desirable to allow the NX S8 High Density 4 x 3 ALP to air dry before returning it to the original packing materials Framing the High Density 4 x 3 ALP For instructio
52. ALP Some labware types sit differently on a closed centered ALP than on an open centered ALP because the edge or skirt of the labware is above the bottom of the wells Because these miniskirted labware types sit at different heights depending on which type of ALP open or closed centered they are placed on the software must know which labware types are offset for a particular ALP position On a closed centered ALP miniskirted labware types sit on the wells while on an open centered ALP the labware sits on the skirt and the wells extend below the top surface of the ALP Figure 10 9 For example when a PlasmidFilter is placed on a Magnetic Bead ALP which is an open centered ALP the bottom of the labware is 2 25 centimeters below the top surface of the ALP because the skirt is 2 25 centimeters above the bottom of the wells This labware type needs a Z offset of 2 25 cm for any open centered ALP that it is placed on Note For these miniskirted labware types it is important to properly define per labware offsets for obstacle avoidance and accurate pipetting TOA a aa d centered Open centered Figure 10 9 Miniskirted labware on closed and open centered deck positions To set per labware offsets for a deck position Note When creating or modifying a deck all open centered positions need to define per lab
53. ALP on a Biomek Laboratory Automation Workstation Note When the 4 x 3 ALP is mounted on the Biomek deck enough space is available in the remaining open row for larger ALPs such as the Tip Wash ALPs or the Solid Phase Extraction SPE Vacuum Manifold ALP Note After a deck position has been chosen on which to physically mount the ALP configure the ALP in the Deck Editor refer to the Biomek Software User 5 Manual Chapter 5 Preparing and Managing the Deck 8 2 2 Mounting a 4 x 3 ALP to the Deck To mount the 4 x 3 ALP to the Biomek deck complete the following 1 Choose an appropriate deck location to mount the ALP to the deck refer to Section 8 2 1 Choosing a Deck Position for the 4 x 3 ALP 2 Position the ALP so the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP stand slip into locating holes on the deck Make sure the front of the ALP faces the front of the Biomek deck Note The front of the 4 x 3 ALP is indicated with the word FRONT etched on the base of the ALP stand Note Use the deck laser etchings as a guide when positioning a 4 x 3 ALP on the deck High Density Passive ALPs 8 7 3 Fasten the ALP to the deck using four of the six thumbscrews on the base of the ALP Figure 8 6 as follows Note The 4 x 3 ALP has two base plates like the one displayed in Figure 8 6 When fastening the ALP to the deck two thumbscrews on each base plate must be used e When positioning the ALP along the front of the
54. Biomek deck use the Ist front thumbscrew and the 3rd thumbscrew e When positioning the ALP along the back of the Biomek deck use the 2nd thumbscrew and the 3rd thumbscrew 3rd thumbscrew 2nd thumbscrew 1st thumbscrew Figure 8 6 Thumbscrew positioning on the base of the 4 x 3 ALP 8 2 3 Choosing a Deck Position for the 4 x 4 ALP The 4 x 4 ALP occupies four columns and four rows on the Biomek deck The 4 x 4 ALP can be placed in one location on the deck When mounting a 4 x 4 ALP ona Biomek instrument use the Biomek Software Deck Editor to determine the available deck position Note After a deck position has been chosen on which to physically mount the ALP configure the ALP in the Deck Editor refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 5 Preparing and Managing the Deck ALPs User s Manual 8 8 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 High Density Passive ALPs 8 2 4 Mounting the 4 x 4 ALP to the Deck To mount the 4 x 4 ALP to the Biomek deck complete the following 1 Position the ALP so the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP stand slip into locating holes on the deck Note Use the deck laser etchings as a guide when positioning a 4 x 4 ALP on the deck 2 Fasten the ALP to the deck using the four thumbscrews on the base of the ALP Note The 4 x 4 ALP does not have a front or back side Framing Instructions Frame High Density Pa
55. Choose Exit to close Manual Control ALPs User s Manual 20 6 Stirring ALP To turn off a Stirring ALP 1 Choose Instrument gt Manual Control Manual Control appears 2 Choose Advanced Controls 3 Select the desired Stirrer ALP Advanced Manual Control for the selected Stirring ALP appears Figure 20 3 From Command choose Off Choose Go Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control NY DH WN A Choose Exit to close Manual Control 20 6 Removing the Stirring ALP CAUTION The reservoir and stir bar may be contaminated following VAN use Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer To remove the ALP 1 Turn off power to main unit before removing the Stirring ALP 2 Carefully remove the reservoir from the Stirring ALP being careful not to spill any residual liquid 3 Unplug the CAN communication cable from the CAN Port on the Stirring ALP 4 Loosen the mounting screws 5 Lift the Stirring ALP in an upward motion to clear the locating pins from the locating holes on the deck 20 7 Storage CAUTION Clean the reservoir before storing or filling with another A N substance Return the Stirring ALP to the original packing materials and store in a dry dust free environmentally controlled area Note Itis desirable to allow the Stirring ALP to air dry before returning it to the original packing materials 20 8 Preventive Maintenance Follow the
56. Control DrainableRefillableReservc Command Figure 4 10 Advanced Manual Control for a Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP with Fill selected 5 Choose Go The reservoir fills to the maximum level allowed by the sensor 6 Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control 7 Choose Exit to close Manual Control Beckman Coulter Inc 4 15 Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP 4 5 2 Draining the Reservoir Use Advanced Manual Control to drain the contents of the reservoir back into the supply container To drain a Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP 1 Choose Instrument gt Manual Control Manual Control appears 2 Choose Advanced Controls A list of the installed pod and devices appears 3 Select the desired DrainableRefillableReservoir Advanced Manual Control for the selected ALP appears 4 In Command choose Drain Figure 4 11 Advanced Manual Control DrainableRefillableReserve ir 1 Command Figure 4 11 Advanced Manual Control for a Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP with Drain selected 5 Choose Go The liquid in the reservoir drains back into the supply container 6 Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control 7 Choose Exit to close Manual Control Note When air bubbles form at the end of the tubing in the supply container the reservoir and tubing are free of liquid ALPs User s Manual 4 16 Beckman Coulter Inc Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP 4 5 3 Chec
57. EEO Name sri ALP Type JoneByThreeStorage x fem Y cm Z cm Precision Podi Coordinates fs 421 F 23 15 7 Not Framed Advanced MC Teach lt lt less Manual Teach Auto Teach Device none Device Index z Device Control Sensor Device nonez X cm Y cm zcm Labware Offset 0 635 0 635 i Per labware Offsets Position Span 14 079 9 837 Min Safe Height fi OK Cancel Figure 21 5 Position Properties after More is chosen 6 If desired choose Per labware Offsets to customize the offsets for specific types of labware refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Section 5 4 3 3 Changing Per Labware Offsets 7 If necessary adjust the Min Safe Height refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Section 5 4 3 Setting ALP Properties and Deck Positions 8 Choose OK to save the position properties and return to the Deck Editor 9 Choose Save to save changes to save the new deck configuration and close the editor Beckman Coulter Inc Storage ALPs FX only 21 7 21 2 3 Adding Other ALPs to the Deck Since the Storage ALPs are positioned partially off the left side of the deck space becomes available for three additional ALPs Once the deck has been configured for the Storage ALPs drag and drop other ALPs from the ALP list to the available positions Figure 21 6 displays a deck with three Storage ALPs and three Standard 1 x 1 ALPs positioned in the available deck space
58. ET EES SSOD SSOD SSO SSOD SOO SSO SS Test tube rack locating hole There are two locating holes 9 on each test tube rack Labware positioning screws The labware positioning screw must be next to labware position A1 on the test tube rack Locating pin There are two locating pins for each test tube rack Figure 22 8 Mounting tube racks to a 1 x 3 Test Tube Rack ALP Left facing Beckman Coulter Inc Test Tube Rack ALPs 22 11 22 5 Adding and Removing Septum Piercing Tube Racks to Tube Rack ALPs NX S8 only Septum piercing test tube racks must be properly added to the Test Tube Rack ALPs so position Al on the septum piercing test tube rack is in the front left corner of a labware position on the Test Tube Rack ALP A septum piercing adaptor consisting of two side plates and a top adaptor plate is attached to the ALP to securely hold and position test tubes for piercing by septum piercing tips 22 5 1 Adding Septum Piercing Tube Racks To add septum piercing test tube racks to the Test Tube Rack ALP 1 If labware positioning screws are installed on the Test Tube Rack ALP remove them by turning them counterclockwise 2 Orient the test tube rack so the position labeled A1 on the test tube rack is on the front left side of the ALP 3 Lower the test tube rack so the locating holes on the bottom of the rack slip over the locating pins on
59. Exit to close Manual Control 14 5 3 Manually Executing a Previously Defined Shaking Profile To configure the Orbital Shaker ALP to follow previously defined shaking profiles 1 In Command select Run Figure 14 30 Advanced Manual Control OrbitalShakerALPO Command Run bd Profile to Run Magbead Mix Cell pellet breakup Magbead Mix MagneSil Yellow Go Abort Close Figure 14 30 Using Advanced Manual Control to run a previously defined shaking profile on an Orbital Shaker ALP ALPs User s Manual 14 42 Orbital Shaker ALP 2 In Profile to Run select the desired profile There are three profiles available for selection e Cell pellet breakup resuspends cells using 190uL Promega Cell Resuspension Solution in a Costar 96 square deep well microplate The Cell pellet breakup profile completes five 1 second pulses at 950 RPM then 28 5 second pulses at 900 RPM and finally 90 seconds of shaking in a counterclockwise direction at 900 RPM e Magbead Mix mixes MagneSil particles in low viscosity fluids The Magbead Mix profile completes three 2 second pulses at 800 RPM followed by 60 seconds of shaking in a constant direction at 750 RPM Note More gentle mix typically used for particles in low viscosity fluids e MagneSil Yellow mixes MagneSil Yellow particles in a water or wash solution The MagneSil profile completes 12 4 second pulses at 1000 RPM Note More vigorous mix typica
60. Fie Edit Project Instrument Execution Options Help D eet BRS se lo gt c all gt 0 ol xem Deck position amp A Start Device PositivePositiona LPO x de Indicates the position of the inane INstrument Setup Command z device performing the action Setup A Q 9 Device Action on the deck Device Transfer K Finish D Device Action step configuration i lt amp Devie g ve The Device Action step configuration Action ombine A specifies an operation performed on the ii a Method View Positive Position ALP Move Tiploader kware The Device 4 Action caption indicates the device and its status Comment Pause l Method4 BiomekFx BiomekFX ETC 0 00 03 Figure 15 4 Device Action Step for the Positive Position ALP 3 In Command indicate the desired action for the Positive Position ALP e Clamp tightens the clamp to hold the labware in place e Unclamp releases the clamp to allow the labware to be removed from the ALP e VerifyLabware verifies that labware is currently on the Positive Position ALP an error displays and the method stops if no labware is found VerifyNoLabware verifies that there is currently no labware on the Positive Position ALP an error displays and the method stops if labware is found ALPs User s Manual 15 10 Posi
61. Figure 6 24 Note The deck position has a blue border in the Current Deck Display Biomek Software Method3 New File Edit Project Instrument Execution Options Help D Sa OBS Lel oale n x Ea Deck Position amp 9 Indicates the location of the device eas Instrument Setup performing the action on the deck Setup Q o WashPump3 On Device Transfer g Finish lt lt 2 Combine 5 x w n D m T n olk 5 Device Action Step Configuration The Device Action step configuration specifies an operation performed on a Method View wash station ALP Device Action zd The Device Action labware caption indicates the g device and its status Tip Loader Comment Method3 BiomekFx BiomekFX ETC 0 00 10 Figure 6 25 Device Action step for the fan 3 In Command indicate the desired state for the fan on the HDR Pin Drying ALP On or Off Note The fan automatically stops when the Finish step is executed ALPs User s Manual 6 40 HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 6 7 Controlling the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir Outside a Method The HDR Pin Drying ALP and circulating reservoir are both controlled by a Device Controller Use Advanced Manual Control for a selected Device Controller to Turn the output channels on or
62. Manual 6 10 HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 3 Connect one end of the larger L36 Pharmed tubing to the outlet quick disconnect fitting on the bottom of the reservoir Figure 6 4 Note The outlet quick disconnect fitting is located along the outer edge of the reservoir Inlet quick disconnect fitting Outlet quick disconnect fitting Figure 6 4 Quick disconnect fittings on the HDR circulating reservoir 4 Position the peristaltic pump at an off deck location near the circulating reservoir 5 Place the supply and waste containers in an off deck position near the peristaltic pump 6 Fill the supply container with the desired wash fluid 7 Run both the inlet and outlet tubing off the Biomek FX deck either through the access holes on the back of the instrument between the towers or between the light curtain and the deck on the side of the Biomek FX Note Make sure the tube routing does not interfere with the operation of the Biomek FX Beckman Coulter Inc 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 6 11 Run the inlet tubing through one of the pump heads from left to right Figure 6 5 Figure 6 5 Tubing connections between circulating reservoir and pump Insert the opposite end of the inlet tubing into the hole in the lid of the supply c
63. More gt gt Manual Teach Auto Teach emes Figure 2 9 Position Properties for an 8 Channel Active Wash ALP 4 In Name verify that the ALP is assigned a unique name ALPs User s Manual 2 12 8 Channel Active Wash ALP 5 Choose Manual Teach Biomek NX Manual Framing Wizard opens with a Warning Figure 2 10 Note On the left side of Manual Framing Wizard a list of steps required to complete the teaching process is displayed As the steps of Manual Framing Wizard are accessed the steps are highlighted on the left li Biomek NX Manual Framing Wizard J l0l x Warning Warning If you have snapped a continuation manually framing will erase it Press Cancel now to avoid this Clear all other positions of labware and then press Next Finish Figure 2 10 Manual Framing Wizard Warning Beckman Coulter Inc 6 Choose Next Biomek NX Manual Framing Wizard Setup displays either Figure 2 11 or Figure 2 12 depending on whether or not tips are already loaded onto the pod W Biomek NX Manual Framing Wizard tipbox on position Teach x Y Finish v on position W1 Teach xY TeachZ Finish cers ter Figure 2 12 Manual Framing Wizard if tips are loaded 2 14 8 Channel Active Wash ALP 7 Ifno tips are loaded in Load tips from the select the type of tip
64. Pod2 OK Cancel Figure 18 2 Position Properties for the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP 5 In Name verify that the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP is assigned a unique name Note The software automatically assigns a name beginning with a W and followed by a number for example W1 and W2 6 In Pod select the Span 8 Pod used to frame the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP ALPs User s Manual 18 6 Span 8 Tip Wash ALP 7 Choose Manual Teach Manual Teaching opens with a Warning Figure 18 3 Note On the left side of Manual Teaching a list of steps required to complete the teaching process are displayed As the steps of Manual Teaching are accessed they are highlighted on the left Manual Teaching Warning Warning If you have snapped a continuation manually framing will erase it Press Cancel now to avoid this Clear all other positions of labware and then press Next TeachZ Figure 18 3 Manual Teaching Warning Beckman Coulter Inc Span 8 Tip Wash ALP 18 7 8 Choose Next Manual Teaching appears Figure 18 4 Manual Teaching Load tips from the AP96_200uL tipbox on position X Warming Line tips up against position W1 Current deck display Cancel Figure 18 4 Manual Teaching Setup 9 Ifdisposable tip mandrels are installed in Load tips from the verify that the appropriate tips are selected 10 In tipbox on position select the deck posi
65. Position Disposal ALP NX S8 only 5 1 Overview The Half Position Disposal ALP provides a means to dispose of tips during a method When the slide is attached it can be used to dispose of tips tip boxes and labware during a method Because this ALP only takes a half position a Span 8 Wash ALP may be placed on the other half position to conserve space on the Biomek NX deck The Half Position Disposal ALP is used by the Span 8 Pod on the Biomek NX deck in one of two ways e Half Position Disposal ALP The disposed tips are placed into a waste receptacle positioned inside the ALP base OR e Half Position Disposal ALP with Slide A slide that extends beyond the edge of the Biomek deck is inserted into the ALP Tips tip boxes and labware placed inside the ALP slide down into a receptacle placed below Note Labware that hangs below the gripper such as an SPE filter plate or a tip box lid cannot be placed inside the ALP Note The Half Position Disposal ALP is shipped so that either of the two options above can be assembled and used The information in this chapter includes mounting the ALP to the deck framing removing the ALP from the deck storing and preventive maintenance for the following e Half Position Disposal ALP refer to Section 5 2 Half Position Disposal ALP e Half Position Disposal ALP with Slide refer to Section 5 3 Half Position Disposal ALP with Slide ALPs User s Manual 5 2
66. Position Properties Section 21 2 2 Adding Other ALPs to the Deck Section 21 2 3 Beckman Coulter Inc Storage ALPs FX only 21 3 21 2 1 Adding a Storage ALP to the Deck A new Storage ALP is added to the deck using the Deck Editor The new deck position is named automatically when a Storage ALP is added to the deck To add an Storage ALP to the deck 1 From the Instrument menu select Deck Editor Deck Editor appears 2 Click and hold the mouse button on OneByOneStorage in the ALP Types List The Deck Editor interface moves slightly to the right to indicate the positions on the left of the deck capable of supporting the 1 x 1 Storage ALP Figure 21 1 OR Click and hold the mouse button on OneByThreeStorage in the ALP Types List The Deck Editor interface moves slightly to the right to indicate the positions on the left of the deck capable of supporting the 1 x 3 Storage ALP Figure 21 2 Deck2 Default Deck D x if x if a New Deck Delete Deck Rename Deck OpenDeck Clear Deck Renumber Delete ALP Properties Save Cancel OrbitalShaker ALP PositivePositionALP ShakerALP SpansActive WashLefl Span8ActiveWashRigl Span8TipTrashLeft Span8TipTrashRight Span WashLeft zi Dashed lines indicate where the 1 x 1 Storage fens ieee fis ALP Types List ALP can be placed on the Biomek FX deck Coords cem Aja nes ESSES Ra Figure 21 1 1x1 Storage ALP deck
67. Preventive Maintenance Section 13 8 Troubleshooting Section 13 9 Cleaning wells 0000001 00000000 A Figure 13 1 96 Channel Tip Wash ALP 13 4 Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs 13 2 Installing Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs A A A A A A A A Beckman Coulter Inc Installing Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs to the deck includes choosing the deck position and mounting the ALP to the deck WARNING SPILL HAZARD WARNING Do not kink the hoses WARNING Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous materials WARNING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials WARNING Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer CAUTION Orient the Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs so the in and out connections face the back of the Biomek instrument CAUTION Use the 96 Channel Tip Wash ALP only with the 96 disposable tip head CAUTION Use the 384 Channel Tip Wash ALP only with the 384 disposable tip head Note The Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs require both an in and an out hose to attach the ALP to the pump Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs 13 5 13 2 1 Choosing a Deck Position Use the Deck Editor to determine where the ALP may be mou
68. Refillable Reservoir ALP 1 Remove the ALP from the deck refer to Section 4 6 Removing the Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP From the Deck Note The ALP should be allowed to air dry before it is repacked for storage 2 Return the ALP to its original packing materials and store in a dry dust free environmentally controlled area 4 8 Preventive Maintenance WARNING The Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP may be UN contaminated from method solutions Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer The ALP requires minimal maintenance Observe the following guidelines e Do not overflow the reservoir e Drain any solutions from the reservoir when not in use and follow the appropriate decontamination and cleaning procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer Note Refer to Section 4 5 2 Draining the Reservoir for more information about draining the reservoir e Periodically inspect the tubing for wear and stress fractures e Periodically inspect the tubing connections for leakage e Replace tubing when required Note For more information about recommended maintenance procedures and intervals for the peristaltic pump and tubing refer to the user manuals provided by the manufacturers Beckman Coulter Inc 4 9 Troubleshooting Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP 4 19 Do not attempt to repair the Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP without first c
69. Shaker ALP shakes in each direction Note The minimum value allowed in Time to Pulse is 0 5 seconds while the maximum value allowed in Time to Pulse is 5 seconds 4 Enter the Number of times to Pulse to execute the pulsing sequence Note The minimum value allowed in Number of times to Pulse is 1 and the maximum is 1000 ALPs User s Manual 14 44 Orbital Shaker ALP 5 Choose Go The ALP pulses the labware according to the specified parameters OR Choose Abort to immediately stop the action in process 6 Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control 7 Choose Exit to close Manual Control 14 5 5 Manually Stopping a Shaking Procedure Already in Process To configure the Orbital Shaker ALP to stop a Manual Shake procedure already in process Note Stop will not halt a timed shake pulse shake or profile shake procedure already in process Abort must be used to stop a timed shake pulse shake or profile shake procedure Note The default configuration for stopping a shaking procedure is 1 second 1 In Command select Stop Figure 14 32 Advanced Manual Control OrbitalShakerALPO Command Ep Time to stop fi seconds 0 5 600 Go Abort Close Figure 14 32 Using Advanced Manual Control to stop all shaking motion on an Orbital Shaker ALP 2 In Time to stop enter the duration in seconds the device has to move from full speed to a full stop Note The minimum value allowed in Time to stop is
70. Span 8 Disposal ALP to the deck using the thumbscrews on the base of the Span 8 Disposal ALP Figure 17 7 Thumbscrews Figure 17 7 Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide thumbscrews bottom view ALPs User s Manual 17 12 Span 8 Disposal ALP 6 Attach the slide to the ALP by lowering the upper tabs into the grooves in the Span 8 Disposal ALP base Figure 17 8 Springs Two springs are used to secure the bagging extension to the Disposal ALP base The second spring is opposite the one shown here Bagging extension Upper tabs Span 8 Disposal ALP slide Grooves for tabs Upper tabs slide into the grooves Cutout for springs The springs must snap through to the inside surface of the base Disposal i hut Span 8 Disposal ome ALP base Figure 17 8 Attaching the slide to the Span 8 Disposal ALP Beckman Coulter Inc Span 8 Disposal ALP 17 13 7 Insert the ground screw through the tab on the back of the slide and into the threaded hole in the Span 8 Disposal ALP base Figure 17 9 Note This screw is necessary for proper ESD grounding of the ALP Bagging extension Tab on the Span 8 Disposal ALP slide Ground screw for the Span 8 Disposal ALP gt
71. about to be placed in a position overlapping another ALP Beckman Coulter Inc Storage ALPs FX only 21 5 21 2 2 Setting Storage ALP Position Properties After an Storage ALP is placed on the deck the deck position properties must be set Position Properties include position Name and Per labware Offsets which customize the offsets for specific types of labware To set deck position properties 1 Select the desired Storage ALP deck position on the Deck View of the Deck Editor The selected position is highlighted with a pink border 2 Select Properties from the Deck Editor toolbar OR Double click on the Storage ALP deck position OR Right click on the Storage ALP deck position and select Properties from the menu Position Properties appears Figure 21 4 Position Properties Name bP ALP Type JOneByThreestorage x cm fcm zZ cm Precision Podi Coordinates 9 421 7 23 fs 7 Not Framed Properties Advanced MC Teach More gt gt Manual Teach Auto Teach mes Figure 21 4 Position Properties for a 1 x 3 Storage ALP 3 In Name rename the deck position if desired 4 Specify the X Y and Z Coordinates of the position in relation to the pod s home position by teaching the ALP refer to Section 21 3 Framing Storage ALPs 5 Select More gt gt to display device association and labware offset options Figure 21 5 ALPs User s Manual 21 6 Storage ALPs FX only
72. accessing Advanced Manual Control to home the microplate platform and actuate the clamps 1 Choose Instrument gt Manual Control to open Manual Control An Information dialog Figure 14 3 briefly appears as a connection is established with the Biomek instrument immediately followed by Manual Control Figure 14 4 2 Choose Advanced Controls A list of all the installed pods and devices Advanced Controls SS Advanced Controls DeviceController0 OrbitalShakerSLPO OrbitalShaker4LP1 Podi PositivePosition LPO PositivePositionSLP1 ShakerA4LPO Shaker4LP1 SpeedPumpO SpeedPump1 Stirrer LPO StirerALP1 TiploaderO Tiploader1 Figure 14 7 Advanced Controls 3 Select the desired OrbitalShakerALP Advanced Manual Control for the selected Orbital Shaker ALP appears Figure 14 8 Advanced Manual Control OrbitalShakerALPO Command l 7 Go Abort Figure 14 8 Advanced Manual Control for an Orbital Shaker ALP Beckman Coulter Inc 14 9 Orbital Shaker ALP 4 In Command select Unclamp Figure 14 9 Advanced Manual Control OrbitalShakerALPO Command z Go Abort Close Figure 14 9 Using Advanced Manual Control to unclamp an Orbital Shaker ALP 5 Choose Go The Orbital Shaker ALP actuates the clamps 6 Manually place the AccuFrame against the back left corner of the Orbital Shaker ALP Note Make sure that the AccuFrame is fully seated along the posts along the back
73. and left sides of the ALP 7 In Command select Clamp Figure 14 10 Advanced Manual Control OrbitalShakerALPO Command z Go Abort Close Figure 14 10 Using Advanced Manual Control to actuate the clamp on an Orbital Shaker ALP 8 Choose Go The Orbital Shaker ALP securely clamps the AccuFrame ALPs User s Manual 14 10 Orbital Shaker ALP Beckman Coulter Inc 9 In Command select Home Figure 14 11 Advanced Manual Control OrbitalShakerALPO Command 5 Go Abort Close Figure 14 11 Using Advanced Manual Control to home the microplate platform on an Orbital Shaker ALP 10 Choose Go The Orbital Shaker ALP homes the microplate platform 11 Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control 12 Choose Exit to close Manual Control Now that the microplate platform has been homed and the clamp has been actuated to securely position and hold the AccuFrame continue the framing process by accessing the Deck Editor 14 3 3 Framing the Deck Position with the Deck Editor The framing process for the Orbital Shaker ALP continues using the Deck Editor to frame the deck position 1 Choose Instrument gt Deck Editor to open the Deck Editor 2 Open the deck that requires framing Verify that the deck displayed in the Deck View reflects the current configuration of ALPs on the physical deck of the Biomek instrument Note Ifthe Deck View does not reflect the current physical deck place ALPs
74. applications The waste bags shipped with the Half Position Disposal ALP are not biohazard bags Contact the laboratory safety officer for appropriate biohazard bags and procedures CAUTION Make sure the bag is tight to tops of the flanges The gripper tool must have enough room to move over the ALP WARNING The waste bag may be contaminated Follow the appropriate decontamination and disposal procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer WARNING Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous materials WARNING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by your safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials CAUTION Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer CAUTION SPILL HAZARD CAUTION The Half Position Disposal ALP with Slide must be mounted in the left or right outside columns of the Biomek NX deck to avoid collisions WARNING The Half Position Disposal ALP may be contaminated Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer ALPs User s Manual A A ZN A A A A A A A A A A A A Beckman Coulter Inc HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only WARNING Do not stick objects through the fan guards CAUTION Turn off power to the Biomek instrument and the Device Controller before attaching or removin
75. appropriate decontamination and cleaning procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer Beckman Coulter Inc Stirring ALP 20 7 20 9 Troubleshooting Do not attempt to repair the unit without first contacting a Beckman Coulter Service Engineer Table 20 1 Troubleshooting the Stirring ALP IF THEN The Stirring ALP does not stir Turn off power to main unit Check the electrical connection at the Biomek instrument and the Stirring ALP If the ALP is connected in a chain check all connections in the chain Retry functionality Check rotary address dial Contact a Beckman Coulter Service Engineer The Stirring ALP is not powering up Contact a Beckman Coulter Service Engineer The Stirring ALP is not functioning Contact a Beckman Service Engineer correctly a Note Do not remove the cover s for any reason ALPs User s Manual 21 1 Storage ALPs FX only 21 1 Overview Storage ALPs allow three extra storage positions on the Biomek FX deck Storage ALPs are Standard 1 x 1 or 1 x 3 Passive ALPs that are positioned partially off the left side of a Biomek FX deck using deck positions available through the Storage ALP installation Once the Standard Passive ALPs are installed on these deck positions they are considered Storage ALPs and can be used only for storing labware they are not available for pipetting However the extra space available on the deck using Storage ALPs a
76. are listed under Device in the Device Action Step Configuration Note When an Orbital Shaker ALP is selected in Device the ALP is highlighted by a blue border in the Current Deck Display 5 In Command select the desired action for the Orbital Shaker ALP Note The configuration for the Orbital Shaker ALP changes based on the selection made in Command Note Ifa light curtain violation occurs while the Orbital Shaker ALP is operating the shaking operation is completed Beckman Coulter Inc Orbital Shaker ALP 14 37 14 5 Controlling the Orbital Shaker ALP Outside a Method Advanced Manual Control is used to control the Orbital Shaker ALP outside a method Controlling the Orbital Shaker ALP outside a method includes e Manually Controlling a Standard Shaking Procedure Section 14 5 1 Manually Controlling a Shaking Procedure of a Specific Length of Time Section 14 5 2 e Manually Executing a Previously Defined Shaking Profile Section 14 5 3 Manually Controlling a Pulsing Shake Section 14 5 4 e Manually Stopping a Shaking Procedure Already in Process Section 14 5 5 Manually Clamping and Unclamping Labware Section 14 5 6 e Manually Homing the Microplate Platform Section 14 5 7 To open Manual Control choose Instrument gt Manual Control An Information dialog Figure 14 25 briefly appears as a connection is established with the Biomek instrument immediately followed by
77. as possible Manual Teach is accessed through Position Properties in the Deck Editor To frame the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP 1 Open the Biomek FX Software by selecting Start gt Programs gt Beckman Coulter gt Biomek 2 Choose Instrument gt Deck Editor The Deck Editor appears 3 Adda Span 8 Tip Wash ALP to the deck by selecting either Span8WashRight or Span8WashLeft from the list of available devices and dragging it to the appropriate deck position 4 Open Position Properties for the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP by double clicking in the area outlined in the center of the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP Position Properties appear Figure 18 2 Note Two different sets of properties can appear when double clicking on the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP Position Properties and ALP Properties Position Properties is used to manually frame the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP To open Position Properties double click in the area outlined in the center of the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP A pink outline appears around the W in the center of the ALP when Position Properties are being configured When configuring ALP Properties a yellow outline appears around the W a pink outline appears around the entire ALP position and ALP Properties appears Name fw ALP T ype SpanBWashLett x cm Y cm Z cm Precision Pod1 Coordinates 81 798 19 082 8 804 Not Framed Pod2 Coordinates 81 798 19 082 8 804 Not Framed Pod Podi Advanced MC Teach More gt gt
78. be mounted on the outside columns of the Biomek deck to avoid collisions CAUTION Make sure the correct Disposal ALP is chosen when configuring the deck setup in the Deck Editor Disposal ALPs vary in height and failure to choose each Disposal ALP correctly in the software may result in collisions between pod s and Disposal ALPs during operation CAUTION Bagging extensions are not interchangeable between the Multichannel Disposal ALP and the Span 8 Disposal ALP Each Disposal ALP must use the bagging extension designed for that ALP WARNING Appropriately marked autoclavable biohazard bags are recommended for hazardous applications The waste bags shipped with the Span 8 Disposal ALP are not biohazard bags Contact the laboratory safety officer for appropriate biohazard bags and procedures CAUTION The Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide must be mounted in the left and right outside columns of the Biomek deck to avoid collisions WARNING To reduce risk of personal injury operate only with all protective shields in place WARNING The waste bag may be contaminated Follow the appropriate decontamination and disposal procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer WARNING Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous materials WARNING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials CAUTION Do not spill liquids on or around
79. can be used in each chain of ALPs If more than one long CAN cable is used in a chain CAN communication errors may occur CAUTION Set the shaking speed at the lowest setting and increase slowly to the desired setting This helps prevent spills or splashing Multichannel Disposal ALP WARNING When using the self contained Multichannel Disposal ALP without the slide do not overfill the disposal bag Tips can spill over onto the deck possibly contaminating the deck with hazardous materials CAUTION When using the Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide remove the bagging extension to avoid collisions between the pod and the Multichannel Disposal ALP CAUTION The self contained Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide must be mounted on the back row of the Biomek deck to avoid collisions CAUTION Make sure the correct Disposal ALP is chosen when configuring the deck setup in the Deck Editor Disposal ALPs vary in height and failure to choose each Disposal ALP correctly in the software may result in collisions between pod s and Disposal ALPs during operation CAUTION Bagging extensions are not interchangeable between the Multichannel Disposal ALP and the Span 8 Disposal ALP Each Disposal ALP must use the bagging extension designed for that ALP WARNING Appropriately marked autoclavable biohazard bags are recommended for hazardous applications The waste bags shipped with the Multichannel Disposal ALP are not biohazard bags Contact
80. ccc 5 2 5 2 1 Mounting a Half Position Disposal ALP 000 5 3 5 2 2 Removing a Half Position Disposal ALP 0 000 5 6 5 3 Half Position Disposal ALP with Slide 0 0 0 0 000s 5 7 5 3 1 Mounting the Half Position Disposal ALP with Slide to the Deck 5 8 5 3 2 Removing a Half Position Disposal ALP with Slide ALP 5 13 5 4 Framing Instructions 4 yi lt s46canekesen hk dasee eee twee eaeend nes 5 14 S9 SAROS e Kea S E EE E E E EEE 5 14 5 6 Preventive Maintenance 4 ics ec uuna nuna unauna anae 5 14 HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 6 1 OVETVIEW eirag niee p a e A e e rE 6 1 6 1 1 HDR Pin Drying ALP oct 25 bes 4G kha b ae S0 As OR ERS Reon eas 6 2 Ol RESETVORS a rae aaea Na EEE NEEESE vanes 6 3 6 2 Installing the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs 0005 6 6 6 2 1 Installing the HDR Pin Drying ALP 0 0000 6 6 6 2 2 Installing the HDR Circulating Reservoir on the Deck 6 9 6 3 Installing and Configuring Devices Associated with the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir in Hardware Setup 00 e eee eee 6 13 6 3 1 Installing Digital Devices for the HDR ALP and Circulating Reservoir 0 0 cee eee 6 13 6 3 2 Configuring Digital DEVICES 4446445424000 64adsards Gaon 6 15 63 3 Removing Digital Devices i5 44 064 caniaedsdecdanetranuaseans 6 16 6 4 Adding the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir to the Deck in Biomek S
81. characters in the substitute barcode Note An If step has two branches Then and Else Because both example expressions used in this section result in true only the substeps in the Then branch are validated To validate the substeps in the Else branch enter an expression such as Labware BR1 Properties Barcode WXYZ that results in false then perform a second validation run ALPs User s Manual 3 12 Bar Code Reader ALP 3 6 Removing the Bar Code Reader ALP WARNING Avoid direct exposure to the laser beam Never look directly AN into the laser beam and never leave the laser on open or unattended WARNING Always have the laser module access cover located on the AN Bar Code Reader in place when operating or troubleshooting the laser module To remove the Bar Code Reader ALP complete the following 1 Power down the Biomek instrument before removing the Bar Code Reader ALP 2 Disconnect the interface cable from the back of the PC attached to the Biomek system 3 Disconnect the power line of the split cable from a wall outlet 4 Detach the split cable from the cable extending from the back of the Bar Code Reader unit 5 Remove any labware from the Bar Code Reader ALP being careful not to spill any residual liquid 6 Loosen the thumbscrew s on the base of the ALP 7 Lift the Bar Code Reader ALP in an upward motion to clear the locating pins from the locating holes on the deck
82. devices such as pumps and fans must be installed in Hardware Setup Most ALPs require only installation in Hardware Setup however some ALPs such as the Magnetic Bead ALP require some configuration The configurations required for specific ALPs are provided in the individual ALP chapters in this manual Installing an ALP in Hardware Setup may be accomplished in two ways 1 In Hardware Setup right click Devices or any device under Devices and choose Add Device Note The devices detected but not already installed are available to add 2 Select the desired ALP The ALP is added to the installed devices under Devices in the left pane OR 1 Choose Add Device from the top of Hardware Setup New Devices appears Figure 1 1 New Devices Available Devices iM MagBead4LP HW Address 02 MagBead4LP HW Address 03 OrbitalShakerALP Hw Address 00 OrbitalShakerALP Hw Address 01 OrbitalShakerALP Hw Address 02 OrbitalShakerALP Hw Address 03 PositivePosition4LP HW Address 00 PositivePosition4LP Hw Address 01 Simple Stacker Carousel WashPump OOOOOOOOOOOGC Install Cancel Figure 1 1 New Devices displaying all detected devices Note All the devices detected but not already installed are available to add in New Devices Right click on an available device and choose Select All to select all of the available devices or Clear Selection to disregard the selection Beckman Coulter Inc
83. hawekeeaedee 14 39 Figure 14 29 Using Advanced Manual Control to control a timed shaking motion on an Orbital Shaker ALP gs 0 46s gaaea Ve epee Vanes Aha FER SaEEe REA 14 40 Figure 14 30 Using Advanced Manual Control to run a previously defined shaking profile on an Orbital Shaker ALP 000000000 eee 14 41 Figure 14 31 Using Advanced Manual Control for a pulsing shake motion on an Orbital Shaker ALP v9 25 cay eeebe nce d ohana ade eds hea a wes 14 43 Figure 14 32 Using Advanced Manual Control to stop all shaking motion on an Orbital Shaker ALP 5 i lt e040 40h 45 xe dan ene Recess eee earek s 14 44 Figure 14 33 Using Advanced Manual Control to actuate the clamps on an Orbital Shaker ALP yo fait sede sed end ota Veasboeatnae behead ce 14 45 Figure 14 34 Using Advanced Manual Control to home the microplate platform on an Orbital Shaker ALP 2 4 4cakdeensdeedutina heen tang hana weena tes 14 46 Figure 15 1 Positive Position ALP 6346544 cudebas eee nananana 15 2 Figure 15 2 Leveling screws for the Positive Position ALP top down view 15 5 Figure 15 3 Rotational adjustment screw for the Positive Position ALP left side view 15 6 Figure 15 4 Device Action Step for the Positive Position ALP 000 15 9 Figure 15 5 Advanced Manual Control for a Positive Position ALP 15 11 Figure 15 6 Labware not found at sensor 1 0 0 0 0 cece cette nee 15 12 Figure 15 7 Labware found at
84. high density 4 x 3 passive ALP the reservoir must occupy one of the outside positions to allow space for the tubing and sensor leads to be routed off the deck 4 Attach the tubing to the inlet outlet fitting on the reservoir Figure 4 1 5 Route the tubing and sensor leads off the deck through one of the access holes in the back of the instrument gt FX The tubing may also be routed between the light curtain and deck along the front of the instrument Be sure the tubing does not interfere with the light curtain or the movement of a Biomek FX bridge CAUTION Do not place the Automatic Reservoir Controller or the supply container on the Biomek instrument deck 6 Place the Automatic Reservoir Controller at an off deck location near the ALP 7 Place the supply container at an off deck location near the controller in an accessible position lower than the Biomek instrument height 4 2 2 Setting up the Automatic Reservoir Controller The Automatic Reservoir Controller houses the peristaltic pump head sensor amplifier and connections between the ALP and Biomek instrument Setting up the Automatic Reservoir Controller includes Mounting the Peristaltic Pump Head and Routing the Tubing Section 4 2 2 1 Connecting the CAN Communications Cables and Sensor Leads Section 4 2 2 2 e Calibrating the Sensor Amplifier Sensitivity Section 4 2 2 3 ALPs User s Manual 4 4 Beckman Coulter Inc
85. is displayed in Total Moved From Start cm Hysteresis compensation Leave Hysteresis compensation at the default setting of On This compensates for any variance along the X axis from the front of the bridge to the back of the bridge The Biomek instrument determines a pods position in the X axis based on the position of the bridge at the back of the Biomek instrument Figure 18 5 Manual Teaching Teach X Y 12 To align the tips in the X and Y axes with the white framing points on top of the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP Figure 18 1 lower the tips in the Z axis until they are approximately 1 cm above the top of the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP Note Tip height of the pod is set in the next step in the Manual Teaching process therefore move the pod to any height while manipulating tip alignment with the white framing points 13 Visually verify the physical position of the tips in relation to the physical position of the white framing points on top of the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP Beckman Coulter Inc Span 8 Tip Wash ALP 18 9 14 In Delta select the magnitude of change applied to the tips each time a directional button is selected Figure 18 5 Note The default Delta value is 0 05 cm If the tips are a considerable distance from the desired location increase the distance traveled by increasing the Delta value maximum setting is 1 0 cm If the tips are almost to the desired location reduce the Delta value to
86. labware types to display only Reservoirs to quickly locate the HDRCirculatingReservoir labware type Beckman Coulter Inc HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 6 25 3 Double click the HDRCirculatingReservoir labware type to configure the liquid type Labware Properties appears Figure 6 14 Name Poo Labware Type BiomekFXHORCirculatingW Maximum Volume 111751 pL Bar Code FC E a Labware contains an unknown gt volume 0 0 fu of liquid type S y Sense the liquid level the first time a well with Unknown or Nominal volume is accessed from the Liquid Sense the liquid level every time a well is accessed from the Liquid Show Labware Volumes OK Cancel Figure 6 14 Labware Properties 4 In Name enter a name for the labware Note When a deck is populated by numerous pieces of labware naming labware is recommended Names should be descriptive of the contents of the labware or the work being accomplished during the method Naming labware in a meaningful fashion may reduce confusion Names given to pieces of labware may be entered as variables in other step configurations within the method 5 In Bar Code enter the bar code Note Use the bar code field to identify a specific plate in certain methods such as plate replication This field may be left blank 6 Make a selection in Labware contains Options are Unknown Nominal and Known Note For a Multichannel Pod Known Volume
87. main editor 3 6 Figure 3 5 Bar Code Reader step inserted in the Method View 00 000 eee ee 3 7 Figure 4 1 Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP mounted on a 1x1 Passive ALP 4 2 Figure 4 2 Mounting the peristaltic pump head on the controller 4 4 Figure 4 3 Tubing routed correctly through pump head 00 0000 ce eee eee 4 5 Figure 4 4 Automatic Reservoir Controller ports 0 0 0 saunaan eanne 4 6 Figure 4 5 Fiber cutte oath tack peace i tae a un the aidiead a a aea 4 7 Figure 4 6 Identifying the fiber optic leads 26 nnnnnna nanana 4 8 Figure 4 7 Calibrating the sensor amplifier sensitivity 22 0 0 0 ce eee eee eee ee 4 9 ALPs User s Manual xxxii List of Figures Figure 4 8 Configuring an Instrument Setup step for a Drainable Refillable Reservoir 44 s064 0440 lt 60se4oad0s iatoaate fade ee 4 12 Figure 4 9 Labware Properties for a drainable refillable reservoir 4 4 13 Figure 4 10 Advanced Manual Control for a Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP with Fill selected 404020 54aded4 acest nde veceeeds 4 14 Figure 4 11 Advanced Manual Control for a Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP with Dram selected sidansar soaks scatudeut eadede ees 4 15 Figure 4 12 Advanced Manual Control for a Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP with AssertSensor selected 00 0 cece ee eee eee 4 16 Figure 5 1 Half Positio
88. moves in accordance to the Delta value and the position of the small circle in relation to the large circle Note When the move is completed the small circle resets itself to the center of the large circle The values displayed in Total Moved from Start cm changes each time steps 11 thru 16 are completed If desired the values in Total Moved from Start cm can be reset to zero by selecting Reset 17 Visually verify the position of the tips on the Biomek instrument in relation to the white framing points on the top of the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP If the tips are still not physically positioned above the white framing points repeat steps 13 through 16 until they are positioned above the white framing points ALPs User s Manual 18 10 Span 8 Tip Wash ALP 18 Choose Next Manual Teaching Teach Z appears Figure 18 6 Delta value The magnitude of change applied to the tips each time a directional button is selected Manual Teaching Warning Setup Teach Z The tips should be 0 5 centimeters above the ALP Lower the pod until thel ALP Delta 0 05 em lt _ Left 4m tx aon in Delta with a Beline Down tips touch the top of the Directional buttons The directional buttons move the pod by the amount shown each press of a button ai n From T cm Total Move From Start cm
89. not Make sure the circulating reservoir functioning correctly peristaltic pump and Device Controller are all properly connected to the Biomek FX instrument The circulating reservoir is not Make sure that the tubing is properly filling attached to the circulating reservoir and pump and there are no kinks in the line Make sure the inlet tubing is in contact with the wash solution 7 1 Overview 7 1 Heating and Cooling ALP The Heating and Cooling ALP Figure 7 1 is an active ALP that heats or cools a reservoir microplate or other standard labware It is connected to an external refrigeration and or heating device using nylon fittings attached to a hose which circulates cold or hot water through the Heating and Cooling ALP This ALP is created using a Standard 1 x 1 Passive ALP a heating and cooling unit and a user supplied circulating bath Note The Heating and Cooling ALP is usually dedicated to a deck position since it cannot be turned on and off via Biomek Software and must be controlled from the circulating bath The sections in this chapter include Installing the Heating and Cooling ALP Section 7 2 Framing Instructions Section 7 3 Removing the Heating and Cooling ALP Section 7 4 Storage Section 7 5 Preventive Maintenance Section 7 6 Troubleshooting Section 7 7 ALPs User s Manual 7 2 Heating and Cooling ALP WARNING The Heating and Cooling A
90. of rows occupied by the ALP e The 1 x 2 Test Tube Rack ALP uses 3 rows and 1 columns on the deck e The 1 x3 Test Tube Rack ALP uses 4 rows and 1 columns on the deck Although a Test Tube Rack ALP leaves 1 2 of a column empty two Test Tube Rack ALPs cannot be placed beside each other so that each one uses 1 2 of the same column However a Span 8 Tip Wash ALP can be placed in the 1 2 column remaining next to a Test Tube Rack ALP Use the Biomek Software Deck Editor to determine where the 1 x 2 Test Tube Rack ALP and 1 x 3 Test Tube Rack ALP can be placed on the Biomek instrument deck After a deck position on which to physically mount the ALP has been chosen configure the ALP in the Deck Editor refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 5 Preparing and Managing the Deck 22 2 2 Mounting Test Tube Rack ALPs to the Deck While 1 x 2 and 1 x 3 Test Tube Rack ALPs occupy different positions on the deck they are mounted to the deck using the same instructions refer to Section 22 2 2 Mounting Test Tube Rack ALPs to the Deck To mount a Test Tube Rack ALP to the deck 1 Position the ALP so the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP slip into the locating holes on the deck Note Use the laser etchings as a guide when positioning ALPs on the deck 2 Fasten the ALP to the deck using the thumbscrews on the base of the Test Tube Rack ALP Figure 22 1 and Figure 22 2 Test Tube Rack ALPs 22 5 22 3 Framing Instr
91. other changes made in the Deck Editor and close the Deck Editor Note The per labware offsets are not saved until the deck is saved with those per labware offsets Choosing Cancel loses all per labware offsets along with any other changes made in the Deck Editor and closes the Deck Editor Magnetic Bead ALP 10 17 10 4 3 Configuring LabwareTypes for Use on the Magnetic Bead ALP The Biomek Software needs some additional information about labware types used with the Magnetic Bead ALP Use the Labware Type Editor to configure the magnet types compatible with a labware type the magnet engage height clamp settings and labware sensing Note Refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 5 Preparing and Managing the Deck for more information on creating and modifying labware types To configure Magnetic Bead ALP properties for a labware type 1 Choose Project gt Labware Type Editor Labware Types appears Figure 10 12 Labware Types D a X F X New ony Delete Hename Edit S84ivellReactio AP384 30uL AP96 200uL AP96_200uL_Barier AP96_200uL_LLS si r o E He BCDeep96 Round BCDeep96 Square AP96_20uL_Barier AP96_20uL_LLS tical IAN BCFlat96 BCFullReservoir BCSPECollar BCTuberack 10mm Leer BCUpside Down Tig Figure 10 12 Labware Types ALPs User s Manual 10 18 Magnetic Bead ALP 2 Select the desired labware type and choose Edit from the toolbar OR Double click the de
92. placement of the trash receptacle as required Beckman Coulter Inc Half Position Disposal ALP NX S8 only 5 13 5 3 2 Removing a Half Position Disposal ALP with Slide ALP CAUTION Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any uN spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer To remove the Half Position Disposal ALP with Slide 1 Verify that no labware remains on the slide If labware remains on the slide remove the labware as specified by the laboratory safety officer 2 Remove the trash receptacle and dispose of the contents as specified by the laboratory safety officer Remove the grounding screw from the slide Lift the slide from the base Loosen the thumbscrew on the base of the ALP NH Wn A U Lift the ALP from the deck so that the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP base clear the locating holes on the deck 7 To detach the chute remove the four screws attaching the chute to the ALP and remove the chute ALPs User s Manual 5 14 Half Position Disposal ALP NX S8 only 5 4 Framing Instructions 5 5 Storage Framing the Half Position Disposal ALP occurs when the deck is framed with the Shift Deck command according to the instructions in the refer to the Biomek NX Span 8 Laboratory Automation Workstation User s Manual Chapter 4 Framing Instructions It is not necessary to individually frame the Half Position Disp
93. points Waste port Phillips mounting screw Figure 18 1 Span 8 Tip Wash ALP Beckman Coulter Inc Span 8 Tip Wash ALP 18 3 18 2 Installing the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP Installing a Span 8 Tip Wash ALP includes choosing the deck position and mounting the ALP to the deck 18 2 1 Deck Positions for the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP The Span 8 Tip Wash ALP occupies 1 2 of any deck position including the 1 2 ALP positions located between the two outside columns of the Biomek deck The Span 8 Tip Wash ALP can also occupy the remaining 1 2 ALP position that occurs when a Test Tube Rack ALP is installed on the Biomek deck refer to Chapter 22 Zest Tube Rack ALPs If a Span 8 Tip Wash ALP is required for a single pod Biomek FX Instrument the ALP can be installed on either half of an unoccupied deck position The eight cleaning wells can be oriented to the left or right side of the ALP Figure 18 1 When the dual pod Biomek FX instrument has one Multichannel Pod and one Span 8 Pod it must be installed so the ALP is accessible to the Span 8 Pod without interfering with the other pod More specifically if the Span 8 Pod is Pod1 left arm the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP must be mounted on the left half of a deck position with the eight cleaning wells on the left side of the ALP Note The Span 8 Tip Wash ALP must be positioned on the Span 8 side of the deck Note If different types of waste materials must
94. sensor lt 4 s4se40aee0sGeaedea ekasendeveeas ena wee 15 13 Figure 16 1 SPE ALP with Collar cess nananana nanana 16 2 Figure 16 2 SPE Collar Manifold SPE ALP Base and SPE ALP Stand 16 4 Figure 16 3 SPE Collar placed on the SPE Collar Stand naaa 16 4 Figure 16 4 SPE Collar Stand locating holes and thumbscrews 00000 00 16 6 Figure 16 5 Placing the Framing Tool Adaptor and AccuFrame on the SPE Collar Stand 16 8 Figure 16 6 SPE step and configuration 0 0 0 00 cc ccc cece eens 16 10 Figure 17 1 Span 8 Disposal ALP without Slide 0 0 0 cece eee eee 17 3 Figure 17 2 Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide 0 cee eee eee 17 4 Figure 17 3 Span 8 Disposal ALP without Slide exploded 04 17 6 Figure 17 4 Span 8 Disposal ALP without Slide showing grounding tab and screw 17 7 Figure 17 5 Span 8 Disposal ALP without Slide rubber band placement 17 8 Figure 17 6 Span 8 Disposal ALP with correct bag placement 4 17 9 Figure 17 7 Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide thumbscrews bottom view 17 11 Figure 17 8 Attaching the slide to the Span 8 Disposal ALP 005 17 12 Figure 17 9 Span 8 Disposal ALP ground screw placement 0 0 005 17 13 Figure 17 10 Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide deck positions for a Biomek FX 17 15 Figure 17 11 Left side bottom shi
95. the 8 Channel Active Wash ALP up so that no fluid leaks from the ALP onto the deck 2 Detach the drainage tube from the waste port on the ALP 3 Raise the drainage tube until the fluid in the tube drains into the waste container 4 Remove the tubing from the Biomek NX instrument deck and the waste container 5 Detach the source tubing from the source port on the ALP 6 Remove the source tubing from the deck carefully so no liquid remaining in the tubing spills onto the deck 7 Unlock the pump head by rotating the locking lever counterclockwise from the front of the pump 8 Remove the source tubing from the pump head 9 Drain any fluid remaining in the source tubing into an approved waste container or back into the source container 10 Loosen the Phillips screws on the ALP base from the deck 11 Remove the ALP from the deck by lifting until the locating pin clears the locating hole on the deck Wash ALP may contain hazardous chemicals and fluids Follow the appropriate disposal procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer to dispose of the fluid f WARNING The cleaning wells and reservoir of the 8 Channel Active 12 Carefully empty the ALP of fluids by turning it over and pouring the waste into an approved waste container ALPs User s Manual 2 22 8 Channel Active Wash ALP 2 6 Storage Return the 8 Channel ActiveWash ALP to the original packing materials and store in a dry dust free environme
96. the Microplate Shaking ALP in a Method Section 11 4 Controlling the Microplate Shaking ALP Outside a Method Section 11 5 Removing the Microplate Shaking ALP Section 11 6 Storage Section 11 7 Preventive Maintenance Section 11 8 Troubleshooting Section 11 9 ALPs User s Manual 11 2 Microplate Shaking ALP Figure 11 1 Microplate Shaking ALP Beckman Coulter Inc Microplate Shaking ALP 11 3 11 2 Installing the Microplate Shaking ALP Installing the Microplate Shaking ALP includes choosing any standard deck position on the deck and mounting the ALP to the deck Note Use Biomek Software Deck Editor to determine available deck positions when mounting the ALP on a Biomek instrument 11 2 1 Mounting the Microplate Shaking ALP to the Deck WARNING Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous materials WARNING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials WARNING Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer WARNING Disconnect main power before connecting or disconnecting CAN cables To mount the Microplate Shaking ALP gt eee 1 Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before mounting any active ALP 2 Position the Microplate Shaking ALP so the locating
97. the base of the ALP 4 Connect the power line of the split cable to a power supply using the included power cord 5 Connect the power supply to an AC outlet Note Make sure the cable routing does not interfere with the operation of the Biomek instrument 6 Connect the serial communication cable to a communication port on the back of the PC ALPs User s Manual 3 4 Bar Code Reader ALP A A 3 2 3 Aligning the Bar Code Reader ALP Laser Beam WARNING Avoid direct exposure to the laser beam Never look directly into the laser beam and never leave the laser on open or unattended WARNING Always have the laser module access cover located on the Bar Code Reader in place when operating or troubleshooting the laser module Appropriate alignment of the Bar Code Reader ALP laser beam accommodates scanning of slightly skewed labels and requires little adjustment to the Bar Code Reader itself To align the laser beam correctly complete the following 1 Position a piece of labware labeled with a bar code on the Bar Code Reader ALP 2 Visually verify that the red laser beam is scanning across the bar code If not the Bar Code Reader position needs to be adjusted 3 The laser beam should pass over all vertical bars on the bar code label simultaneously Correct and incorrect laser label alignments are shown below Figure 3 2 In the graphic the top laser is aligned correctly while the bottom laser is not
98. the deck are set Instructions for framing each type of ALP are provided in the individual ALP chapters in this manual Note Refer to the user s manual for the specific Biomek instrument for general information on framing Configuring an ALP within a method Using the Biomek Software ALPs are configured to complete required operations at specified times within a method Any special instructions to configure ALPs within a method are provided in the individual ALP chapters in this manuals Controlling an ALP outside a method Instructions for using Manual Control to control a specific ALP outside a method are provided in the individual ALP chapters in this manual Note Initial installation and configuration of ALPs is completed by a Beckman Coulter Service Engineer when the Biomek instrument is installed ALPs User s Manual 1 4 Introduction to ALPs 1 3 1 Installing an ALP in Hardware Setup Hardware Setup tells the Biomek Software what ALPs devices pods and heads configured on the instrument by providing a connection between the software and the instrument This information is established by installing configuring and removing devices in Hardware Setup After physically installing an ALP on the deck the ALP is detected on the Biomek instrument and must be properly installed and configured in Hardware Setup Note Only Tip Loader Stirring Shaking Positive Position Orbital Shaker and Magnetic Bead ALPs and some
99. the instrument Wipe up any spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer CAUTION SPILL HAZARD PPPRP FP PPPPRPPPPPR P Safety Information xix WARNING The Span 8 Disposal ALP may be contaminated Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer Span 8 Tip Wash ALP WARNING Do not kink the drainage hose WARNING Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous materials WARNING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials CAUTION Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer CAUTION SPILL HAZARD WARNING Always wear protective gloves when draining the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP of fluid WARNING The waste fluid may be contaminated Follow the appropriate disposal procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer WARNING Follow the appropriate disposal procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer to dispose of the fluid The cleaning wells and reservoir of the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP may contain hazardous chemicals and fluids Standard Passive ALPs WARNING Standard Passive ALPs may be contaminated from method solutions Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer
100. the male CAN Port on the Positive Position ALP Note When possible short CAN cables should be used when connecting devices to each other or to the Biomek instrument ALPs User s Manual 15 4 Positive Position ALP 5 Plug the other end of the CAN communication cable into one of the following connectors Note Make sure the cable routing does not interfere with the operation of the Biomek instrument e Any female connector labeled CAN Port on the main Biomek instrument e Any available female connector labeled CAN Port on another Active ALP creating a chain of connected cables Note A chain links multiple devices together The maximum number of devices that can be chained together is three Each chain of three devices must plug into the main Biomek instrument at some point Note The maximum number of Positive Position ALPs allowed on the Biomek deck is 20 6 Verify that address switch ADR1 is set between 0 and 7 Note The device address for a Positive Position ALP is set by both ADR1 and ADR2 Note The default setting for ADR1 is 0 with legal addresses for ADR1 being 0 through 7 If ADRI is set to addresses 8 it is remapped to 0 if ADR1 is set to 9 it is remapped to 1 and if ADR1 is set to addresses A through F they are remapped down to addresses 2 through 7 7 Verify that address switch ADR2 is set between 0 and F Note The default setting for ADR2 is 0 Beckman Coulter Inc
101. the number in the Y cm Figure 13 6 e Ifthe tips are positioned too much to the front of the center of the wells decrease the number in the Y cm Figure 13 6 e Ifthe tips are positioned are positioned too far down into the wells increase the number in the Z cm Figure 13 6 e Ifthe tips are positioned are positioned too far above the wells decrease the number in the Z cm Figure 13 6 Note Estimate the amount or measure with a ruler or calipers ALPs User s Manual 13 12 Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs Tip too far left Tip too far right Increase X offset Decrease X offset Tip too far back Increase Y offset Tip too far forward Decrease Y offset Figure 13 6 Tip and offset explanation 3 When the offsets have been determined choose WashStation or WashStation384 depending on the type of Multichannel Tip Wash ALP and enter them in X cm Y cm and Z cm Figure 13 7 Note WashStation refers to the 96 Channel Tip Wash ALP while WashStation384 refers to the 384 Channel Tip Wash ALP Per Labware Offsets PlasmidFilter RefillableReservoir_B3K Reservoir SBSDeep3845 quare SBSDeepS6Round SBSDeep96S quare SBSFlat384Round SBSFlat384S quare SBSFlat96Round SmallT uberack_10mm SmallT uberack_12mm SmallT uberack_13mm SmallT uberack_Microfuge Span_8_200uL Span_8_200uL_Barrier Span_8_20uL Span_8_20uL_Barrier TiterplateLid WashStation Figure 13 7 Per
102. the tip s position in relation to the framing target on top of the ALP The software uses this graphical representation to know approximately how far in any direction the pod must move to align the tips with the framing target on top of the ALP 2 Select Go The pod moves in accordance with the position of the small circle in relation to the intersection of the two lines Note When the move is completed the small circle resets itself to the center of the graphical display The values displayed in Total Moved from Start cm changes each time steps 1 and 2 are completed If desired the values in Total Moved from Start cm can be reset to zero by selecting Reset ALPs User s Manual 2 16 8 Channel Active Wash ALP 3 Visually verify the position of the tips on the pod in relation to the framing target on top of the ALP If the tips are still not accurately positioned above the framing target repeat steps 1 and 2 until they are accurately positioned above the framing target Note The tips may also be aligned with the framing target using the delta value and directional buttons refer to Section 2 3 2 Using the Delta Value and Directional Buttons 4 Once the tip is aligned with the framing target on top of the ALP choose Next to continue Biomek NX Manual Framing Wizard displays Teach Z refer to Section 2 3 3 Framing the Z Axis 2 3 2 Using the Delta Value and Directional Buttons The tip can be
103. to which high voltage HV port on the selected Device Controller the WashPump is connected 6 Choose Accept to save the changes and close Hardware Setup ALPs User s Manual 2 8 8 Channel Active Wash ALP Beckman Coulter Inc 2 2 4 Adding and Configuring the 8 Channel Active Wash ALP in the Deck Editor After adding and configuring the WashPump in Hardware Setup the 8 Channel Active Wash ALP must be added to the deck in the Deck Editor and the WashPump associated as a device with the position To add and configure the 8 Channel Active Wash ALP in the Deck Editor 1 In Biomek Software choose Instrument gt Deck Editor Deck Editor appears 2 From the ALPs Type List select either the Span8ActiveWashRight or Span8ActiveWashLeft 3 Drag the selected ALP to the desired available deck position to add the ALP to the deck 4 Double click the ALP to open Position Properties Figure 2 5 Name ma ALP Type SpanBActiveWashLeft x cm Y cm zZ cm Precision Pod1 Coordinates 47 757 0 802 9 039 Not Framed Advanced MC Teach More gt gt Manual Teach Auto Teach coat Figure 2 5 Position Properties for 8 Channel Active Wash ALP 8 Channel Active Wash ALP 2 9 5 Choose More to display additional configuration options for the ALP Figure 2 6 Position Properties Name wi ALP Type SpangActiveWashLeft x cm cm Z cm Precision Pod1 Coordinates 47 866 0 679 2 539 Position F
104. with Slide deck positions ALPs User s Manual 12 12 Multichannel Disposal ALP Beckman Coulter Inc 12 4 1 Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide in L2 When a Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide is installed in L2 on the Biomek FX deck Figure 12 9 install the blanking plate with the cutout as follows 1 Remove the four fasteners holding the solid blanking plate 2 Remove the solid blanking plate 3 Orient the blanking plate cutout as shown in Figure 12 10 4 Attach the blanking plate to the bottom shield This creates an opening next to L2 for a slide Note Do not attach both blanking plates Store the unused blanking plate in an environmentally controlled area Solid blanking plate Blanking plate with cutout Rotate this blanking plate 180 front to back as required to accommodate the Multichannel Disposal ALP Bottom shield Figure 12 10 Left side bottom shield with solid and cutout blanking plates 12 4 2 Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide in L3 When a Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide is installed in L3 on the Biomek FX deck Figure 12 9 orient and install the blanking plate with the cutout as follows 1 Remove the four fasteners holding the solid blanking plate 2 Remove the solid blanking plate 3 Rotate the blanking plate with the cutout 180 from the one shown in Figure 12 10 4 Attach the blanking plate to the bottom shie
105. x 3 ALP with LLS Plate Option Installed Labware rests on top of the LLS plate lt a Installed LLS Plate Figure 9 4 NX S8 High Density 4 x 3 ALP with the LLS plate option installed High Density 4 x 3 Passive ALP NX S8 only 9 5 9 3 Mounting the High Density 4 x 3 ALP to the Deck When it is mounted NX S8 High Density 4 x 3 ALP occupies four columns and three rows on the Biomek NX deck Refer to the Biomek Software User 5 Manual Chapter 5 Preparing and Managing the Deck to determine available positions for mounting the NX S8 High Density 4 x 3 ALP on the deck Note When the NX S8 High Density 4 x 3 ALP is mounted on the Biomek NX deck enough space is available in the remaining open row for larger ALPs such as the Tip Wash ALPs or the Solid Phase Extraction SPE Vacuum Manifold ALP To mount the ALP to the Biomek NX deck 1 Position the ALP so the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP stand slip into locating holes on the deck Make sure the front of the ALP faces the front of the Biomek NX deck Note The front of the NX S8 High Density 4 x 3 ALP contains a single set screw Note Use the deck laser etchings as a guide when positioning an NX S8 High Density 4 x 3 ALP on the deck ALPs User s Manual 9 6 High Density 4 x 3 Passive ALP NX S8 only 2 Fasten the ALP to the deck using two of the three thumb screws on the base of the ALP Figure
106. 0 5 seconds while the maximum value is 600 seconds 3 Choose Go The ALP stops all shaking motion OR Choose Abort to immediately stop the action in process 4 Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control 5 Choose Exit to close Manual Control Beckman Coulter Inc Orbital Shaker ALP 14 45 14 5 6 Manually Clamping and Unclamping Labware To configure the Orbital Shaker ALP to clamp or unclamp labware Note Clamp and Unclamp cannot interrupt a shaking operation All shaking operations must stop before using Clamp or Unclamp Note Ifa light curtain violation occurs while the clamp is in motion the motion is completed The state of the clamp does not change when the light curtain is violated or during a pause in a method 1 In Command select Clamp or Unclamp Figure 14 33 Advanced Manual Control OrbitalShakerALPO Command Z Go Abort Close Figure 14 33 Using Advanced Manual Control to actuate the clamps on an Orbital Shaker ALP 2 Choose Go The ALP actuates the clamps OR Choose Abort to immediately stop the action in process 3 Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control 4 Choose Exit to close Manual Control ALPs User s Manual 14 46 Orbital Shaker ALP Beckman Coulter Inc 14 5 7 Manually Homing the Microplate Platform To configure the Orbital Shaker ALP to home the microplate platform Note All shaking operations must stop before using Home Note The ALP mus
107. 12 2 1 Choosing a Deck Position for the Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide CAUTION The self contained Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide must be mounted on the back row of the Biomek deck to avoid collisions CAUTION Make sure the correct Disposal ALP is chosen when configuring the deck setup in the Deck Editor Disposal ALPs vary in height and failure to choose each Disposal ALP correctly in the software may result in collisions between pod s and Disposal ALPs during operation The Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide can be placed in five separate positions along the back of the Biomek deck When adding a Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide to the Biomek deck the ALP must be associated with that deck position in the Deck Editor To associate the Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide with a deck position in the Deck Editor drag and drop TipTrash to the appropriate position in the deck view For more information about associating an ALP with a deck position refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 5 Preparing and Managing the Deck 12 2 2 Mounting a Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide To mount a Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide 1 Remove the slide and chute from the Multichannel Disposal ALP 12 7 Removing a Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide and Figure 12 3 for specific instructions and diagrams CAUTION Bagging extensions are not interchangeable between the Multichannel Di
108. 14 29 Advanced Manual Control OrbitalShakerALPO Command Timed Shake Shaking speed 300 RPM 0 1800 Time to reach full speed fi seconds 0 5 600 Time to shake fi 0 seconds 1 100000 Direction CounterClockwise X Go Abort Close Figure 14 29 Using Advanced Manual Control to control a timed shaking motion on an Orbital Shaker ALP 2 In Shaking speed indicate the desired shaking speed in RPM Note The minimum Shaking speed allowed is 0 RPM while the maximum Shaking speed allowed is 1800 RPM Refer to Section 14 4 1 Establishing a Safe Maximum Shaking Speed for more information 3 In Time to reach full speed enter the duration in seconds the Orbital Shaker ALP takes to reach full shaking speed Note The minimum value allowed in Time to reach full speed is 0 5 seconds while the maximum value is 600 seconds Beckman Coulter Inc Orbital Shaker ALP 14 41 4 In Time to Shake enter the duration in seconds the ALP shakes the labware Note The minimum value allowed in Time to shake is 1 second while the maximum is 100 000 seconds 5 In Direction select whether the orbital shaking motion shakes in a CounterClockwise or Clockwise direction Note The default Direction is CounterClockwise 6 Choose Go The ALP shakes the labware according to the specified parameters OR Choose Abort to immediately stop the action in process 7 Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control 8 Choose
109. 14 3 4 Removing the AccuFrame from the ALP and the Framing Fixture from the Biomek Instrument Pod The framing process for the Orbital Shaker ALP concludes by removing the framing fixture from the pod and accessing Advanced Manual Control to remove the AccuFrame from the ALP 1 Choose Instrument gt Manual Control gt Advanced Controls to open Advanced Manual Control 2 Select the desired OrbitalShakerALP Advanced Manual Control for the selected Orbital Shaker ALP appears Figure 14 8 3 In Command select Unclamp Figure 14 9 4 Choose Go The Orbital Shaker ALP opens the clamps WARNING Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before attaching or A N removing the AccuFrame 5 Turn off power to the Biomek instrument 6 Remove the AccuFrame from the ALP Note To frame additional Orbital Shaker ALPs repeat the framing procedure while moving the AccuFrame to each Orbital Shaker ALP on the physical deck If not framing other ALPs continue with step 7 7 Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control 8 Choose Exit to close Manual Control 9 Remove the framing fixture from the head of the Multichannel Pod after all Orbital Shaker ALPs have been framed Note Any pod accessing an ALP must be framed to that ALP gt FX On a dual pod system in which both pods access an ALP both pods must be framed to that ALP The Orbital Shaker ALP has been successfully framed For additional information on framing refer to the
110. 15 14 Positive Position ALP 15 6 Removing the Positive Position ALP from the Deck To remove the Positive Position ALP 1 Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before removing the Positive Position ALP 2 Unplug the CAN communication cable from the CAN Port on the Positive Position ALP 3 Loosen the thumbscrews on the base of the ALP 4 Lift the ALP in an upward motion to clear the locating pins from the deck 15 7 Storage Return the Positive Position ALP to the original packing materials and store in a dry dust free environmentally controlled area Note It is desirable to allow the Positive Position ALP to air dry before returning it to the original packing materials 15 8 Preventive Maintenance Follow the appropriate decontamination and cleaning procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer 15 9 Troubleshooting Do not attempt to repair the Positive Position ALP without first contacting a Beckman Coulter Service Engineer Table 15 1 Troubleshooting the Positive Position ALP IF The Positive Position ALP is not powering up THEN Check CAN cable connection Contact a Beckman Coulter Service Engineer The Positive Position ALP is not functioning correctly Contact a Beckman Service Engineer Note Do not remove the cover s for any reason Beckman Coulter Inc Solid Phase Extraction SPE Vacuum Manifold ALP 16 1 Overview The Solid Phase E
111. 19 8 deck positions 19 9 defined 19 1 framing 19 9 installing 19 9 mounting to the deck 19 9 preventive maintenance 19 10 removing 19 9 storage 19 10 Stirring ALP controlling outside a method 20 5 defined 20 1 framing 20 4 installing 20 3 installing in Hardware Setup 20 4 preventive maintenance 20 6 removing 20 6 setting 15 5 storage 20 6 troubleshooting 20 7 using in a method 20 4 Storage ALP defined 21 1 Storage ALPs configuring in the Deck Editor 21 2 configuring the Storage ALP Move step 21 10 defined 21 1 framing 21 8 Beckman Coulter Inc Test Tube Rack ALPs 1 x 2 deck positions 22 4 1 x 2 defined 22 2 1 x 3 defined 22 3 adding septum piercing tube racks 22 11 adding test tube racks to the ALP 22 7 22 11 defined 22 1 framing 22 5 installing 22 4 labware supported 22 1 mounting to the deck 22 4 preventive maintenance 22 16 removing 22 15 removing septum piercing tube racks 22 15 removing the septum piercing adaptor 22 15 sizes 22 1 storage 22 15 supported septum piercing tube racks 22 1 supported test tube racks 22 1 Tip Loader ALP air requirements 23 2 CAN connections 23 4 controlling locking rods outside a method 23 7 deck positions 23 3 defined 23 1 framing 23 5 installing 23 3 installing in Hardware Setup 23 6 loading tips 23 6 mounting to the deck 23 3 pneumatic connections 23 5 preventive maintenance 23 9 removing 23 9 storage 23 9 troubleshooting 23 10
112. 3 7 Storage Return the Bar Code Reader ALP to the original packing materials and store in a dry dust free environmentally controlled area Note It is desirable to allow the Bar Code Reader ALP to air dry before returning it to the original packing materials 3 8 Troubleshooting Do not attempt to repair the Bar Code Reader ALP without first contacting a Beckman Coulter Service Engineer Table 3 2 Troubleshooting the Bar Code Reader ALP The Bar Code Reader ALP is not Make sure the power and functioning correctly communication cables are attached to the Bar Code Reader ALP properly Beckman Coulter Inc Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP 4 1 Overview The Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP is an active ALP featuring a reservoir that can be drained and refilled automatically using steps in a Biomek Software method or manually using Advanced Manual Control Figure 4 1 The ALP includes the reservoir which may be placed in any standard position on the Biomek instrument deck and the Automatic Reservoir Controller which sits off deck The controller houses the peristaltic pump head and connections between the ALP and the Biomek instrument The sections in this chapter include e Installing the Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP Section 4 2 Framing Instructions Section 4 3 Using the Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP in a Method Section 4 4 e Controlling the Drainable Refillable Reservoir
113. 5 Gna eee ean t he eaer eerror erre 20 4 20 4 Using the Stirring ALP in a Method 0 0 eee eee eee 20 4 20 5 Controlling the Stirring ALP Outside a Method 0005 20 5 20 6 Removing the Stirring ALP oso s454s5aed ease e ee aN cue Perdana ee es 20 6 ME WaT soz ep aera ead dra anata oe ate gad E a aes ae eee eee an eee es 20 6 20 8 Preventive ViamtenaiCe 25 4242nketced bans eer Era kee eens pace 20 6 20 9 Troubleshooting scene rare y eh eee eRe Mae ee eee oe 20 7 21 Storage ALPs FX only 2L OVERVIEW 4 84 4 48 462A RERG RRDRR ELS RHEE AREAS PRELEREDA a HS 21 1 21 2 Configuring Storage ALPs in the Deck Editor 004 21 2 21 2 1 Adding a Storage ALP to the Deck 0 000000 00s 21 3 21 2 2 Setting Storage ALP Position Properties 000 5 21 5 21 2 3 Adding Other ALPS to the Deck J ssy 2045 oi eekaeer Ve oeswed as 21 7 21 3 Framing Storage ALPS isch vias odin eva dt decedn de ceks ae didenstaw hs 21 8 21 4 Configuring the Storage ALP Move Step 0 cece ee eee eee 21 10 ALPs User s Manual XXX Table of Contents 22 Test Tube Rack ALPs 221 OVERVIOW na Maka Sane tenga ier eaa Wee ea ees e eee ae Renae 22 1 22 1 1 1x2 Test Tube Rack AUP ps 32 0608 seed and peaae es wap Wades ees 22 2 221 2 deo Pest Tube Rack ALP 6 24 entered etatakdartasaeaenes 22 3 22 2 Installing Vest Tube Rack ALPS lt 4 iaccscaleu de Soeous eee denen wnses 22 4 22 2 1 Sel
114. 6 12 Name Ps ALP Type OneByO ne x cm Y fcm Z crm Precision Pod Coordinates 43 484 7 233 5 57 Not Framed Pod2 Coordinates 43 484 7 233 ji 5 7 Not Framed Pod Podi Advanced Mc Teach C Pod2 Manual Teach Auto Teach Device WashPump Device Index fo z Device Control xim Yiem Ziem Labware 0 ffset 0 635 0 635 fo Perlabware Offsets Position Span fi 4 087 9 837 Min Safe Height fi cm OK Cancel Figure 6 12 Expanded Position Properties for deck positions In Device choose the appropriate WashPump to associate with the position Adjust the Min Safe Height if necessary The Min Safe Height is the height at which the pod s move when moving to or passing over the specified ALP and is predefined at a height that avoids collisions between the circulating reservoir and the pod s Note The Labware Offsets and Position Span are predefined in the software Do not modify these properties Choose OK to save and close Position Properties Deck Editor appears Choose Save to close the Deck Editor Note The deck must be framed taught using the framing tools after creating or modifying a deck Refer to the Biomek FX Laboratory Automation Workstation User s Manual Chapter 5 Framing the Biomek FX ALPs User s Manual 6 24 HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 6 4 2 2 Adding a Circulating Reservoir in Instrument Setup After associating the wash pump
115. 8 8 3 Framing Instructions 4 s 4a Ke cesen ter TEE E pra dren ERRARE E ga 8 8 8 4 Removing High Density Passive ALPs from the Deck 8 8 8 5 SOTI TE mep co E r ee E E EE E ee eee 8 8 8 6 Preventive Maintenance suuna unnan va haa eddie Weaker 8 8 9 High Density 4 x 3 Passive ALP NX S8 only 9 1 OVErViEW sireenin eiee eea e Road nnd E Eae EERE EARE EEE 9 1 9 2 Adding a Liquid Level Sensing LLS Plate 0 0 0 000000005 9 3 9 3 Mounting the High Density 4 x 3 ALP to the Deck 9 5 9 4 Removing the High Density 4 x 3 ALP from the Deck 9 7 9 5 S162 a ee a ee a ee ee ee ee ee ee ae 9 7 9 6 Framing the High Density 4 x 3 ALP 0 eee 9 7 9 7 Preventive MamiCnanCey 4io624divesderdaadenakd iadee ee dead oo aededs 9 7 Beckman Coulter Inc Table of Contents XXV 10 Magnetic Bead ALP NOR OVETVIEW a Mana sence teese ter iapa ea a EEDA onan A 10 1 10 2 Installing the Magnetic Bead ALP 262445 cc obese esea gp eecav eden b esas ens 10 3 10 2 1 Mounting the Magnetic Bead ALP to the Deck 10 3 10 2 2 Using Interchangeable Magnets 0 0000 c eee ee eee 10 5 10 3 Framing Instructions 0 0 0 00 0 ccc eect ences 10 7 10 4 Using the Magnetic Bead ALP ina Method 0 0 0 0 e ee eee eee 10 8 10 4 1 Installing and Configuring a Magnetic Bead ALP in Hardware Setup 10 8 10 4 2 Configuring a Magnetic Bead ALP in the Dec
116. A peristaltic pump operated by a Device Controller circulates wash fluid from the supply container through the reservoir to a waste container The circulating reservoir comes in a kit that includes e circulating reservoir labware e supply container e waste container e peristaltic pump e 12 feet of L35 Pharmed tubing e 12 feet of L36 Pharmed tubing Beckman Coulter Inc HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 6 5 Figure 6 2 Circulating reservoir ALPs User s Manual A HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 6 2 Installing the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs Installing the HDR Pin Drying ALP includes mounting the ALP to the deck and installing the fan adaptor plate fan and fan guards refer to Section 6 2 1 Installing the HDR Pin Drying ALP Installing the circulating reservoir includes placing it on the deck and ensuring the tubing connections are correctly attached and routed refer to Section 6 2 2 Installing the HDR Circulating Reservoir on the Deck 6 2 1 Installing the HDR Pin Drying ALP When installed on a 1 x 1 Passive ALP the HDR Pin Drying ALP can be physically mounted in any standard deck position Note When the fan is installed on a 4 x 3 ALP refer to Chapter 8 1 2 4 x 3 High Density ALP for mounting locations and instructions To mount the HDR Pin Drying ALP to the Biomek FX deck complete the following CAUTION Turn off power to the Biomek instrument and the Devic
117. ALP 2 Insert the grounding screw through the tab on the back of the slide and into the threaded hole in the ALP Note This screw is necessary for proper ESD grounding of the ALP and to position the slide Half Position Disposal ALP NX S8 only 5 11 Grounding screw Figure 5 6 Adding the slide to the Half Position Disposal ALP 3 Attach the slide to the ALP using the supplied grounding screw 4 Position the disposal chute by lining up the holes in the chute with the threaded holes in the ALP Figure 5 4 ALPs User s Manual 5 12 Half Position Disposal ALP NX S8 only 5 Attach the disposal chute to the ALP using the four screws supplied Figure 5 4 Disposal chute Screws to attach chute to the ALP Figure 5 7 Adding the chute to Half Position Disposal ALP 6 Choose the desired position and remove the bottom shield that is adjacent to the position so the trash can fall through to the receptacle 7 Place the ALP in an outside column of the deck This allows the slide to extend downward beyond the left or right side of the deck 8 Slip the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP into the locating holes on the deck 9 Place a trash receptacle at the end of the disposal chute to catch disposed items 10 Look down through the disposal chute or drop a test item into the ALP to make sure the trash lands in the receptacle Adjust the
118. ALP left facing Beckman Coulter Inc Test Tube Rack ALPs 22 3 22 1 2 1x3 Test Tube Rack ALP A 1x3 Test Tube Rack ALP Figure 22 2 holds up to three racks of test tubes Test tubes and test tube racks are not gripper accessible or stackable 1x 3 Test Tube Rack ALP Right facing Labware positions Overhang Thumb screw Figure 22 2 1 x 3 Test Tube Rack ALP right facing ALPs User s Manual 22 4 Test Tube Rack ALPs 22 2 Beckman Coulter Inc Installing Test Tube Rack ALPs Installing Test Tube Rack ALPs includes e Selecting the Deck Positions for a Test Tube Rack ALP Section 22 2 1 e Mounting Test Tube Rack ALPs to the Deck Section 22 2 2 After installing the Test Tube Rack ALP test tube racks must be added properly to the Test Tube Rack ALP to use them in a method refer to Section 22 4 Adding Test Tube Racks to Test Tube Rack ALPs gt NX S8 Septum piercing test tube racks may also be used with Test Tube Rack ALPs refer to Section 22 5 Adding and Removing Septum Piercing Tube Racks to Tube Rack ALPs NX S8 only 22 2 1 Selecting the Deck Positions for a Test Tube Rack ALP Each Test Tube Rack ALP occupies 1 2 columns on the deck although the size of the ALP dictates whether it uses three or four rows on the deck The deck positions available for a Test Tube Rack ALP are determined by the number
119. ALP Outside a Method Section 4 5 Removing the Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP From the Deck Section 4 6 e Storage Section 4 7 e Preventive Maintenance Section 4 8 Troubleshooting Section 4 9 ALPs User s Manual 4 2 Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP Sensor window inside reservoir chamber not visible in this view Sensor Inlet outlet fitting Figure 4 1 Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP mounted on a 1x1 Passive ALP Beckman Coulter Inc Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP 4 3 Installing the Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP Installing the Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP includes e Installing the Drainable Refillable Reservoir on the Deck Section 4 2 1 Setting up the Automatic Reservoir Controller Section 4 2 2 4 2 1 Installing the Drainable Refillable Reservoir on the Deck A reservoir stand is not included with the ALP The reservoir may be placed on a standard passive ALP such as a 1 x 1 in any standard deck position The reservoir has no specified left and right orientation which allows it to be positioned facing either direction To install the reservoir on the deck WARNING Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before mounting any ALP 1 Turn off power to the Biomek instrument 2 Place the reservoir on an existing passive ALP in any standard deck position 3 When placed on a
120. ALP into the locating holes of the desired deck position Span 8 Disposal ALP 17 7 6 Fasten the Span 8 Disposal ALP to the deck using the thumbscrews on the base of the Span 8 Disposal ALP Figure 17 4 Grounding tab and screw The screw is inserted through the tab and into the ALP base at this location Thumbscrew Two thumbscrews are used to secure the Span 8 Disposal ALP to the deck The second thumb screw is positioned diagonally to the one shown here Figure 17 4 Span 8 Disposal ALP without Slide showing grounding tab and screw recommended for hazardous applications The waste bags shipped with the Span 8 Disposal ALP are not biohazard bags Contact the laboratory safety officer for appropriate biohazard bags and procedures f WARNING Appropriately marked autoclavable biohazard bags are 7 Fold the top of a waste bag over the frame so that the bottom of the bag reaches the bottom of the ALP base 8 Smooth out the bag to allow items to drop directly to the bottom of the bag ALPs User s Manual 17 8 Span 8 Disposal ALP 9 To hold the bag in place stretch the rubber band over the top of the extension and bag and position it in the location shown Figure 17 5 Bagging extension Bag placement To create an Rubber band opening for the placement disposed items Position the rubber
121. ALP is capable of detecting unskirted microplates using a Device Action step refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 22 6 Device Action Step The Positive Position ALP can also be manually controlled using Advanced Manual Control in the Biomek Software refer to Section 15 5 Controlling the Positive Position ALP Outside a Method Note The Positive Position ALP does not support the Costar Deep 96 well microplate The sections in this chapter include Installing the Positive Position ALP Section 15 2 Framing Instructions Section 15 3 e Using the Positive Position ALP in a Method Section 15 4 e Controlling the Positive Position ALP Outside a Method Section 15 5 e Removing the Positive Position ALP from the Deck Section 15 6 e Storage Section 15 7 e Preventive Maintenance Section 15 8 Troubleshooting Section 15 9 ALPs User s Manual 15 2 Positive Position ALP Fixed labware positioning guides Positive Position ALP clamp Y axis leveling screw X axis leveling screw PN CAN communication ports Thumbscrew Figure 15 1 Positive Position ALP Beckman Coulter Inc Positive Position ALP 15 3 15 2 Installing the Positive Position ALP gt amp Installing the Positive Position ALP includes e Choosing any standard deck po
122. ARNING Disconnect main power before connecting or disconnecting CAN cables To mount the Stirring ALP gt bee 1 Turn off power to main unit before mounting any ALP 2 Position the Stirring ALP so the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP slip into locating holes on the deck 3 Fasten the Stirring ALP to the deck using the thumbscrews on the ALP CAUTION A maximum of one long CAN cable can be used in each chain of ALPs If more than one long CAN cable is used in a chain CAN communication errors may occur gt 4 Plug the female end of the CAN communication cable into the male CAN Port on the Stirring ALP Note When possible short CAN cables should be used when connecting devices to each other or to the Biomek instrument 5 Plug the other end of the CAN cable into one of the following connectors Note Make sure the cable routing does not interfere with the operation of the Biomek FX e Any female connector labeled CAN Port on the main Biomek unit e Any available female connector labeled CAN Port on another Active ALP creating a chain of connected cables Note A chain allows multiple devices to be linked together The maximum number of devices that can be chained together is three The chain must plug into the main Biomek unit at some point 6 Verify the address switch ADR1 is set to 2 ALPs User s Manual 20 4 Stirring ALP 7 If multiple Stirring ALPs are on the d
123. Active Wash ALP gt gt PPr 2 2 2 Routing Tubing for the 8 Channel Active Wash ALP CAUTION Do not kink the drainage or supply hose WARNING Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous materials WARNING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials CAUTION Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer CAUTION SPILL HAZARD CAUTION Make sure the end of the tubing going into the waste container is no more than 6 inches from the top of the container If the end of tubing is near the bottom excessive pressure may cause liquid to overflow onto the deck Tubing must be routed properly to circulate system fluid from the source container through the syringes tubing and probes on the Span 8 Pod into the 8 Channel Active Wash ALP and to the waste container The system fluid container for the Span 8 Pod or a separate container may be used as the source container Source tubing 8 Channel Active Wash ALP Waste port Waste tubing Beckman Coulter Inc Figure 2 2 Tube routing for 8 Channel Active Wash ALP Opaque PharMed tubing is routed from the source container through the pump to the ALP A clear Tygon tubing is routed from the ALP to the waste container 8 C
124. Advanced Manual Control for the selected Magnetic Bead ALP appears ALPs User s Manual 10 32 Magnetic Bead ALP 5 From Command choose VerifyLabware Figure 10 22 Advanced Manual Control MagBeadALPO Command VerifpLabware Figure 10 22 Advanced Manual Control for a Magnetic Bead ALP with Verify Labware selected 6 Choose Go The Magnetic Bead ALP recognizes the piece of labware unless an Error appears Figure 10 23 Note Ifthe following Error Figure 10 23 appears the sensor does not recognize the labware present on the Magnetic Bead ALP the sensor is not operating properly or the ALP does not recognize the labware type Note Contact a Beckman Coulter Service Engineer if several labware types are not recognized the sensor on the Magnetic Bead ALP may not be operating properly or may need to be cleaned using a cotton swab with an alcohol solution 3 Labware not found at sensor Figure 10 23 Error indicating labware not found at sensor Beckman Coulter Inc Magnetic Bead ALP 10 33 7 Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control 8 Choose Exit to close Manual Control Note Ifa labware type is not recognized by the sensor deselect Always Sense Labware in the Labware Type Editor for the desired labware type However the Magnetic Bead ALP could be damaged if liquid is dispensed into an ALP that does not have labware positioned on it 10 6 Removing the Magnetic Bead ALP To remove the Ma
125. C approved Communication to Biomek CAN instrument Device Controller manufactured by Beckman Coulter Inc 4300 N Harbor Boulevard Fullerton CA 92843 3100 Beckman Coulter Inc Device Controller A 5 A 2 Installing a Device Controller PPPI A Device Controller can be installed anywhere that is convenient for normal operation of the instrument WARNING To prevent electrical shock use standard electrical precautions when plugging the Device Controller into the power supply WARNING Do not remove the cover of the Device Controller WARNING Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before connecting CAN communication cables WARNING Turn off power to the Biomek instrument and the Device Controller before attaching or removing any active ALP To install a Device Controller 1 Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before attaching the Device Controller 2 Using an AC power cord connect the AC Power Input on the Device Controller to power source 3 Using the CAN communication cable connect the Device Controller to the CAN communications port on a tower Note Three CAN communications ports are located on each side of the Biomek instrument When making the decision on which CAN communications port to use consider the number of CAN communication ports in use and try to even the load 4 Connect the appropriate devices to the Device Controller Note Making the power connection to an ALP
126. CAUTIONSs found within this document are listed below WARNING If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by Beckman Coulter Inc the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired 8 Channel Active Wash ALP CAUTION Do not kink the drainage or supply hose WARNING Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous materials WARNING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials CAUTION Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer CAUTION SPILL HAZARD CAUTION Make sure the end of the tubing going into the waste container is no more than 6 inches from the top of the container If the end of tubing is near the bottom excessive pressure may cause liquid to overflow onto the deck WARNING Always wear protective gloves when draining the 8 Channel Active Wash ALP of fluid WARNING The waste fluid may be contaminated Follow the appropriate disposal procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer WARNING The cleaning wells and reservoir of the 8 Channel Active Wash ALP may contain hazardous chemicals and fluids Follow the appropriate disposal procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer to dispose of the fluid Bar Code Reader ALP WARNING CLASS II LASER PRODUCT THIS PRODUCT CONFORMS TO A
127. Circulating Reservoir 6 5 Framing Instructions Refer to the Biomek FX Laboratory Automation Workstation User s Manual Chapter 5 Framing the Biomek FX for instructions on framing the HDR Pin Drying ALP Note The circulating reservoir acts as a piece of labware If the deck position holding the circulating reservoir has been properly framed it is not necessary to reframe the position with the circulating reservoir in place Prior to placing the circulating reservoir any deck position that holds a circulating reservoir should be framed normally according to the framing procedure for that ALP Beckman Coulter Inc HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 6 27 6 6 Using the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs in a Method The HDR Pin Drying ALP and reservoirs are operated in a method using the HDR Tool Cleaning step refer to Section 6 6 1 Using the HDR Tool Cleaning Step and the Device Action step refer to Section 6 6 2 Using the Device Action Step The HDR Pin Drying ALP automatically turns off at the end of a method The HDR Tool Cleaning step turns the fan on prior to drying the pins at the HDR Pin Drying ALP and off at a set time after leaving the HDR Pin Drying ALP A Device Action step may be used to turn the fan on or off at any time in a method Once turned on the fan remains on until turned off as a part of the HDR Tool Cleaning step a Device Action step or the end of the method Note R
128. Device Action bres iii Tip Loader Comment D Device Action t Finish Command Select the action for the device to execute here Some commands require further configuration z Method6 BiomekF BiomekFX ETC 0 00 10 Figure 10 15 Device Action step and configuration ALPs User s Manual 10 22 Magnetic Bead ALP To configure the Device Action step for a Magnetic Bead ALP 1 From Device select the Magnetic Bead ALP performing the required operation OR Click on the Magnetic Bead ALP on the Current Deck Display to select it The configuration for the Magnetic Bead ALP appears Figure 10 16 Note When selected the deck position has a blue border in the Current Deck Display Biomek Software Method6 New Oo x File Edit Project Instrument Execution Options Help Dee BRS eB Mo a amp A Start Device MagBeadALPO 7 mace Instrument Setup Command AE TAGE ria Q B Device Action After Magnet Engages Pause for 1 Paes Transfer Finish amp B S5 Action Combine we lat i ae ae wilt Move Method view Device Action step configuration Ware The Device The Device Action step configuration g Action caption specifies an operation performed on the pase indicates the Magnetic Bead ALP g de
129. E ALP ccc cee cece cece enn eens 16 5 16 2 3 Mounting the SPE Collar Stand 0 0 0 eee eee 16 6 16 3 Framing Instructions ic cance apne ee nd aoe oh ke eee KA ARERR eA ee 16 7 16 3 1 Special Framing for the SPE ALP 0 eee ee eee 16 7 16 3 2 Special Framing for the SPE Collar Stand 16 7 16 4 Using the SPE ALP ina Method 0 0 cece eect eee eee 16 9 16 4 1 Configuring the SPE Stepiosscdsveasccnd unanenn tier eedievas 16 9 16 5 Removing the SPE ALP and SPE Collar Stand 04 16 12 IGG SOLIOSs tcc ac esa dnn teed bye ak Gea kad ee PURO Gee RES ed Ghar 16 12 16 7 Preventive Maintenance 2 54 5 22iaenta das Gp hh anchhees pa ah8e ha aGxs 16 12 16 8 Troubleshooting 40x46 23400 2 ekasend re os 4a ee eee Pees Edn TEATE 16 12 17 Span 8 Disposal ALP TIA SOVERVIEW ca yicany 2486 ua 5 ooh oa are he oe ea E E ee es 17 1 17 1 1 Span 8 Disposal ALP without Slide 000004 17 3 17 1 2 Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide 0 0 ee ee eee 17 4 17 2 Installing the Span 8 Disposal ALP without Slide 17 5 17 2 1 Choosing a Deck Position for the Span 8 Disposal ALP without Slide 17 5 17 2 2 Mounting a Span 8 Disposal ALP without Slide 17 5 17 3 Installing the Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide 004 17 10 17 3 1 Deck Positions for the Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide 17 10 17 3 2 Mount
130. Engage Magnet Figure 10 18 Advanced Manual Control MagBeadALPO Command Manual Engage Magnet Labware Jap 384WellReactionPlate Figure 10 18 Advanced Manual Control for a Magnetic Bead ALP with Manual Engage Magnet selected 5 In Labware select the labware type of the labware positioned on the Magnetic Bead ALP Note By default the labware type listed first alphabetically is the selected Labware 6 Choose Go The magnet engages to the height specified in the Labware Type Editor for the selected Labware type 7 Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control 8 Choose Exit to close Manual Control To disengage the magnet 1 Choose Instrument gt Manual Control Manual Control appears 2 Choose Advanced Controls A list of all the installed pods and devices appears 3 Select the desired Magnetic Bead ALP Advanced Manual Control for the selected Magnetic Bead ALP appears From Command choose Disengage Magnet Choose Go The magnet disengages to its lowest position Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control NY DH Wn A Choose Exit to close Manual Control Beckman Coulter Inc Magnetic Bead ALP 10 27 10 5 3 Determining Magnet Engage Height for Labware Types Different labware types sit differently in the Magnetic Bead ALP Some labware may have wells that descend below the top surface of the ALP Different applications may also require a different proximity between the magnet an
131. Figure 6 18 Note The Dipping Configuration is similar to a pipetting technique It specifies the method in which pins are washed Dip Cycles fl Move down to Move up to 0 00 mm from bottom 0 00 mm from bottom Move down at Move up at 50 speed 50 speed Pause for fo seconds after dipping OK Cancel Figure 6 18 Dipping Configuration 8 In Dip Cycles enter the number of times the pins should descend into the wells Note For Dip Cycles greater than 1 Move up to must be configured 9 In Move down to specify the height the pins descend to for each dipping cycle Note By default Move down to is measured from bottom of the well To measure from top of the well or from liquid right click the graphic of the pin in the well and make the desired selection from the menu Note The Move down to height can go as much as 2 mm below the bottom of the well as long as the pod can descend that far Descending below the bottom of the well potentially corrects for any slight imperfections in the labware or ALP heights and can be done safely because the pin push plate is in a floating position allowing the pins to move up and down freely without resistance To specify a height below the bottom of the well right click the graphic of the pin in the well and select Custom Height Enter a negative value in Custom Height to move the pins below the bottom of the well 10 In Move down at enter the speed of the descent of th
132. FullReservoir BCSPECollar BCTuberack 10mm Eu E ai BCTuberack 12mm DAT PEEP helen ate Figure 14 14 Labware Types ALPs User s Manual 14 18 Orbital Shaker ALP 2 Select a piece of labware that closely resembles the new labware and select Edit on the toolbar Edit Note To preserve the selected labware type first copy it and then edit the copy refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 7 3 3 Copying a Labware Type OR Double click the desired labware type OR Right click the desired labware type and choose Edit from the menu Basic Information for the selected labware appears Figure 14 15 BCFlat96 W Save Cancel Basic Information x Y Miscellaneous Movement Information Span fi 2 7762 e5471 cm Orbital Shaker Ordering Information Height fi 4224 cm Stacking Wells_1 Colors Edit Bitmap f Description Beckman Coulter microplate with 96 round flat bottomed wells The shape and general description of There are no errors in this labware type the labware definition LETTI TTTTTET toee oe SOCCCOOOOOOE Figure 14 15 Basic Information for the selected labware type Beckman Coulter Inc Orbital Shaker ALP 14 19 3 Choose Orbital Shaker in the left pane The right pane changes to display the Maximum Speed for that piece of labware Figure 14 16 BCFlat96 ee Cancel SAVE Basic
133. Half Position Disposal ALP NX S8 only 5 2 Half Position Disposal ALP WARNING When using the Half Position Disposal ALP do not overfill A N the disposal bag Tips may spill over onto the deck possibly contaminating the deck with hazardous materials When the Half Position Disposal ALP is used as a self contained waste receptacle without the slide a waste bag is mounted inside the ALP Figure 5 1 Because this ALP only takes a half position a Span 8 Wash ALP may be placed on the other half position to conserve space on the Biomek deck Note The Half Position Disposal ALP is used only for collecting shucked tips Figure 5 1 Half Position Disposal ALP Beckman Coulter Inc Half Position Disposal ALP NX S8 only 5 3 5 2 1 Mounting a Half Position Disposal ALP CAUTION The Half Position Disposal ALP must be mounted on the outside columns of the Biomek deck to avoid collisions CAUTION Make sure the correct Disposal ALP is chosen when configuring the deck setup in the Deck Editor Disposal ALPs vary in height and failure to choose each Disposal ALP correctly in the software may result in collisions between pod s and Disposal ALPs during operation gt gt The Half Position Disposal ALP can be mounted on half of a standard deck position in the outside columns of the Biomek NX deck Refer to the Biomek Software User 5 Manual Chapter 5 Preparing and Managing the Deck to learn how to configure the deck a
134. ING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials WARNING Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer CAUTION Orient the Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs so the in and out connections face the back of the Biomek instrument CAUTION Use the 96 Channel Tip Wash ALP only with the 96 disposable tip head CAUTION Use the 384 Channel Tip Wash ALP only with the 384 disposable tip head CAUTION Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before attaching or removing AccuFrame from the instrument deck ALPs User s Manual xvi Safety Information PPP P BPBBBBBR BB Beckman Coulter Inc WARNING Make sure the light curtain is not violated by the AccuFrame cable If the light curtain is violated the framing process halts immediately WARNING Make sure the AccuFrame cable does not interfere with pod movement WARNING Always wear protective gloves when draining the tip wash fluid Orbital Shaker ALP CAUTION Clamp all labware positioned on the Orbital Shaker ALP even when using the ALP as a standard deck position such as a 1x 1 or a swap space WARNING Disconnect main power before connecting or disconnecting CAN cables WARNING Do not chain Orbital Shaker ALPs together or to any other ALP CAUTION A maximum of four 4 Orbital Sha
135. Information Miscellaneous Movement Information Maximum Speed s00 3 ppm 0 1800 Ordering Information Stacking Wells_1 There are no errors in this labware type definition Describes how the Orbital Shaker ALP should interact with the labware and what the maximum speed should be Figure 14 16 Orbital Shaking configuration for the selected labware type 4 In Maximum Speed enter the highest safe maximum shaking speed for that piece of labware Note Ifthe speed configured in a Device Action step exceeds the Maximum Speed allowed in the Labware Type Editor an error occurs when the method is validated Note For more information on how to establish a safe Maximum Speed for a piece of labware refer to Section 14 4 1 Establishing a Safe Maximum Shaking Speed 5 Choose Save Note Three sections of hints are offered at the bottom of the edit option The first section displays a graphic of the labware the second section explains the selected field and the third section explains any errors resulting from editing the labware properties Place the cursor over the desired labware properties field and click to view these hints ALPs User s Manual 14 20 Beckman Coulter Inc Orbital Shaker ALP 14 4 3 Controlling the Actions of an Orbital Shaker ALP CAUTION Clamp all labware positioned on the Orbital Shaker ALP even when using the ALP as a standard deck position such a
136. LP ALPs User s Manual 10 4 Magnetic Bead ALP CAUTION A maximum of one long CAN cable 1 meter 39 37 in Part UN Number 717781 can be used in each chain of ALPs If more than one long CAN cable is used in a chain CAN communication errors may occur CAUTION A maximum of one device can be chained to a Magnetic Bead ALP If more than one device is chained to a Magnetic Bead ALP the Biomek instrument may not be able to supply sufficient electrical current to operate all devices on the chain 4 Plug the female end of the CAN communication cable into the male CAN Port on the Magnetic Bead ALP Figure 10 2 Address switches Oe O Figure 10 2 Magnetic Bead ALP CAN connections Note When possible short 0 56 meter 22 in CAN cables should be used when connecting devices to each other or to the Biomek instrument Beckman Coulter Inc Magnetic Bead ALP 10 5 5 Plug the other end of the CAN communication cable into one of the following connectors Note Make sure the cable routing does not interfere with the operation of the Biomek FX e Any female connector labeled CAN Port on the main Biomek instrument e Any available female connector labeled CAN Port on another active ALP creating a chain of connected devices Note A chain links multiple devices together The maximum number of devices that can be chained to
137. LP with Slide os seres raisni rinek EKER ERS ALAS EAA MARA ERA RERS 12 7 12 4 Installing Protective Shield Blanking Plate 00 00 0050 12 11 12 4 1 Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide in L2 12 12 12 4 2 Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide in L3 12 12 12 4 3 Multichannel Disposal ALPs with Slide in Both L2 and L3 12 13 12 4 4 Disposal ALP in R2 independ Se eawhna eee dneeaVeeax nea vas 12 13 12 4 5 Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide in R3 12 14 12 4 6 Multichannel Disposal ALPs with Slide in Both R2 and R3 12 14 12 5 Framing Instr ctio s joys Soe t oe std ees ee apad inyu ar EEE ieee 12 15 12 6 Removing a Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide 12 15 12 6 1 Removing the Bagging Extension 00 000 eue 12 15 12 7 Removing a Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide 12 16 12 5 Sage ics a0 sie de ids tt stin de Se ke ERLAR hea had baad REO 12 16 12 9 Preventive Maintenance 046 hdiwdeoe Sed ede ohare eoteidatieeded wa 12 16 13 Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs MAR OVEN occ eta ceed a ogre ere aon ag oe hale ep ate es eas ae ae es 13 1 13 2 Installing Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs 2 0 00 eee eee eee eee 13 4 13 2 1 Choosing a Deck Position 0 0 0 0 0 eens 13 5 13 2 2 Mounting Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs to the Deck 13 5 13 3 Configuring Multiple Wash Stations on a
138. LP and the bagging extension refer to Section 12 6 1 Removing the Bagging Extension WARNING The waste bag may be contaminated Follow the appropriate decontamination and disposal procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer WARNING Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous materials WARNING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials CAUTION Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer CAUTION SPILL HAZARD To remove the Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide gt o gt EeE gt 1 Remove the rubber band and waste receptacle from the ALP 2 Dispose of the bag and contents as specified by the safety officer 3 Loosen the thumbscrews on the base of the Multichannel Disposal ALP 4 Lift the Multichannel Disposal ALP from the deck so that the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP base clear the locating holes on the deck 12 6 1 Removing the Bagging Extension To remove the bagging extension from the Multichannel Disposal ALP 1 Remove the grounding screw 2 Grasp the bagging extension firmly with one hand and the base firmly with the other 3 Pull the bagging extension forcefully from the ALP base to separate the extension from the base 4 Store the extension in a clean dry dust free a
139. LP Stand SPE Collar Manifold Referred to as the Manifold in the SPE step from the Devices step palette SPE Collar Stand Figure 16 3 SPE Collar placed on the SPE Collar Stand Beckman Coulter Inc d Phase Extraction SPE Vacuum Manifold ALP 16 5 16 2 Installing the SPE ALP and SPE Collar Stand gt gt Ee Installing the SPE ALP includes choosing adjacent deck positions for the SPE ALP and SPE Collar Stand and mounting them to the deck Note Connect the SPE ALP as recommended by the manufacturer of the vacuum system being used 16 2 1 Choosing Deck Positions for the SPE ALP and Collar Stand SPE ALP and the SPE Collar Stand occupy adjacent deck positions Use the Biomek Software Deck Editor to determine available positions on which to install the SPE ALP and Collar Stand Note After a deck position has been chosen on which to physically mount the ALP configure the ALP in the Deck Editor refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 5 Preparing and Managing the Deck 16 2 2 Mounting the SPE ALP WARNING Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous materials WARNING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by your safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials WARNING Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any spills
140. LP can reach extremely high A N temperatures Allow the Heating and Cooling ALP to cool before removing it from the deck Heating amp cooling unit mounted to an Figure 7 1 Heating and Cooling ALP top view Beckman Coulter Inc Heating and Cooling ALP 7 3 7 2 installing the Heating and Cooling ALP Installing the Heating and Cooling ALP includes choosing any standard deck position on the deck and mounting the ALP to the deck 7 2 1 Mounting the Heating and Cooling ALP to the Deck WARNING Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous materials WARNING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by your safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials WARNING Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer P To install the Heating and Cooling ALP 1 Turna 1x 1 Standard Passive ALP upside down and mount the heating amp cooling unit Figure 7 2 to the underside of the ALP stand using the four screws provided Figure 7 3 2 Position the Heating and Cooling ALP on the deck so the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP slip into locating holes on the deck 3 Attach the Heating and Cooling ALP to the deck using the thumbscrews on the base of the ALP 4 Attach the in and out hoses to the fittings Figure 7 1 Note The hoses ca
141. Labware Offsets 4 Choose OK 5 Reframe the Multichannel Tip Wash ALP according to the instructions in Section 13 4 Framing Instructions ensuring the correct Framing Tool Adaptor is used Beckman Coulter Inc Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs_ 13 13 13 6 Removing the Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs To remove Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs from the deck 1 Power down the external pump WARNING SPILL HAZARD WARNING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory AN safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials 2 Detach the in and out hoses from the tip wash reservoir Figure 13 1 or Figure 13 2 3 Remove the tip wash reservoir carefully a small amount of fluid normally remains after draining and could spill 4 Loosen the thumbscrews from the deck WARNING Always wear protective gloves when draining the tip wash fluid 5 Lift and tilt the tip wash reservoir slightly to the back right corner to allow the fluid to drain 6 Remove the ALP from the deck 13 7 Storage Return Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs to the original packing materials and store in a dry dust free environmentally controlled area Note It is desirable to allow Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs to air dry before returning them to the original packing materials ALPs User s Manual 13 14 Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs 13 8 Preventive Maintenance Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures out
142. Loading W808 y 0 c04 625 dnesdeea r tar uE EEREN E bate eee ee 23 6 23 5 Controlling the Tip Loader ALP Locking Rods Outside a Method 23 7 23 6 Removing the Tip Loader ALP from the Deck 00 0 0005 23 9 23 1 Str ESS ws avy da 8k bad aeb an deh ad ee ede e seed aes ety ered otee aed 23 9 23 8 Preventive Maintenance adie 2 aa ie AAR AGA ERS LAREN RORUARERA RES 23 9 23 9 Wroubleshooune 4 43 26 2x kee ooh ns Ce oR Hee ierreus neei e 23 10 Appendix A Device Controller 0000 e eee eee A 1 AL MO ec aera es we ea oe a ee Ea ee a wale es RS A 1 A 1 1 Device Controller Specifications nsan 00 00 cc cece eee A 4 A 2 Installing a Device Controller nonna nnana nnana A 5 A 3 Setting Address Switches 1 4 hs vende dent agents aeee A 6 A 4 Connecting Devices to the Device Controller 0 0 ce eee eee eee A 7 A 4 1 Connecting High Voltage Devices 000 cece eee eee A 7 A 4 2 Connecting Digital Device Outputs 000 eee eee A 7 A 4 3 Connecting Digital Device Inputs 00 00 ee eee eee A 8 A 5 Using Advanced Manual Control to Manually Control Device Controllers A 9 Beckman Coulter Inc Table of Contents xxxi A 6 Preventive Maintenance 2 0 eee ete ne eee A 10 A 6 1 Replacing the Power Input Fuse 2 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee A 10 A 6 2 Replacing the High Voltage Output Fuse 000 A 10 AT Trou
143. Make sure the AccuFrame cable does not interfere with pod movement 4 Turn on power to Biomek instrument 5 Manually place the AccuFrame into the Framing Tool Adaptor by placing the front right corner first and pushing the AccuFrame gently down into the Adaptor Figure 16 5 ALPs User s Manual 16 8 Solid Phase Extraction SPE Vacuum Manifold A 6 Frame the SPE Collar Stand according to the instructions outlined in the specific user s manual for the instrument AccuFrame Framing Tool Adaptor 8 0 m i SPE Collar Stand Figure 16 5 Placing the Framing Tool Adaptor and AccuFrame on the SPE Collar Stand Beckman Coulter Inc d Phase Extraction SPE Vacuum Manifold ALP 16 9 16 4 Using the SPE ALP in a Method Using the SPE ALP in a method requires the configuration of labware such as the filter holder in the Instrument Setup step refer to the Biomek Software User 5 Manual Chapter 15 2 Instrument Setup Step and configuration of the SPE step refer to Section 16 4 1 Configuring the SPE Step 16 4 1 Configuring the SPE Step The SPE step is a convenient way of executing the assembly and disassembly of the SPE ALP system An SPE step must be configured when an SPE ALP is required to complete a method The configuration for the SPE step informs the Biomek Software of the e O
144. Manual 0 00 00 cece eee eee ix Table of Contents ec dececcdcectsiehneeceeeiddentinatecer eked xxi List of FigUTeS 214 ccut tii eced eee suni eki i Sena a XXxi Cist of TavleS 2242p ee ene erenee eee ee aes naan ee ease XXX X 1 Introduction to ALPs 1 1 About This Manual 2 idacsses uetdees ends bheaeeedsbhes r EEN EE RESI 1 1 1 1 1 Related User s Manuals 24 14 0440 da vida i ededeteeyeridndtyead 1 1 L2 ALPSOVEIVIEW scsc4 a0 ded eee 6 bR terie tAE EAEE NEEESE RARER RSS EUS 1 2 1 3 Installing and Configuring ALPs 0 0 0c 1 3 1 3 1 Installing an ALP in Hardware Setup 00 0000 eee 1 4 ALPs User s Manual xxii Table of Contents 2 8 Channel Active Wash ALP 2 1 OVERVIEW so fennek rgen nera a A e AA e 2 1 2 2 Mounting the 8 Channel Active Wash ALP 0 0 0 e eee eee eee 2 3 2 2 1 Installing the 8 Channel Active Wash ALP on the Deck 2 3 2 2 2 Routing Tubing for the 8 Channel Active Wash ALP 2 4 2 2 3 Adding a WashPump in Hardware Setup 0 000005 2 6 2 2 4 Adding and Configuring the 8 Channel Active Wash ALP in the Deck HOUOC gta ay hum barene Ao wee ea eA aa ees Pa ROR Sai 2 8 23 Framing Instructions s recsrscsrreciresr sertce Ciera CEET ETRA RErEE E 2 10 2 3 1 Using the Graphic Alignment Tool 00 0 0 00 eee ee 2 15 2 3 2 Using the Delta Value and Directional Buttons 2 16 2 3 3 Framing TIE FANS 6 cd de dw cha OK ees Bas
145. Manual Control Figure 14 26 D Note Manual Control is available only when a method is not being executed If a Z need for manual control is realized during a method run stop the method using the Stop button or the Snap Continuation button refer to the Biomek Software Users Manual Chapter 25 11 2 Snapping a Continuation before accessing Manual Control Information x Gi Connecting Figure 14 25 Confirms Manual Control is connecting Manual Control Z ft STI a Advanced Controls HomeAllAxes Get Version Stop Click on a position to move Poat 7 to it Figure 14 26 Manual Control ALPs User s Manual 14 38 Orbital Shaker ALP Access Advanced Manual Control to select and control the appropriate Orbital Shaker ALP Advanced Manual Control can be used to command the ALP to Shake shake labware at the indicated RPM in the specified direction Timed Shake shake labware at the indicated RPM in the specified direction for the indicated number of seconds Run shake labware using parameters from a previously defined shaking profile Pulse shake labware using a sequence of actions that pulse the labware in alternating directions at a specific velocity for an indicated number of seconds Stop stop any shaking procedure by slowing the shaking action within the indicated number of seconds Clamp actuate the clamp to hold the labware in place Home
146. N The Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide must be mounted on the UN outside columns of the Biomek deck to avoid collisions Note Span 8 Disposal ALPs with Slide cannot be mounted adjacent to one another on the first three rows of the deck The Span 8 Pod can drop disposable tips directly into the Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide Note Tips may stick to the slide which could cause tips to jam in the chute Check the slide periodically during the method run to ensure it is clear of tips Note Since the slide of a Span 8 Disposal ALP extends beyond the edge of the Biomek FX deck the deck must be modified to accommodate the slide Refer to Section 17 4 Installing Protective Shield Blanking Plate on the Biomek FX for more information on modifying the deck to accommodate a Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide A w A oO Span 8 Disposal ALP base So Span 8 Disposal chute Span 8 Disposal mounting screws chute Figure 17 2 Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide Beckman Coulter Inc Span 8 Disposal ALP 17 5 17 2 Installing the Span 8 Disposal ALP without Slide Installing the Span 8 Disposal ALP without Slide includes choosing a deck position and mounting the ALP to the deck 17 2 1 Choosing a Deck Position for the Span 8 Disposal ALP without Slide CAUTION The self contained Span 8 Disposal ALP without Slide must be mounted on the outside columns of the Biomek deck to avoid c
147. NG Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous materials WARNING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by your safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials WARNING Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer CAUTION Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before attaching or removing AccuFrame from the instrument deck WARNING Make sure the light curtain is not violated by the AccuFrame cable If the light curtain is violated the framing process halts immediately PPPRP PPPPPPP P P ALPs User s Manual xviii Safety Information A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Beckman Coulter Inc WARNING Make sure the AccuFrame cable does not interfere with pod movement Span 8 Disposal ALP CAUTION Older versions of the Span 8 Disposal ALP must be modified with the new bagging extension when upgrading to Biomek Software 3 2 Failure to modify the ALP could result in Span 8 Pod crashes WARNING When using the Span 8 Disposal ALP without Slide do not overfill the disposal bag Tips may spill over onto the deck possibly contaminating the deck with hazardous materials CAUTION The Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide must be mounted on the outside columns of the Biomek deck to avoid collisions CAUTION The self contained Span 8 Disposal ALP without Slide must
148. OLW ARCs 4 6 cc Shahn rahe Feige We gd ates ganas hada he eR ees 6 17 6 4 1 Adding an HDR Pin Drying ALP to the Deck 6 17 6 4 2 Adding a Circulating Reservoir to the Deck 6 21 6 5 Framing Instructions 4 4 4 204 sis4y dac06V aa ds hevsd asda le mee ean Vda ds 6 26 6 6 Using the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs ina Method 6 27 6 6 1 Using the HDR Tool Cleaning Step 000005 6 27 6 6 2 Using the Device Action Step 44 44044504 seed eed eeneeea ees 6 37 6 7 Controlling the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir Outside a Method i4 o4664 444 aad 44 wa AG A RARE RAA DRAKE RAG 6 40 ALPs User s Manual xxiv Table of Contents 6 8 Removing the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir from the Deck 6 41 6 8 1 Removing the HDR Pin Drying ALP 0 0050 6 41 6 8 2 Removing the Circulating Reservoir 0 00 00s eens 6 41 6 9 Storing the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir 6 42 6 9 1 Storing the HDR Pin Drying ALP 0 0 0 0 0 000 6 42 6 9 2 Storing the Circulating Reservoir 2 0 0 0 0 eee eee ee 6 42 6 10 Preventive Maintenance for the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir deci dade pended taeda ee teene Re ks 6 43 6 10 1 Preventive Maintenance for the HDR Pin Drying ALP 6 43 6 10 2 Preventive Maintenance for the Circulating Reservoir 6 43 6 11 Troubl
149. Orbital Shaker ALP is on the deck ADR2 should be left at the default setting and ADR1 should be set to a unique address CAN connections Only one CAN connection is available for use on the Orbital Shaker ALP Address switches ADR1 ADR2 Figure 14 2 Orbital Shaker ALP connections Beckman Coulter Inc Orbital Shaker ALP 14 5 14 3 Framing Instructions Special framing instructions are necessary for the Orbital Shaker ALP to ensure gripper access to labware and tip access to all wells of a microplate positioned on the ALP without damaging the tips probes gripper pod labware or ALP Note The Orbital Shaker ALP supports pipetting to and from all labware supported by the Biomek instrument except 1536 well microplates and PCR microplates The framing process for the Orbital Shaker ALP includes accessing different functions of the Biomek Software mounting some hardware to the pod and accurately positioning the AccuFrame Tool on the ALP The framing process includes e Installing the Framing Fixture Homing the Axes and Installing the AccuFrame Tool e Homing the Microplate Platform and Actuating the Clamps Framing the Deck Position with the Deck Editor e Removing the AccuFrame from the ALP and the Framing Fixture from the Biomek Instrument Pod 14 3 1 Installing the Framing Fixture Homing the Axes and Installing the AccuFram
150. P 13 9 Tip and offset explanation nn se eek ea een wn va AERO Re KE ORS 13 12 Per Labware Offsets 0 n n nnna ccc cece een eee e eens 13 12 Orbital Shaker ALP i p ocscgegs4 sade edad aah ehad aad piaia atoia eae as 14 2 Orbital Shaker ALP connections 0 00 c cece eee cece ee eens 14 4 Confirms Manual Control is connecting 0 00 ee cece 14 5 Manual Control sreo essr serite eeetaee teaee tad pe a a eda ea es 14 6 Warning that appears when homing all axes 0 00 00 00 eee ee eee 14 6 Framing fiX rE sesan seene a eee ew eRe ee E EE e 14 7 Advanced Controls 444 4445 04 anunn annaa 14 8 Advanced Manual Control for an Orbital Shaker ALP 14 8 Using Advanced Manual Control to unclamp an Orbital Shaker ALP 14 9 Using Advanced Manual Control to actuate the clamp on an Orbital Shaker ALP 2 c iipedanedeth aoelae ba aG es hee eeeeees 14 9 Using Advanced Manual Control to home the microplate platform on an Orbital Shaker ALP 36 00s2asanexerod oe ora tad edd aeerneaews 14 10 Position Properties for the selected Orbital Shaker ALP 14 11 Teaching MVS TUCHONS 49105 6n ease bueae head Een Eria EEN ees ens 14 12 Labware 08 aoe on rt oe os es ek ee ee es 14 17 Basic Information for the selected labware type 0 000005 14 18 Orbital Shaking configuration for the selected labware type 14 19 Device Action step and configuration
151. P 2 19 2 Select the directional button representing the motion required to physically move the pod down until the tip just touches the framing target on top of the ALP Note Each time a directional button is selected the pod and tips move the distance specified in Delta in the indicated direction Note The tip can be can physically positioned over the framing target on top of the ALP e the directional buttons in Manual Teach e the directional keys on the keyboard e the directional keys on the numeric keypad The directional buttons displayed in Manual Teach parallel the keys on the numeric keypad More specifically Fwd correlates to the 1 on the numeric keypad while Down is found on the 2 Left is found on the 4 Right on 6 Up on 8 and Back on 9 Once the tip is just touching the framing target select Finish The pod moves up to its maximum height in the Z axis Manual Teaching closes and Position Properties appears Figure 2 9 Choose OK to save the framing information and close Position Properties If more than one 8 Channel Active Wash ALPs are installed on the deck repeat the procedure to frame any additional 8 Channel Active Wash ALPs using Manual Teach Choose Save to save framing information for all positions and close the Deck Editor Figure 2 8 Note Choosing Cancel loses all changes to the deck including framing information since the Deck Editor was opened
152. PPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS OF 21 CFR 1040 AT THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE WARNING Avoid direct exposure to the laser beam Never look directly into the laser beam and never leave the laser on open or unattended ALPs User s Manual x Safety Information AX aS A A A A A A A A A A A Beckman Coulter Inc WARNING Always have the laser module access cover located on the Bar Code Reader in place when operating or troubleshooting the laser module WARNING Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous materials WARNING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by your safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials WARNING Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer WARNING If labware other than that specified in the Labware Type Editor is used an increase in bad reads or no reads may occur WARNING If a label is applied by any means other than the SAGIAN Print amp Apply device an increase in bad reads or no reads may occur CAUTION Do not use the Bar Code Reader step under the SILAS category in the Step Palette Builder The Bar Code Reader Step from the Integrated Devices step palette must be used to ensure the Bar Code Reader operates properly Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP CAUTION A maximum of one long CAN cable can be used in each chain of AL
153. Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only Beckman Coulter Inc 4 Select Properties OR Double click on the deck position OR Right click on the deck position and select Properties from the menu Position Properties appears Figure 6 11 Note The deck position is highlighted with a pink line inside the ALP Position Properties Name Ps ALP Type OneByO ne x crm Y fcm Z crm Precision Pod Coordinates 43 484 7 233 ji 5 7 Not Framed Pod2 Coordinates 43 484 7 233 5 5 7 Not Framed P Podi Advanced Mc Teach Pod2 Manual Teach Auto Teach OK Cancel Figure 6 11 Position Properties 5 Rename the deck position if desired Note Names for deck positions must be alphanumeric with no spaces the only nonalphanumeric character allowed is _ underscore The first character must be a letter Specify the X Y and Z Coordinates of the appropriate pod by teaching the ALP Note The circulating reservoir acts as a piece of labware If the deck position holding the circulating reservoir has been properly framed it is not necessary to reframe the position with the circulating reservoir in place Prior to placing the circulating reservoir any deck position that holds a circulating reservoir should be framed normally according to the framing procedure for that ALP 6 23 7 Select More gt gt to display the device association and labware offset options 10 11 Figure
154. Ps If more than one long CAN cable is used in a chain CAN communication errors may occur WARNING The Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP may be contaminated from method solutions Follow the appropriate decontamination and cleaning procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer WARNING SPILL HAZARD WARNING Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous materials WARNING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials WARNING Do not spill liquids on or around the Biomek instrument Clean up any spills immediately according to the procedures defined by the laboratory safety officer PrP PPP BB amp Safety Information xi Half Position Disposal ALP NX S8 only WARNING When using the Half Position Disposal ALP do not overfill the disposal bag Tips may spill over onto the deck possibly contaminating the deck with hazardous materials CAUTION The Half Position Disposal ALP must be mounted on the outside columns of the Biomek deck to avoid collisions CAUTION Make sure the correct Disposal ALP is chosen when configuring the deck setup in the Deck Editor Disposal ALPs vary in height and failure to choose each Disposal ALP correctly in the software may result in collisions between pod s and Disposal ALPs during operation WARNING Appropriately marked autoclavable biohazard bags are recommended for hazardous
155. ROREES 4 4 2 Installing the Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP 0 000 4 3 4 2 1 Installing the Drainable Refillable Reservoir on the Deck 4 3 4 2 2 Setting up the Automatic Reservoir Controller 4 3 4 3 Framing Instructions 5 2 cus saci fades tke AHCER REA EMRE RREER ERS 4 10 4 4 Using the Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP ina Method 4 1 4 4 1 Configuring an Instrument Setup Step for a Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP 00 0 0 e ee eee 4 11 44 2 Configuring a Device Action Step for a Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP 00 000 eee eee 4 13 Beckman Coulter Inc Table of Contents xxiii 4 5 Controlling the Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP Outside a Method 4 14 4 5 1 Filling the Reservoir 44 oss eod scree dotat dads eddaw adie a 4a 4 14 45 2 Draining the Reservoir ununa kee en ea dx bene caer eeenes 4 15 4 5 3 Checking the Sensor State x44 p06554ea Fk aea dha VER eRe R ERE HOA 4 16 4 6 Removing the Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP From the Deck 4 17 4 7 OTAS Gc ae aa ped eG SWARM RRER EERE RULER ERR EERE RR RES 4 18 4 8 Preventive Maintenance va icsadvso vac divaedd idee se ban dawew kets ease 4 18 4 9 WtOubleshOOun 2 045 ds2ddeos dad ded ds ORR LV Se KOLAR DER KEELER RS 4 19 Half Position Disposal ALP NX S8 only 5 1 OVERVIEW srar pe der Haara er E E LEERE a Aera 5 1 5 2 Half Position Disposal ALP 00
156. Read bar code for decision making 3 Configure a Move Labware step to move the source plate from BR1 back to P5 2 Move the destination plate to the Bar Code Reader ALP read the bar code then move the plate back to the original deck position 1 Configure a Move Labware step to move the plate Dest A from P4 to the Bar Code Reader ALP BR1 2 Configure a Bar Code Reader step to Read bar code for decision making 3 Configure a Move Labware step to move the destination plate from the BR1 back to P4 Configure an If step to evaluate the bar codes In this method the source and destination plates must have the same base bar code for example 1000 All destination plates must end with A for example 1000_A When the bar codes match a Transfer substep within the If step transfers liquid from the source plate to the destination plate When the bar codes do not match A Pause substep stops the method and displays a message prompt to users 1 Configure an If step with the VBScript expression Properties P5 Barcode Properties P4 Barcode amp _A refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Section 17 7 If Step 2 Under the Then substep insert a Transfer step and configure as desired refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Section 15 3 Configuring Transfer and Combine Steps 3 Under the Else substep insert a Pause step configured to pause the instrument for an
157. Replace the outlet tubing in the peristaltic pump head 4 Remove the inlet tubing from the peristaltic pump head 5 Run the peristaltic pump forward to empty excess fluid in the bottom of the reservoir 6 Detach the inlet and outlet tubing from the circulating reservoir 7 Drain and dispose of excess liquid in the inlet and outlet tubing according to procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer 8 Remove the circulating reservoir labware from the deck 9 Dispose of waste fluid in the waste container as described by the laboratory safety officer ALPs User s Manual 6 42 HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 6 9 Storing the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir Beckman Coulter Inc 6 9 1 Storing the HDR Pin Drying ALP Return the HDR Pin Drying ALP to the original packing materials and store in a dry dust free environmentally controlled area Note The HDR Pin Drying ALP can be used as a standard 1 x 1 Passive ALP when not in use during a method 6 9 2 Storing the Circulating Reservoir Return the circulating reservoir and its accessories to the original packing materials and store in a dry dust free environmentally controlled area Note It is desirable to allow the circulating reservoir to air dry before returning it to the original packing materials HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 6 43 6 10 Preventive Maintenance for the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Ci
158. Return the Span 8 Disposal ALPs with or without Slide to their original packing materials and store in a dry dust free environmentally controlled area Note It is desirable to allow the Span 8 Disposal ALPs to air dry before returning them to their original packing materials 17 9 Preventive Maintenance WARNING The Span 8 Disposal ALP may be contaminated Follow the uN appropriate decontamination procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer To clean wipe all surfaces on the Span 8 Disposal ALP with a soft cloth Beckman Coulter Inc Span 8 Tip Wash ALP 18 1 Overview The Span 8 Tip Wash ALP is a passive ALP The eight cleaning wells of the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP Figure 18 1 are used to wash fixed tips on the probes of a Span 8 Pod during a step in a method while the reservoir side of the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP is used to dispose of system fluid used when priming the system and purging the tubing and syringes of air The Span 8 Tip Wash ALP can be placed in half of any deck position and it can be oriented with its eight cleaning wells on the left or right side of the ALP The Span 8 Tip Wash ALP utilizes a flow of system fluid from the off deck supply container as the wash fluid The system fluid is pumped through the Biomek instrument and into the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP in one of two ways The pumps of the Biomek FX instrument syphon fluid from the off deck supply container refer to the Biomek FX Laboratory Autom
159. Sensor appears Figure B 9 Advanced Manual Control Source WasteSensor0 Command AssertSource bd Sensor State Figure B 9 Advanced Manual Control for a selected Source Waste Sensor 4 In Command choose one of the following e AssertSource checks the source container sensor for the presence of liquid AssertWaste checks the waste container sensor for the presence of liquid 5 In Sensor State set the desired sensor action e On generates an error when liquid is not detected e Off generates an error when liquid is detected 6 Choose Go The command is executed 7 Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control 8 Choose Exit to close Manual Control ALPs User s Manual B 10 Source Waste Sensor B 5 Preventive Maintenance The Source Waste Sensor requires minimal maintenance Observe the following guidelines Periodically inspect the velcro strap for wear Wipe any spills on the sensor immediately Calibrate the sensor every time a new container or liquid is used to ensure it is operating properly refer to Section B 2 1 Calibrating the Sensor B 6 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting techniques for a Source Waste Sensor are found in Table B 1 Beckman Coulter Inc Table B 1 Troubleshooting a Source Waste Sensor IF Sensor is not sensing THEN Check connections to make sure they are correct and secure Sensor is not sensing but connections are correct a
160. Ses Eide rido Res 2 18 2 4 Using an 8 Channel Active Wash ALP ina Method 2 20 2 4 1 Configuring Multiple 8 Channel Active Wash ALPs on an Instrument 2 20 2 5 Removing the 8 Channel Active Wash ALP 0 000 e ee ee eens 2 21 2 6 DIO Meee his Jenna anaes Oe ae eee aeRO Re ea ee Mees eee eas 2 22 2 7 Preventive Maintenance a1 4 44b tanec wad bowed iekeGeesaad eee eewas 2 22 28 Troubleshooting 24620 his den oncddanclanksdnn Red Tan ENERE EEEE ES 2 22 3 Bar Code Reader ALP 3 1 OVETVIEW eira ed E EEEE ENE FREE ERA eee Aa NENE 3 1 3 2 Installing the Bar Code Reader ALP 2 2 2 eee eee 3 3 3 2 1 Deck Positions for the Bar Code Reader ALP 3 3 3 2 2 Mounting the Bar Code Reader ALP 20 00 0000 000 ue 3 3 3 2 3 Aligning the Bar Code Reader ALP Laser Beam 3 4 3 3 Applying Labels to Labware ica G cade d ae leiaswae ee ehokvhe ytaeweesese 3 5 3 4 Framing Instructions 2603 soadeceine dees nde Se evens yeaa d ee ne ee eee ee ae 3 5 3 5 Using the Bar Code Reader ALP ina Method 0 00 00 0005 3 6 3 5 1 Configuring a Method Where Bar Codes are Read for Decision Making3 9 3 6 Removing the Bar Code Reader ALP 2 0 0 0 cece eee 3 12 3 7 SKO E 1e E E E E E E EE E E ae 3 12 3 8 Troublesh otint senesnes tinerea hed sci caer Renter da ayets naa RREA RES 3 12 4 Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP 4 1 OVERVIEW 34 reai tate e Rak a E Gred PXOEA Reda RAKE TEER
161. Stirring ALP CAUTION The Stirring ALP continues to stir during a light curtain violation even though the method stops WARNING Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous materials WARNING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials WARNING Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer ALPs User s Manual A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Beckman Coulter Inc WARNING Disconnect main power before connecting or disconnecting CAN cables CAUTION A maximum of one long CAN cable can be used in each chain of ALPs If more than one long CAN cable is used in a chain CAN communication errors may occur CAUTION Adjust the stirring speed using the software Set the stirring speed only as high as absolutely necessary to avoid splashing WARNING Setting the stirring speed too high or setting the speed too high with an inadequate amount of liquid in the reservoir or ramping the stirring speed up too fast in a high viscosity liquid may force the stir bar off center The stir bar would then have to be reset to the center position CAUTION The reservoir and stir bar may be contaminated following use Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer CAUTION Cle
162. The pipetting technique auto selected to aspirate and dispense the liquid is selected based on the physical factors of the liquid as well as the physical attributes of the labware For more information on liquid types refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 8 Understanding and Creating Liquid Types 9 Select Sense the liquid level the first time a well with Unknown or Nominal volume is accessed from the Liquid to have a Span 8 Pod use Liquid Level Sensing to determine the liquid level only the first time it accesses a well with an Unknown or Nominal volume from the liquid Any instances in which the same well on the piece of labware is accessed the liquid level is calculated internally based on the result of the earlier liquid level sense and the amount aspirated or dispensed to the well in previous steps OR Select Sense the liquid level every time a well is accessed from the Liquid to have a Span 8 Pod use Liquid Level Sensing to determine the liquid level every time it accesses a well with an Unknown or Nominal volume from the liquid Note The liquid level sensing option is only important when using a dual pod system with a Span 8 Pod 10 Choose OK to save Labware Properties and return to the Instrument Setup step configuration To turn the circulating reservoir s on or off use a Device Action step to activate the desired wash pump refer to Section 6 6 2 1 Configuring the Device Action Step for a
163. The sensor should be placed at a low level on the source container in order to indicate when the container is running low Beckman Coulter Inc Source Waste Sensor B 3 6 If desired secure the sensor to the waste container at the desired level Make sure the face of the sensor is flush to the container and the velcro is pressed against the velcro strap Figure B 2 Note The sensor should be placed at a high level on the waste container in order to indicate when the container is becoming full Velcro attached to the sensor Figure B 2 Source Waste Sensor ALPs User s Manual B 4 Source Waste Sensor WARNING Disconnect main power before connecting or disconnecting A N CAN cables 7 Plug the male end of the CAN communication cable into the female connector labeled CAN PORT on the controller or the female end of the CAN communication cable into the male connector Figure B 3 Figure B 3 Source Waste Sensor Controller 8 Plug the other end of the CAN communication cable into connector labeled CAN Port on the Biomek instrument 9 Verify the ADR1 address switch is set to 1 for the first connection 10 Set the ADR2 to a unique address between zero 0 and F for the second connection if a another Source Waste Sensor is used 11 Calibrate the sensor refer to Section B 2 1 Calibrating the Sensor Beckman Coulter Inc Source Waste Sensor B 5 B 2 1 Calibr
164. Tip wash reservoir Tip wash stand Figure 13 3 Tip wash reservoir and tip wash stand to create the 96 Channel Tip Wash ALP 3 Position the ALP so the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP slip into locating holes on the deck and the hoses are on the back side of the ALP Note The in out hose connections on the 384 Channel Tip Wash ALP MUST face the back of the Biomek instrument 4 Fasten the ALP to the deck using the thumbscrews located on the base of the tip wash stand Figure 13 3 5 Position the peristaltic pump at an off deck location close to the ALP 6 Place the source and waste reservoirs under the lab bench or in an accessible space lower than the instrument height 7 Attach the in hose part number 6485 35 to the small hole on the ALP Figure 13 lor Figure 13 2 8 Run the in hose through the appropriate pump head of the peristaltic pump Beckman Coulter Inc 10 11 12 13 14 Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs_ 13 7 Attach the opposite end of the in hose to the source reservoir Run the hoses through either the access holes on the back of the instrument between the towers or between the light curtain and the deck on the side of the Biomek instrument Note Make sure the tube routing does not interfere with the operation of the Biomek instrument Attach the out hose to the large hole on the Multichannel Tip Wash ALP Figure 13 1 or Figure 13 2 Run the out hose par
165. Wash ALP Waste port Figure 2 1 8 Channel Active Wash ALP Beckman Coulter Inc 8 Channel Active Wash ALP 2 3 2 2 Mounting the 8 Channel Active Wash ALP When mounted on the Biomek deck the 8 Channel Active Wash ALP occupies 1 2 of a standard deck position The 8 Channel Active Wash ALP can also occupy the remaining 1 2 ALP position that occurs when a Test Tube Rack ALP refer to Chapter 22 Test Tube Rack ALPs or Half Position Disposal ALP refer to Chapter 5 Half Position Disposal ALP NX S8 only is installed on the Biomek deck Installing the 8 Channel Active Wash ALP and configuring it in Biomek Software includes Installing the 8 Channel Active Wash ALP on the Deck Section 2 2 1 e Routing Tubing for the 8 Channel Active Wash ALP Section 2 2 2 e Adding a WashPump in Hardware Setup Section 2 2 3 Adding and Configuring the 8 Channel Active Wash ALP in the Deck Editor Section 2 2 4 2 2 1 Installing the 8 Channel Active Wash ALP on the Deck To mount an 8 Channel Active Wash ALP to the deck 1 Position the 8 Channel Active Wash ALP so the locating pin on the bottom of the ALP slips into a locating hole on the deck Make sure the Source and Waste ports are pointing towards the back of the instrument for easier tube routing 2 Fasten the ALP to the deck using the Phillips mounting screw located on the base of the ALP Figure 2 1 ALPs User s Manual 2 4 8 Channel
166. a Circulating Reservoir to the Deck A circulating reservoir is added to the deck in the appropriate locations using the Deck Editor and an Instrument Setup step The appropriate WashPump must be associated with an open centered deck position such as on a x 1 Passive ALP to provide the flow of wash fluid Then in the first Instrument Setup step in a method the BiomekFXHDRCirculatingWashReservoir must be added to the deck in the appropriate deck position and configured with the wash fluid type for obstacle avoidance and pin washing considerations The circulating reservoir is activated by turning on the appropriate wash pump using a Device Action step in the method refer to Section 6 6 2 1 Configuring the Device Action Step for a Circulating Reservoir or Advanced Manual Control outside of a method refer to Section 6 7 Controlling the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir Outside a Method 6 4 2 1 Associating a Wash Pump with a Deck Position To associate a WashPump with a deck position for a circulating reservoir 1 Choose Instrument gt Deck Editor The Deck Editor appears 2 If necessary drag and drop the OneByOne or FourByThree ALP from the ALP Types list to the desired location The ALP appears and deck positions are named automatically 3 Select the desired deck position to place the circulating reservoir Note The selected deck position must have an open center ALPs User s Manual 6 22 HDR
167. aboratory safety officer to determine the safe maximum shaking speed for any type and amount of liquid i WARNING The type and amount of fluid being shaken will impact the defined by your safety officer when using flammable solvents or toxic f WARNING Always observe appropriate cautionary procedures as pathological or radioactive materials Table 14 1 Recommended Maximum Labware Shaking Speeds 10 mn test tubes Water 12 mm test tubes Water 13 mm test tubes Water AB384Well Reaction Water BCFlat96 Water BCDeep96Round Water BCDeep96Square Water CostarCone96Round Water CostarCone96Round Water CostarF lat384Square Water Greiner96Ubottom Water Greiner96Ubottom Water GreinerFlat384Square Water GreinerShallow384Round Water Microfuge Tubes Water NuncFlat3 84Square Water CostarDeep96Square Cell Pellet 90 pellet plus buffer CostarDeep96Square Cell Pellet 210 cells plus buffer CostarDeep96Square Cell Pellet 330 cells plus buffer Configuring a New Labware Type for Use on the Orbital Shaker ALP Table 14 1 Recommended Maximum Labware Shaking Speeds Continued CostarDeep96Square Cell Pellet 355 cells 15 1000 1400 plus buffer plus MagneSil Blue Greiner96Ubottom MagneSil 30 9 720 1800 Blue Greiner96Ubottom MagneSil Red 55 17 720 1800 Greiner96Ubottom MagneSilRed 145 46 1000 1800 plus buffers Greiner96Ubottom MagneSilRed
168. ach C Pod2 Manual Teach Auto Teach Device Fant Device Index fo z Device Control xim Yiem Ziem Labware 0 ifset 0 635 0 635 jo Per labware Offsets Position Span fi 4 087 9 837 Min Safe Height fi cm OK Cancel Figure 6 9 Expanded Position Properties for deck positions In Device choose the appropriate Fan to associate with the position If desired choose Per labware Offsets to customize the offsets for specific types of labware refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 5 4 3 3 Changing Per Labware Offsets Adjust the Min Safe Height if necessary The Min Safe Height is the height at which the pod s move when moving to or passing over the specified ALP and is predefined at a height that avoids collisions between the fan and the pod s Note The Labware Offsets and Position Span are predefined in the software Do not modify these properties Choose OK to save and close Position Properties Deck Editor appears Choose Save to close the Deck Editor Note The deck must be framed taught using the framing tools after creating or modifying a deck refer to the Biomek FX Laboratory Automation Workstation User s Manual Chapter 5 Framing the Biomek FX ALPs User s Manual 6 20 HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 6 4 1 2 Adding an HDR Pin Drying ALP in Instrument Setup After associating the fan with the desired deck position it is necessa
169. afety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials Safety Information xiii WARNING Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer CAUTION Do not detach the hoses over the Biomek deck Immediately wipe up any spills with a soft cloth High Density Passive ALPs WARNING High Density ALPs may be contaminated from method solutions Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer High Density 4 x 3 Passive ALP NX S8 only WARNING The NX S8 High Density 4 x 3 ALP may be contaminated from method solutions Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer Magnetic Bead ALP WARNING Disconnect main power before connecting or disconnecting CAN cables CAUTION A maximum of one long CAN cable 1 meter 39 37 in Part Number 717781 can be used in each chain of ALPs If more than one long CAN cable is used in a chain CAN communication errors may occur CAUTION A maximum of one device can be chained to a Magnetic Bead ALP If more than one device is chained to a Magnetic Bead ALP the Biomek instrument may not be able to supply sufficient electrical current to operate all devices on the chain WARNING Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous materials WARNING Observe cautionary procedures a
170. aking procedure already in process 1 In Command select Stop Figure 14 22 Biomek Software Method6 Development J File Edit Project Instrument Execution Options Help D Sa BRS M e al 0 ol xea B Start Device OrbitalShakerALPO x Instrument Setup Command Instrument Setup E Device Action 3 Finish SPE lt A wii Load tips from TL1 Time to stop 1 seconds 0 5 600 Device Setup p Device Action ii Tip Loader Comment P20 Pouco estin Bource estin p2i Method6 BiomekFx BiomekFX ETC 0 00 22 Figure 14 22 Device Action step configured to stop all shaking motion on an Orbital Shaker ALP 2 In Time to stop enter the duration in seconds the device has to move from full speed to a full stop Note The minimum value allowed in Time to stop is 0 5 second while the maximum value is 600 seconds ALPs User s Manual 14 32 Orbital Shaker ALP 14 4 3 6 Clamping and Unclamping Labware on the Orbital Shaker ALP The Orbital Shaker ALP clamps automatically before a microplate is accessed for pipetting and before any shaking procedure is initiated It remains clamped until a gripper move the Device Action step or the end of a method releases the microplate however a Device Action step can be used to actuate the clamps at any time during a method when using the ALP as a standard deck position such as a i CAUTION Clamp a
171. an the reservoir before storing or filling with another substance Test Tube Rack ALPs CAUTION Different sizes of test tubes must not be mixed in one test tube rack To avoid a collision between the pod and Test Tube Rack ALP all of the test tubes in the Test Tube Rack must be a uniform height CAUTION Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before attaching or removing AccuFrame from the instrument deck WARNING Make sure the light curtain is not violated by the AccuFrame cable If the light curtain is violated the framing process halts immediately WARNING Make sure the AccuFrame cable does not interfere with pod movement WARNING Test Tube Rack ALPs may be contaminated from method solutions Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer Tip Loader ALP CAUTION Clean dry air must be provided for proper operation of the Tip Loader ALP WARNING Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous materials WARNING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials WARNING Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer gt gt PPPRP PP Safety Information xxi WARNING Disconnect main power before connecting or disconnecting CAN cables WARNING Stay clear of the
172. and cutout blanking plates ALPs User s Manual 12 14 Multichannel Disposal ALP 12 4 5 Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide in R3 When a Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide is installed in R3 on the Biomek FX deck Figure 12 9 orient and install the blanking plate with the cutout as follows 1 Remove the four fasteners holding the solid blanking plate 2 Remove the solid blanking plate 3 Orient the blanking plate cutout as shown in Figure 12 11 4 Attach the blanking plate with the cutout to the bottom shield This creates an opening next to R3 for a slide Note Do not attach both blanking plates Store the unused blanking plate in an environmentally controlled area 12 4 6 Multichannel Disposal ALPs with Slide in Both R2 and R3 When Multichannel Disposal ALPs with Slide are installed in both R2 and R3 1 Remove the four fasteners holding the solid blanking plate 2 Remove the solid blanking plate This creates an opening large enough for two slides Beckman Coulter Inc Multichannel Disposal ALP 12 15 12 5 Framing Instructions No special framing is necessary for the Multichannel Disposal ALP with or without Slide Framing the ALP occurred when the deck was framed with the Shift Deck command For more information refer the the specific user s manual for the instrument 12 6 Removing a Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide Removing a Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide includes removing the A
173. annel Disposal ALP to make sure the trash lands in the receptacle Adjust the placement of the trash receptacle as required Beckman Coulter Inc Multichannel Disposal ALP 12 11 12 4 Installing Protective Shield Blanking Plate WARNING To reduce risk of personal injury operate only with all A N protective shields in place When components of the Biomek FX instrument are installed so that they extend beyond the edge of the work table a protective bottom shield must be installed by the Beckman Coulter Service Engineer to ensure operator protection on the side overhanging the table This protective bottom shield contains a solid blanking plate and a cutout blanking plate Figure 12 10 When the Biomek FX instrument does not extend beyond the edge of the work table the solid blanking plate is installed To accommodate the slide on the Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide the solid blanking plate is replaced with the cutout blanking plate To accommodate the slides of two Disposal ALPs Multichannel or Span 8 the solid blanking plate and cutout blanking plate are removed leaving an opening for two Disposal ALP slides There are four deck positions available for a Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide Figure 12 9 I2 e L3 e R2 e R3 Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide right positions Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide left positions Figure 12 9 Multichannel Disposal ALP
174. apter 5 4 3 Setting ALP Properties and Deck Positions Deck position properties include Labware Offsets that place the labware in the appropriate place for pipetting operations Because the Magnetic Bead ALP is associated with a device the Device association must be set for the Magnetic Bead ALP deck position To set deck position properties 1 Select the position to modify on the Deck View of the Deck Editor 2 Select Properties from the Deck Editor toolbar OR Properties Double click on the deck position OR Right click on the desired position and select Properties from the menu Position Properties appears Figure 10 8 Name Mag ead ALP Type MagBeadALP x crm Y fcm Z cm Precision Pod1 Coordinates 24 434 6 737 ja 5 7 Not Framed Pod2 Coordinates 24 434 6 737 in 5 7 Not Framed Pod Podi Advanced Mc Teach Manual Teach Auto Teach Pod2 Device tinonett 7 Device Inder v x cm Y cm Z cm Labware Offset 635 0 635 fo Perlabware Offsets Position Span fi 4 087 9 837 Min Safe Height 28 em OK Cancel Figure 10 8 Position Properties for Deck Positions Note The deck position is highlighted on the Deck View with a pink line inside the ALP ALPs User s Manual 10 12 Magnetic Bead ALP 3 In Name rename the deck position if desired Note Names for deck positions must be alphanumeric with no spaces the only non alphanumeric character allow
175. are not recognized the sensor on the Positive Position ALP is not operating properly x Labware not found at sensor Figure 15 6 Labware not found at sensor Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control Choose Exit to close Manual Control OR Make sure no labware is placed on the Positive Position ALP Choose Instrument gt Manual Control Manual Control appears Choose Advanced Controls Select the desired Positive Position ALP Advanced Manual Control for the selected Positive Position ALP appears Figure 15 5 From Command choose VerifyNoLabware Positive Position ALP 15 13 6 Choose Go The Positive Position ALP recognizes no labware is placed on the Positive Position ALP unless an Error appears Figure 15 7 Note Ifthe following Error Figure 15 7 appears the sensor does not recognize that labware is not present on the Positive Position ALP the sensor is not operating properly Contact a Beckman Coulter Service Engineer Labware found at sensor Figure 15 7 Labware found at sensor 7 Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control 8 Choose Exit to close Manual Control 15 5 3 Verifying the Positive Position ALP Recognizes a Type of Labware Follow the instructions in Section 15 5 2 Verifying the Sensor on the Positive Position ALP Operates Properly to verify if the Positive Position ALP recognizes a specific type of labware ALPs User s Manual
176. ase Instructions for mounting each type of ALP on a deck position and for completing the appropriate electrical air waste communications and liquid connections are provided in the individual ALP chapters in this manual Note The Deck Editor indicates through dashed blue lines on which deck positions a specific ALP may be placed refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 5 Preparing and Managing the Deck Setting up the ALP in the Biomek Software for operation After physically installing an ALP on the deck some ALPs are detected on the Biomek instrument and must be properly installed and configured in Hardware Setup refer to Section 1 3 1 Installing an ALP in Hardware Setup Note Only Tip Loader Stirring Shaking Positive Position Orbital Shaker and Magnetic Bead ALPs are detected on the Biomek instrument and must be installed in Hardware Setup For some ALPs devices such as pumps or fans are also installed in Hardware Setup Any necessary specific configuration for these ALPs or devices is provided in the individual ALP chapters in this manual Associating the ALP with a position After configuring Hardware Setup for the new ALP the software must be told where the ALP is located on the deck using the Deck Editor refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 5 Preparing and Managing the Deck Framing the ALP Using the Deck Editor the exact coordinates of the position of the ALP on
177. ating the Sensor Every time a new container or liquid is used the sensor must be calibrated using the following procedure to ensure it operates properly This process uses a small supplied screwdriver to turn the adjustment screw on the sensor to determine the sensitivity of the sensor Turning the screw clockwise increases sensitivity while moving it counterclockwise decreases sensitivity To calibrate the sensor 1 Ensure the face or active surface Figure B 4 of the sensor is attached to the container 2 Fill the container with liquid until approximately 75 of the active surface of the sensor is covered 3 Using the small supplied screwdriver turn the adjustment screw Figure B 4 on the sensor counterclockwise until the LED extinguishes 4 Turn the adjustment screw clockwise until the LED turns on again 5 Slowly move the sensor down the container so that the entire sensor face is below the water level The LED should remain on 6 Move the sensor back up the container until approximately 75 of the active surface is covered 7 Using the supplied screwdriver turn the adjustment screw clockwise one full rotation Adjustment screw Face or active surface on the other side of sensor Figure B 4 Sensor ALPs User s Manual B 6 Source Waste Sensor B 3 Using the Source Waste Sensor in a Method Beckman Coulter Inc To use the Source Waste Sensor in a method it must fi
178. ation Workstation User 5 Manual Chapter 3 5 3 Supply Container to the probes of the Span 8 Pod The pumps actuate to dispense the system fluid through the tips and into the wash station OR e The Speed Pump refer to the Biomek FX Laboratory Automation Workstation User s Manual Chapter 3 6 Speed Pump with the pump valves bypassed accelerates the speed of the system fluid as it passes through the tubing and is dispensed from the tips into the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP The volume of fluid passing through the tips cleans the inside surfaces of the tips while the increased speed of the wash fluid raises the fluid level in the eight cleaning wells of the ALP to a height sufficient to clean the outside of the tips positioned in the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP Used wash fluid drains from the ALP via a tube connected to the waste port and terminating in an off deck waste container refer to the Biomek FX Laboratory Automation Workstation User s Manual Chapter 3 5 4 Waste Container via a gravity fed drainage tube ALPs User s Manual 18 2 Span 8 Tip Wash ALP The sections in this chapter include Installing the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP Section 18 2 Framing Instructions Section 18 3 e Removing the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP Section 18 4 e Storage Section 18 5 e Preventive Maintenance Section 18 6 e Troubleshooting Section 18 7 Reservoir Eight cleaning wells Eight framing
179. ation as described below Other commands do not require further configuration 3 In Pause After Magnet Engages enter the amount of time in seconds to pause to allow the magnetic beads to be drawn to the magnet before performing additional operations at the position Note Pause After Magnet Engages pauses only the position Operations may still be performed at other deck positions while the Magnetic Bead ALP is paused ALPs User s Manual 10 24 Magnetic Bead ALP 10 5 Controlling the Magnetic Bead ALP Outside a Method To control the Magnetic Bead ALP outside a method use Advanced Manual Control for e Homing the Magnet Section 10 5 1 Engaging and Disengaging the Magnet Section 10 5 2 e Determining Magnet Engage Height for Labware Types Section 10 5 3 e Clamping or Unclamping Labware on a Magnetic Bead ALP Section 10 5 4 Verifying the Sensor on the Magnetic Bead ALP Recognizes a Labware Type Section 10 5 5 ae Note Manual Control is available only when a method is not being executed If a need for manual control is realized during a method run stop the method using the Stop button or Snap Continuation button refer to the Biomek Software User 5 Manual Chapter 25 11 2 Snapping a Continuation before accessing Manual Control 10 5 1 Homing the Magnet Homing the magnet gives the Biomek instrument a point of reference from which to make subsequent magnet moves Home positi
180. atory safety officer ALPs User s Manual 14 48 Orbital Shaker ALP 14 9 Troubleshooting Do not remove covers for any reason Do not attempt to repair the Orbital Shaker ALP without first contacting a Beckman Coulter Service Engineer Table 14 2 Troubleshooting the Orbital Shaker ALP IF The Orbital Shaker ALP is not functioning THEN Make sure a good CAN connection has been established The clamps are not grasping the labware Make sure the labware is supported by the Biomek instrument Make sure the labware is defined properly in the Labware Type Editor Refer to the Biomek Software Users Manual Chapter 7 Creating and Modifving Tip and Labware Types for more information on defining labware Contact a Beckman Coulter Service Engineer Beckman Coulter Inc Positive Position ALP 15 1 Overview The Positive Position ALP Figure 15 1 is an active ALP that verifies the presence or absence of a microplate on the ALP and accurately and precisely positions it for interaction with the Biomek instrument The Positive Position ALP accepts most microplates however its main function is to accurately position microplates requiring high precision within wells Microplates can be loaded to the Positive Position ALP by a lab technician the ORCA Robot or by the Biomek gripper Note The Positive Position ALP may not be able to detect unskirted microplates Verify that the Positive Position
181. ause of its size the Bar Code Reader ALP is mounted on one of the outside deck positions so that the Bar Code Reader itself extends beyond the edge of the Biomek deck Use the Biomek Software Deck Editor to determine available deck positions when mounting the Bar Code Reader ALP on the Biomek instrument 3 2 2 Mounting the Bar Code Reader ALP WARNING Avoid direct exposure to the laser beam Never look directly into the laser beam and never leave the laser on open or unattended WARNING Always have the laser module access cover located on the Bar Code Reader in place when operating or troubleshooting the laser module WARNING Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous materials WARNING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by your safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials WARNING Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer To mount the Bar Code Reader ALP complete the following Note The Bar Code Reader ALP uses a cable that splits into two destinations power and communications 1 Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before adding the Bar Code Reader ALP to the deck 2 Position the Bar Code Reader ALP so the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP slip into locating holes on the deck 3 Fasten the Bar Code Reader ALP to the deck using the thumbscrews on
182. be disposed of separately two Span 8 Tip Wash ALPs may be installed on the deck Note When the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP is placed on the left side of a Biomek deck position the ALP is referred to as the Spoan 8WashLeft When the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP is placed on the right side of a Biomek FX deck position it is referred to as the Span 8WashRight After a deck position on which to physically mount the ALP has been chosen configure the ALP in the Deck Editor refer to the Biomek Software User 5 Manual Chapter 5 Preparing and Managing the Deck ALPs User s Manual 18 4 Span 8 Tip Wash ALP 18 2 2 Mounting the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP to the A A A A A Beckman Coulter Inc Deck WARNING Do not kink the drainage hose WARNING Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous materials WARNING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials CAUTION Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer CAUTION SPILL HAZARD To install the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP 1 Position the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP so the locating pin on the bottom of the ALP slips into a locating hole on the deck Fasten the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP to the deck using the Phillips mounting screw located on the base of the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP Figure 18 1
183. bl sh oting 25544 Aeen aa Rate eG ee HRA REA AEDS ORG RODE TREC eR A 11 Appendix B Source Waste Sensor 0 00 cee B 1 Bel OVETVIEW ag besa hae on ce AEE SO A eA wy PANE AR ESA we G eieaa aa Ks eee B 1 B 2 Installing a Source Waste Sensor 2 0 0 ccc eee teenies B 2 B 2 1 Calibrating the Sensor cosa o dh esa abe de Gvaddodevavaetotabdens B 5 B 3 Using the Source Waste Sensor ina Method 0 000 cece ee eee B 6 B 3 1 Using the Device Setup Stehis iss ceesccua eek eit hesens een Sens B 6 B 3 2 Associating the Source Waste Sensor with a Wash ALP B 6 B 3 3 Error Messages for the Source Waste Sensor 0000005 B 8 B 4 Controlling the Source Waste Sensor Outside a Method 4 B 9 B S Preventive Maintenance cc4nsieeis ceca ea dienes deekes ead t ae ea nas B 10 Bio Troubleshooting 24 05d0ge Ge bende ended kI EEn EEn EEE eee eee B 10 INGOX 22 one ieee eee eee eee eee ee eeere born sees XXX X ALPs User s Manual List of Figures Figure 1 1 New Devices displaying all detected devices 00 0 0 c eee ee eee 1 4 Figure 2 1 8 Channel Active Wash ALP 20 4045050 0e be ced sav eoee Pee aenewevaues 2 2 Figure 2 2 Tube routing for 8 Channel Active Wash ALP 00 00 eee eee eee 2 4 Figure 2 3 New Devices displaying all detected devices 00 cece eee eee 2 6 Figure 2 4 WashPump configuration in Hardware Setup 00 0 c eee ee
184. by the Company be returned to the factory transportation charges prepaid and will be returned to Purchaser with transportation charges collect unless the product is found to be defective in which case the product must be properly decontaminated of any chemical biological or radioactive hazardous material d The Company shall be released from all obligations under all warranties either expressed or implied if any product covered hereby is repaired or modified by persons other than its own authorized service personnel unless such repair by others is made with the written consent of the Company e Ifthe product is a reagent or the like it is warranted only to conform to the quantity and content and for the period but not in excess of one year stated on the label at the time of delivery It is expressly agreed that the above warranty shall be in lieu of all warranties of fitness and of the warranty of merchantability and that the company shall have no liability for special or consequential damages of any kind or from any cause whatsoever arising out of the manufacture use sale handling repair maintenance or replacement of any of the products sold under the sales agreement Representatives and warranties made by any person including dealers and representatives of the Company which are consistent or in conflict with the terms of this warranty shall not be binding upon the Company unless reduced in writing and approved by an expres
185. c cece ceeseesceeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeesseeeteeeees 6 44 Table 7 1 Minimum specifications for a Circulator Bath cece cece ccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeennees 7 5 Table 7 2 Troubleshooting the Heating and Cooling ALP ou ee eececcceeseeeeeeneeeseceeeeeeeeeeaees 7 6 Table 10 1 Troubleshooting the Magnetic Bead ALP uo cece eeceeseeeseceneeeeeeesseecteeeeeeenaees 10 34 Table 11 1 Troubleshooting the Microplate Shaking ALP o0 ce ce ccceeceeeeeeeseeeeeceteeeeeeeeseenes 11 9 Table 13 1 Troubleshooting the Multichannel Tip Wash ALP ecceceeeceeseeeteceteeeeeeeeeees 13 14 Table 14 1 Recommended Maximum Labware Shaking Speeds cceeceesseesseeeteeeeeeeeees 14 15 Table 14 2 Troubleshooting the Orbital Shaker ALP cece eececseceseeeeeeeeseecsaeceteeeeeeenaees 14 48 Table 15 1 Troubleshooting the Positive Position ALP ceccecceesseceseceseeeeeeeeeeceseeneeeeaeees 15 14 Table 16 1 Troubleshooting the SPE Vacuum Manifold ALP ou cecceecceeseeeteceteeeeeeeeeees 16 12 Table 20 1 Troubleshooting the Stirring ALP cece ceccecseceeeeeesceescecaeceeeeeeeeeseecsaeeneenaes 20 7 Table 23 1 Troubleshooting the Tip Loader ALP sisscccsscsssscesusecdsatseseiavaelunaunincacnimieeaesennns 23 10 Table A 1 Device Controller Specifications cccceccccescessseesseceeceseeeeeeesseceseeseeeessaecssecneeeanes A 4 Table A 2 Troubleshooting a Device Controller ccecccccecsseceseceeeeeeeeeeseeceaeceeeeeeeesseeeaeens A 11 Table B 1 Troubl
186. cally at the start of each method run Initializing the ALP with a Bar Code Reader step is required only when the default configuration has been manually changed to disable automatic loading of the BarcodeReader SILAS module Read bar code for logging the bar code is saved in the pipetting logs refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Sections 26 2 3 Pipetting Log 26 2 4 Span8Pipetting Log FX NX S8 only and 26 3 6 UnifiedPipetting Log Contents Read bar code for decision making the results of the bar code read determine the next operation performed in the method Refer to Section 3 5 1 Configuring a Method Where Bar Codes are Read for Decision Making for an example of how this option may be used in a method 5 When Read bar code for logging or Read bar code for decision making is selected select Flag error and stop when bar code is not read to stop the method immediately and notify users that the bar code was not read successfully 6 When Read bar code for decision making is selected in Use for method validation enter a substitute bar code value to be used during method validation Validation can be performed satisfactorily only when a substitute value is entered Refer to Section 3 5 1 1 Validating Methods When Read Bar Codes for Decision Making is Selected for detailed information Bar Code Reader ALP 3 9 3 5 1 Configuring a Method Where Bar Codes are Read for Decision Making When R
187. ce Action step in Biomek Software refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Section 22 6 1 3 Configuring the Device Action Step for a Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP FX NX only Filling draining and configuring the sensor state are all configured using a Device Action step in a method ALPs User s Manual 4 14 Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP 4 5 Controlling the Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP Outside a Method To control the Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP outside a method use Advanced Manual Control for Filling the Reservoir Section 4 5 1 Draining the Reservoir Section 4 5 2 e Checking the Sensor State Section 4 5 3 Note Manual Control is available only when a method is not being executed If a need for manual control is realized during a method run stop the method using the Stop button or Snap Continuation button refer to the Biomek Software Users Manual Chapter 25 11 2 Snapping a Continuation before accessing Manual Control 4 5 1 Filling the Reservoir Use Advanced Manual Control to fill the reservoir to the maximum level To fill the reservoir 1 Choose Instrument gt Manual Control Manual Control appears 2 Choose Advanced Controls A list of the installed pod and devices appears 3 Select the desired DrainableRefillableReservoir Advanced Manual Control for the selected ALP appears 4 In Command choose Fill Figure 4 10 Advanced Manual
188. channel Laboratory Automation Workstation User s Manual Biomek NX Span 8 Laboratory Automation Workstation User s Manual ALPs User s Manual 1 2 Introduction to ALPs 1 2 ALPs Overview Automated Labware Positioners ALPs are removable and interchangeable platform structures that are installed on the Biomek deck to allow automated assays to be performed ALPs are either e Passive ALPs some hold labware in place on the deck while others act as receptacles for by products from methods such as system fluid and disposed tips tip boxes and labware OR e Active ALPs contain mechanisms that may hook to power and or air sources for mechanical operation such as tip loading tip washing mixing stirring shaking and precisely positioning labware Note Addresses are manually set on some active ALPs to allow the instrument to identify the specific ALP being used Address switches for ALPs use hexidecimal numbering refer to Section A 3 Setting Address Switches The sections in this chapter include Installing and Configuring ALPs Section 1 3 e Accessing ALPs in a Biomek FX Core System Integration Section 1 4 e About This Manual Section 1 1 Beckman Coulter Inc Introduction to ALPs 1 3 1 3 Installing and Configuring ALPs Each ALP requires a specific procedure for installation and configuration This procedure includes Physically mounting the ALP to the deck or ALP b
189. conds the Orbital Shaker ALP takes to reach full shaking speed Note The minimum value allowed in Time to reach full speed is 0 5 second while the maximum value is 600 seconds Note The Time to reach full speed is also used when ramping down at the end of the configured Time to Shake 4 In Time to Shake enter the duration in seconds the ALP shakes the labware Note The minimum value allowed in Time to shake is 1 second while the maximum value is 100 000 seconds Note The Time to shake does not include the Time to reach full speed or the time to ramp down and return to a full stop 5 In Direction select whether the orbital shaking motion shakes in a CounterClockwise or Clockwise direction Note The default Direction is CounterClockwise Beckman Coulter Inc Orbital Shaker ALP 14 27 14 4 3 3 Configuring the ALP to Run a Previously Defined Shaking Profile The Orbital Shaker ALP is capable of running previously defined shaking profiles Profiles are loaded to the Biomek Software directory when the Orbital Shaker ALP is installed To configure the Orbital Shaker ALP to follow previously defined shaking profiles 1 In Command select Run Figure 14 20 Biomek Software Method6 Development File Edit Project Instrument Execution Options Help Osea BAS saMlo gt ay mn o ea B Start Device _ OrbitalShakewALPO x memen ee Instrument Setup Commana Setup eppmm Wii Load tips from TL1 Profil
190. configuration Beckman Coulter Inc HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 6 35 2 Click on the HDR Pin Drying ALP in the Current Deck Display Information for the fan is entered automatically into the Cleaning Operation configuration Note Subsequent labware selections modify the active Cleaning Operation configuration To configure additional Cleaning Operations select Click here to add a cleaning drying operation or select outside a cleaning operation configuration and then select another piece of labware from the Current Deck Display If an incorrect piece of labware is selected right click on the labware title and select Delete on the menu that appears Biomek Software Method1 New File Edit Project Instrument Execution Options Help Dee OAS teloe a eo Xx ea Start R Use pod Pod1 v for transfer 2101 x HDR Instrument Instrument Setup Combine Setup Q HDR Transfer amp HOR Move Transfer aL HDR Tool Cleaning ka H i Finish HDR Tool caning Additional Cleaning Operations mq Continue adding Testr b Cleaning Operations by clicking this button al or by selecting more 5G oO a uv z Cleaning Operation configuration for drying 0 00 mm from bottom Cleaning P8 J 0 00 mm from bottom Tunfnonta Re seconds before pod approaches Dry for 5 seconds Leave fan on for 2
191. cumentation or the procedures specified in this manual regardless of foreseeability or the form of action whether in contract tort including negligence breach of warranty strict liability or otherwise and including but not limited to damages resulting from loss of data loss of anticipated profits or any special indirect incidental or consequential damages In no event shall Beckman Coulter Inc s liability to the user exceed the amount paid by the user to Beckman Coulter Inc hereunder The user assumes full responsibility for the results obtained from the use of this system and related documentation and for application of such results Beckman Coulter SAGIAN Operations Indianapolis Indiana www beckmancoulter com SILAS is a trademark and Biomek SAMI and ORCA are registered trademarks of Beckman Coulter Inc Microsoft and MS DOS are registered trademarks and Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation All other trademarks appearing in this manual are owned by their respective companies Copyright 2004 by Beckman Coulter Inc All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced distributed or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise or stored in a database or retrieval system without the prior written permission of Beckman Coulter Inc Beckman Coulter Inc Warranty and Returned Goods Requirements All standard Beckman Coulter Inc polic
192. d Wash solutions stored in a static reservoir are used throughout the method unless changed manually Note When using static reservoirs as part of the HDR Cleaning System select the Biomek2000HDRStaticWashReservoir PN 609443 made of PVC or BiomekFXHDRStaticWashReservoir PN 719890 made of polypropylene depending on the reservoir used in the Instrument Setup step when placing labware on the deck Refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 15 2 Instrument Setup Step for more information on the Instrument Setup step 6 1 2 1 1 Preventive Maintenance for Static Reservoirs To ensure optimum operation perform the following maintenance procedures on the static reservoirs as necessary e Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer Empty any cleaning solutions from the static reservoir s when not in use and rinse the reservoir s thoroughly as outlined by the laboratory safety officer e Make sure the reservoir is dry before storing 6 1 2 2 Circulating Reservoirs A circulating reservoir option is provided as an alternative to using the static reservoirs A circulating reservoir Figure 6 2 may be placed on any open centered deck position such as on a 1 x 1 Passive ALP or a 4 x 3 High Density ALP and provides a flow of wash fluid from a supply container for pin washing The bottom of the circulating reservoir has two connections for flow in and out of the reservoir
193. d as a base for many active ALPs such as the Stirring ALP Certain active ALPs are secured to the Standard Passive ALP stand mounted on the appropriate deck position and configured in the Deck Editor Standard Passive ALPs include e 1x1 Passive ALP refer to Section 19 1 1 Z x J Passive ALP Note A 1x 1 Passive ALP with LLS Plate Option is also available refer to Section 19 1 1 1 Z x J Passive ALP with LLS Plate Option e 1x 1 Passive ALP with Indented Sides refer to Section 19 1 2 Z x 1 Passive ALP with Indented Sides Note The 1 x 1 Passive ALP with Indented Sides is placed on the deck next to an SPE Collar Stand with an SPE Collar to preserve a deck position The indented sides allow enough clearance for the gripper to extend and move the SPE Collar without hitting the ALP e 1x3 Passive ALP refer to Section 19 1 3 Z x 3 Passive ALP e 1x5 Passive ALP refer to Section 19 1 4 Z x 5 Passive ALP The sections in this chapter include Installing Standard Passive ALPs Section 19 2 e Framing Instructions Section 19 3 e Removing Standard Passive ALPs from the Deck Section 19 4 e Storage Section 19 5 e Preventive Maintenance Section 19 6 ALPs User s Manual 19 2 Standard Passive ALPs 19 1 1 1x1Passive ALP A 1x 1 Passive ALP occupies one position on the deck and holds one piece of labware Figure 19 1 Note Labware positioned on a 1 x 1 Passive ALP is gripper acce
194. d the labware For these reasons it is necessary to specify the magnet engage height for each labware type that is used with the Magnetic Bead ALP To determine the desired engage height for a specific labware type 1 Place the desired labware type on the Magnetic Bead ALP 2 Choose Instrument gt Manual Control Manual Control appears 3 Choose Advanced Controls A list of all the installed pods and devices appears 4 Select the desired Magnetic Bead ALP Advanced Manual Control for the selected Magnetic Bead ALP appears 5 From Command choose Disengage Magnet to home the magnet 6 Choose Go The magnet disengages to its lowest position 7 From Command choose Move Magnet Figure 10 19 Advanced Manual Control MagBeadALPO Command Move Magnet Magnet Position fo em Figure 10 19 Advanced Manual Control for a Magnetic Bead ALP with Move Magnet selected ALPs User s Manual 10 28 Magnetic Bead ALP 11 12 13 14 Beckman Coulter Inc 15 In Magnet Position enter the desired position for the magnet in centimeters The magnet moves to a position the specified distance from the top of the Magnetic Bead ALP Note A magnet position of 0 cm aligns the top of the magnet with the surface of the Magnetic Bead ALP To move the magnet to a position above the surface of the ALP enter the value as a positive number to move the magnet to a position below the surface of the ALP enter the value as a n
195. deck position in the Deck Editor drag and drop TrashLeft or TrashRight to the appropriate position in the deck view For more information about associating an ALP with a deck position refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 5 Preparing and Managing the Deck ALPs User s Manual 12 8 Multichannel Disposal ALP Beckman Coulter Inc 12 3 1 1 Mounting a Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide to the Deck To mount a Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide 1 Position the Disposal Chute by lining up the holes in the disposal chute with the threaded holes in the Disposal ALP base Figure 12 5 Q Q A AN gt A s A A xN Disposal ba 4 a ALP base y Multichannel Disposal chute mounting screws Multichannel L Disposal chute Figure 12 5 Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide 2 Attach the disposal chute to the Disposal ALP base using the four screws supplied Figure 12 5 3 Place the Multichannel Disposal ALP in one of the center positions in an outside column of the deck This allows the slide to extend downward beyond the left or right side of the deck 4 Slip the locating pins on the bottom of the Multichannel Disposal ALP into the locating holes on the deck Multichannel Disposal ALP 12 9 5 Fasten the Multichannel Disposal ALP to the deck using the thumbscrews on the base of the Multichannel Disposal ALP Figure 12 6
196. dicated number of revolutions per minute RPM in the specified direction refer to Section 14 4 3 1 Configuring the ALP to Run a Standard Shaking Procedure e Timed Shake shakes labware at the indicated RPM in the specified direction for the indicated number of seconds refer to Section 14 4 3 2 Configuring the ALP to Run for a Specific Length of Time e Run shakes labware using parameters from a previously created shaking profile refer to Section 14 4 3 3 Configuring the ALP to Run a Previously Defined Shaking Profile e Pulse shakes labware using a pulsing sequence at a specific velocity for the indicated number of seconds then for the indicated number of seconds in the opposite direction This sequence of events is repeated the specified number of times refer to Section 14 4 3 4 Configuring a Pulsing Shake Sequence e Stop stops any shaking procedure by slowing the shaking action within the specified number of seconds refer to Section 14 4 3 5 Stopping a Shaking Procedure Already in Process e Clamp tightens the clamp to hold the labware in place refer to Section 14 4 3 6 Clamping and Unclamping Labware on the Orbital Shaker ALP e Home centers the microplate shaking plate on the ALP base refer to Section 14 4 3 7 Homing the Microplate Platform on the Orbital Shaker ALP e _Unclamp releases the clamp to allow the labware to be removed from the ALP refer to Sectio
197. dous materials WARNING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by your safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials CAUTION Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer CAUTION SPILL HAZARD To remove the Half Position Disposal ALP 1 Remove the rubber band and waste receptacle from the ALP 2 Dispose of the bag and contents as specified by the laboratory safety officer 3 Loosen the thumbscrews on the base of the ALP 4 Lift the ALP straight up from the deck so that the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP base clear the locating holes on the deck Half Position Disposal ALP NX S8 only 5 7 5 3 Half Position Disposal ALP with Slide When the Half Position Disposal ALP is used with the slide it extends off the edge of the deck The slide is directed through the gap between the deck and Plexiglas shield A trash receptacle is placed on the floor at the end of the slide to catch the waste The ALP can be used on half of a standard deck position and is particularly effective when lab space is at a premium The Half Position Disposal ALP with Slide allows the disposal of as many used tips as the trash receptacle is capable of holding The Span 8 Pod can drop disposable tips directly into this ALP with the slide Labware that hangs below the gripper such as an SPE filter cannot be placed ins
198. e AN Controller before attaching or removing any active ALP 1 Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before mounting any ALP 2 Position the HDR Pin Drying ALP so the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP slip into locating holes on the deck 3 Fasten the HDR Pin Drying ALP to the deck using the thumbscrews on the base of the ALP 4 Connect the HDR Pin Drying ALP to one of the low voltage digital outputs on the Device Controller refer to Section A 4 2 Connecting Digital Device Outputs Beckman Coulter Inc H z i IDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 6 7 5 Place the HDR Pin Drying ALP collar in the labware position directly above the fan Figure 6 3 Note Operating the HDR Pin Drying ALP without the collar in place allows the air from the fan to disperse and slows the drying rate of the pins Figure 6 3 HDR Pin Drying ALP and collar ALPs User s Manual 6 8 HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 6 2 1 1 Removing and Installing the Fan Adaptor Plate Fan and Fan Guards The adaptor plate fan and fan guards on the HDR Pin Drying ALP may be removed as one unit and placed on any open centered deck position on a 1 x 1 Passive ALP or 4 x 3 High Density ALP To remove the adaptor plate fan and fan guards from the ALP CAUTION Turn off power to the Biomek instrument and the Device AN Controller before attach
199. e Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP in a method first it must be added to the list of installed devices in Hardware Setup refer to Section 1 3 1 Installing an ALP in Hardware Setup Once added to the list no additional configuration is required in Hardware Setup CAUTION Prior to running a method make sure there is enough fluid A N for the method in the container Using the Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP in a method includes e Configuring an Instrument Setup Step for a Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP Section 4 4 1 e Configuring a Device Action Step for a Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP Section 4 4 2 4 4 1 Configuring an Instrument Setup Step for a Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP In a method using a Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP an Instrument Setup step located at the start of the method is necessary for e Adding a Drainable Refillable Reservoir to the Deck Section 4 4 1 1 e Configuring Labware Properties for a Drainable Refillable Reservoir Section 4 4 1 2 ALPs User s Manual Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP 4 4 1 1 Adding a Drainable Refillable Reservoir to the Deck To add a Drainable Refillable Reservoir to the deck 1 Insert an Instrument Setup step at the start of the method OR Select the first Instrument Setup step found in the method The Instrument Setup step configuration appears Figure 4 8 Note The first Instrument Setup step must be locat
200. e HDR Tool Body as a percentage of the maximum speed of the pod Beckman Coulter Inc 11 12 13 14 15 HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 6 33 In Move up to specify the height the pins ascend to between each dipping cycle Note If Dip Cycles is set to 1 Move up to is disabled Note By default Move up to is measured from bottom of the well To measure from top of the well or from liquid right click the graphic of the pin in the well and make the desired selection from the menu In Move up at enter the speed at which the HDR Tool Body moves up as a percentage of the maximum speed of the pod In Pause for enter the length of time the pod pauses at the down position for each Dip Cycle to wash pins Choose OK to save the Dipping Configuration and return to the source labware configuration Leave the height as is to use the settings for the Move down to height specified in the Dipping Configuration OR Set the aspirate height manually using one of the following methods e Position the cursor over the graphic of a pin inside a well Click and drag the graphic up or down The pin moves with the cursor and the height displayed below the graphic is adjusted as the graphic is manipulated Note The cursor changes to a hand when positioned over the graphic e Selecting the graphic of a pin inside a well and use the and 4 keys The textual representation of the height whic
201. e Septum Piercing Adaptor from Test Tube Rack ALPs NX S8 only If using septum piercing on the Test Tube Rack ALP the septum piercing adaptor must be removed prior to removing test tube racks from the ALP To remove the septum piercing adaptor from the Test Tube Rack ALP 1 Loosen but do not remove the four thumbscrews on the side plates 2 Lift the top adaptor plate straight up so that the grooves slide completely over the thumbscrews and remove it from the ALP 3 Remove the left and right side plates by turning the slotted thumbscrews clockwise until they disengage from the screw holes on the ALP 22 7 Storage Return Test Tube Rack ALPs test tube racks and septum piercing racks to their original packing materials and store in a dry dust free environmentally controlled area gt NX S8 Return the septum piercing adaptor to its original packing materials and store in a dry dust free environmentally controlled area when not in use Note It is desirable to allow Test Tube Rack ALPs to air dry before returning them to their original packing materials ALPs User s Manual 22 16 Test Tube Rack ALPs 22 8 Preventive Maintenance A Beckman Coulter Inc WARNING Test Tube Rack ALPs may be contaminated from method solutions Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer To clean wipe all surfaces on the Test Tube Rack ALPs with a soft cloth Tip Loader ALP
202. e Tool To frame the Orbital Shaker ALP the AccuFrame Tool and framing fixture must be installed WARNING Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before attaching or VAN removing the AccuFrame 1 Plug the AccuFrame into any available CAN port on a Biomek tower 2 Turn on power to the Biomek instrument 3 Choose Instrument gt Manual Control to open Manual Control An Information dialog Figure 14 3 briefly appears as a connection is established with the Biomek instrument immediately followed by Manual Control Figure 14 4 Information x Gi Connecting Figure 14 3 Confirms Manual Control is connecting ALPs User s Manual 14 6 Orbital Shaker ALP s ft Advanced Controls Home All Axes Get Version Stop Click on a position to move Pod1 toit Figure 14 4 Manual Control 4 Choose Home All Axes Figure 14 4 A Warning appears Figure 14 5 x CAUTION Before selecting OK to home all axes the following conditions must be met Make sure there is no liquid present in the tips Make sure there are no disposable tips loaded Make sure the Framing Probe is NOT installed on the Multichannel Pod Make sure the grippers on the Multichannel Pod are retracted Make sure either disposable tip mandrels or fixed tips ARE installed on the Span 8 Pod Make sure that the two arms are not near each other at either end of the rail Figure 14 5 Warning that appears when homing all axes
203. e eae nea baer easy 20 2 Figure 20 3 Advanced Manual Control for a selected Stirring ALP 20 5 Figure 21 1 1x1 Storage ALP deck positions on a Biomek FX deck 21 3 Figure 21 2 1 x 3 Storage ALP deck position on a Biomek FX 0 00 0 00 21 4 Figure 21 3 Warning indicating that an ALP is about to be placed in a position overlapping another ALP 21 4 Figure 21 4 Position Properties for a 1 x 3 Storage ALP 20 eee eee eee 21 5 Figure 21 5 Position Properties after More is chosen 0 0 ce eee eee eee eee 21 6 Figure 21 6 Three 1 x 1 Storage ALPs and three Standard 1 x 1 ALPs added to a Biomek FX deck 459 290 044 Swaa Ginny oo Vee kV aetna ees 21 7 Figure 21 7 Framing Adaptor 0 cc ccc cece eee n ete t enn ee ne eeas 21 8 Figure 21 6 Adaptor Warning i6 14 so dawssdiadinadvaadoestdswladsedeadeeutadas 21 8 Figure 21 9 Teaching Instructions 64424 asx sne as OR E4554 RoR bea RE abe E ROSE BORE ES 21 9 Figure 21 10 Integrated Devices step palette 1 0 2 eee ee eee 21 10 Figure 21 11 Storage ALP Move step inserted into the Method View 21 11 Figure 21 12 Storage ALP Move with Advanced Controls selected 21 12 Figure 22 1 1 x 2 Test Tube Rack ALP left facing 0 0c cece ee eee 22 2 Figure 22 2 1 x 3 Test Tube Rack ALP right facing 0 0 00 c cece eee eee 22 3 Figure 22 3
204. e eee 2 7 Figure 2 5 Position Properties for 8 Channel Active Wash ALP 0005 2 8 Figure 2 6 Expanded Position Properties for the 8 Channel Active Wash ALP 2 9 Figure 2 7 Framing targets on 8 Channel Active Wash ALP top view 2 10 Figure 2 8 Deck Bator sre co aun eee Ae RAK Rey ee ruori ken iarr COENE eru EEN EROS 2 11 Figure 2 9 Position Properties for an 8 Channel Active Wash ALP 2 11 Figure 2 10 Manual Framing Wizard Warning 00 cee e eee eee ee 2 12 Figure 2 11 Manual Framing Wizard if tips are not already loaded 2 13 Figure 2 12 Manual Framing Wizard if tips are loaded 00 0 0 0 ce eee eee ee 2 13 Figure 2 13 Manual Framing Wizard Teach X Y 2 0 cece eee eee ee eee 2 14 Figure 2 14 Manual Teaching the X and Y axes 1 0 0 cece eee eens 2 15 Figure 2 15 Manual Teaching the X and Y axes 1 0 0 cece eee eee 2 16 Figure 2 16 Manual Teaching Teach Z 1 0 0 0 cece tenes 2 18 Figure 2 17 Labware Properties for a Wash Station ALP 0 00 0 e eee ee eee 2 20 Figure 3 1 Bar Code Reader ALP 44 44 400 459 s4aad doo oo a eeend ye ceed sae tae 3 2 Figure 3 2 Bar Code Reader Laser beam position over bar code label 3 4 Figure 3 3 Bar Code Reader Label positioning on a microplate 0 3 5 Figure 3 4 The Integrated Devices step palette shown in the
205. e highlighted with a bright green color Advanced Manual Control DeviceController0 High Voltage Outputs Digital Outputs Digital Inputs 7 w1 our in1 Orv u72 in2 TE ours in3 uvs outs ins Update Figure A 4 Advanced Manual Control for a selected Device Controller with channel HV3 on 5 When adjustment of channels has been completed as desired choose Close Note Choose Update to view which digital outputs or inputs are on or off 6 Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control 7 Choose Exit to close Manual Control ALPs User s Manual A 1410 Device Controller A 6 Preventive Maintenance Occasional replacement of the fuses may be required Use the following instructions to replace power input fuse refer to Section A 6 1 Replacing the Power Input Fuse and the high voltage output fuse refer to Section A 6 2 Replacing the High Voltage Output Fuse A 6 1 Replacing the Power Input Fuse If the Device Controller is connected properly but does not function check the fuses for possible replacement The power input contains two fuses and each high voltage output contains a fuse Figure 38 2 To replace the power input fuse 1 Turn off the power switch on the Device Controller and unplug the unit Remove the cover from the fuse box Using only your fingers pry the old fuses gently from the fuse box Insert a new 5X20mm 6 3 Amp Slo Blow fuse into the
206. e in the Deck Editor usually when the wash ALP is framed The association allows the sensor to monitor the liquid levels of the containers used with the wash ALP whenever the ALP is used in a method such as through a Transfer or Wash Tips step If while associated with a wash ALP the sensor indicates the supply container is too low or the waste container is too high an error message appears refer to Section B 3 3 Error Messages for the Source Waste Sensor Source Waste Sensor B 7 To associate the sensor with a wash ALP 1 In the Deck Editor double click the selected wash ALP Figure B 5 Position Properties for the ALP appears Figure B 6 Deck1 Default Deck D x A roy New Deck Delete Deck Rename Deck OpenDeck ClearDeck Renumber Delete ALP Properties Save Cancel BarcodeReaderLeft amp BarcodeReaderRight Wash ALP Coords cm fi 124 3 922 15 935 Figure B 5 Deck Editor with wash ALP ALP Type WashStations6 x cm cm Z cm Precision Pod1 Coordinates 25 915 2 016 21 968 Not Framed Advanced MC Teach More gt gt Manual Teach Auto Teach Cancel Figure B 6 Position Properties for selected wash ALP 2 Choose More Figure B 6 An expanded Position Properties appears ALPs User s Manual B 8 Source Waste Sensor 3 In Sensor Device choose the specific Source Waste Sensor to associate with the wash ALP Figure B 7 Positio
207. e laboratory safety officer To clean wipe all surfaces on the Standard Passive ALPs with a soft cloth Beckman Coulter Inc 20 1 Stirring ALP 20 1 Overview A The Stirring ALP is an active ALP that stirs liquids in a reservoir at an adjustable speed Figure 20 1 To create the stirring and mixing motion a caplet shaped Teflon coated stir bar Figure 20 2 is placed in the reservoir The stir bar follows the movements of a motor powered magnet located in the base of the ALP The stirring motion occurs as the stir bar ramps up from a resting still state to the configured speed then ramps back down to a resting state when stirring is completed CAUTION The Stirring ALP continues to stir during a light curtain violation even though the method stops The Device Action step is used to configure the Stirring ALP refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 22 6 Device Action Step It is possible to pipette from a reservoir on the Stirring ALP The pipetting operation can occur while the stir bar continues stirring or when the stirring motion has stopped The pipetting option is also configured with the Device Action step Note When setting the height for pipetting operations the presence of the stir bar must be taken into consideration Pipetting operations that do not account for the height of the stir bar could damage the tips The sections in this chapter include e Installing the Stirring ALP Sect
208. e list of Devices in the left pane of Hardware Setup The configuration view for the Magnetic Bead ALP appears in the right pane Figure 10 6 Biomek Hardware Setup Reconnect fi Home All Axes ch Add Device Ga Remove Device J Accept gt lt Cancel Biomek FX SN None ieee fa AccuFrame Magnet Type No Magnet 96 Podi 8 Pod2 Ei Devices g7 DeviceControllerO Tne 7 ShakerALPO 7 ShakerALP1 F SpeedPumpO 4 amp 7 SpeedPump1 oF StirrerALPO g7 StirrerALP1 g7 Tiploader0 g7 Tiploader1 Digital Devices f Stacker Carousels BiomekFx Figure 10 6 Hardware Setup Magnetic Bead ALP configuration 2 Specify the Magnet Type Options are e 96 Well Flat Magnet e 96 Well Post Magnet e No Magnet 3 Choose Accept to save changes and close Hardware Setup ALPs User s Manual 10 10 Magnetic Bead ALP 10 4 2 Configuring a Magnetic Bead ALP in the Deck Editor Before the Magnetic Bead ALP can be used in a method the software needs to know the location of the Magnetic Bead ALP on the deck The software representation of the instrument deck is configured in the Deck Editor refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 5 Preparing and Managing the Deck 10 4 2 1 Adding a Magnetic Bead ALP to the Deck A new Magnetic Bead ALP can be added to the deck in the appropriate locations using the Deck Editor Deck positions are named automatically when a Magnetic Bead ALP i
209. e original solutions containers prior to their use e Dispose of all waste solutions according to your facility s waste disposal procedures e Operate the Automated Labware Positioners ALPs in accordance with the instructions outlined in this manual and take all the necessary precautions when using pathological toxic or radioactive materials e Objects dropped onto plates accidental tool release or other accidental collisions may result in splashing of liquids therefore take appropriate safety precautions such as using safety glasses and wearing protective clothing when working with potentially hazardous liquids e Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous materials e Observe the appropriate cautionary procedures as defined by your safety officer when using flammable solvents in or near a powered up instrument e Observe the appropriate cautionary procedures as defined by your safety officer when using toxic pathological or radioactive materials Note Observe all warnings and cautions listed for any external devices attached or used during operation of the instrument Refer to applicable external device user s manuals for operating procedures of that device Moving Parts To avoid injury due to moving parts observe the following e Never attempt to exchange labware reagents or tools while the instrument is operating e Never attempt to physically restrict any of the moving components of a
210. e reservoir for tip washing A peristaltic pump also known as a passive or pulsating pump circulates the fluid through the ALP from the source reservoir to a waste reservoir To ensure that the correct Multichannel Tip Wash ALP is used on an instrument with two or more Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs each ALP must be configured to use a unique liquid type refer to Section 13 3 Configuring Multiple Wash Stations on an Instrument Both Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs are installed and removed in the same manner While they are also framed using the same procedure specific Framing Tool Adaptors are used with each type If a more precise location of the tips when they are submerged into the cleaning wells during a wash is desired offsets for framing both ALPs may be entered refer to Section 13 5 Entering Offsets for the Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs Note The adaptor for the 96 Channel Tip Wash ALP is red and the adaptor for the 384 Channel Tip Wash ALP is blue Make sure the correct adaptor is used ALPs User s Manual 13 2 Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs The sections in this chapter include Beckman Coulter Inc Installing Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs Section 13 2 Configuring Multiple Wash Stations on an Instrument Section 13 3 Framing Instructions Section 13 4 Entering Offsets for the Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs Section 13 5 Removing the Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs Section 13 6 Storage Section 13 7
211. e to run MagbeadMis 4 Device Action IB Finish Comment za P16 P24 P19 Method6 BiomekFX BiomekFX ETC 0 00 22 Figure 14 20 Device Action step configured to run a previously designed shaking profile on an Orbital Shaker ALP ALPs User s Manual 14 28 Orbital Shaker ALP 2 In Profile to Run select the desired profile There are three profiles available for selection e Cell pellet breakup resuspends cells using 190uL Promega Cell Resuspension Solution in a Costar 96 square deep well microplate The Cell pellet breakup profile completes five 1 second pulses at 950 RPM then 28 5 second pulses at 900 RPM and finally 90 seconds of shaking in a counterclockwise direction at 900 RPM e Magbead Mix mixes MagneSil particles in low viscosity fluids The Magbead Mix profile completes three 2 second pulses at 800 RPM followed by 60 seconds of shaking in a constant direction at 750 RPM Note More gentle mix typically used for particles in low viscosity fluids e MagneSil Yellow mixes MagneSil Yellow particles in a water or wash solution The MagneSil profile completes 12 4 second pulses at 1000 RPM Note More vigorous mix typically used with small volumes and higher viscosity fluids Beckman Coulter Inc Orbital Shaker ALP 14 29 14 4 3 4 Configuring a Pulsing Shake Sequence The Orbital Shaker ALP is capable of performing a pulsing shake seq
212. ead ALP in 10 8 installing and configuring devices associated with HDR Pin Drying ALP 6 13 HDR Pin Drying ALP adding circulating reservoir in Instrument Setup step 6 24 adding in Biomek Software 6 17 adding in Instrument Setup step 6 20 associating a wash pump with deck position 6 21 associating fan with deck position 6 17 circulating reservoir connections 6 12 components 6 3 connections 6 8 controlling outside a method 6 40 defined 6 1 fan assembly defined 6 8 installing 6 8 removing 6 8 framing 6 26 installing 6 6 installing circulating reservoir on deck 6 9 installing fan assembly 6 8 installing fan guards 6 8 installing in Hardware Setup 6 13 installing reservoirs with 6 6 operating the circulating reservoir 6 12 preventive maintenance 6 43 preventive maintenance for circulating reservoir 6 43 removing 6 41 removing fan assembly 6 8 static reservoirs preventive maintenance 6 4 storing 6 42 troubleshooting 6 44 troubleshooting the circulating reservoir 6 44 using circulating reservoirs with 6 4 using in a method 6 27 using reservoirs with 6 3 using static reservoirs with 6 4 using the Device Action step to configure actions 6 37 HDR Tool Cleaning Step cleaning operations 6 28 configuring drying operations 6 34 configuring wash operations 6 29 using 6 27 Heating and Cooling ALP circulator bath specifications 7 5 defined 7 1 framing 7 5 installing 7 3 mounting to the deck 7 3 preventive maintenance 7 6 remo
213. ead bar code for decision making is selected in a Bar Code Reader step the results of the bar code read determine which operations that follow in the method are performed The example method shown in Figure 3 6 is configured to transfer liquid from source plates to destination plates only when both plates have the correct bar codes Bar codes are read for both plates and then compared using an expression configured in an If step When the bar codes are correct the transfer is performed When they are incorrect the method pauses and displays a message that tells users the bar codes do not match Table 3 1 provides a detailed description of the example method configuration broken down by the numbered sections shown in Figure 3 6 Note Because reading bar codes for decision making creates a dependent operation based on the results of the bar codes read the validation process during method building will stop while waiting for the results of the read before continuing Since bar codes are not read during validation the software does not know which operation to validate next To ensure validation completes satisfactorily the Bar Code Reader step provides the option to enter a value that is substituted in place of actual bar codes during validation refer to Section 3 5 1 1 Validating Methods When Read Bar Codes for Decision Making is Selected Biomek Software MotherDaughterTransfer Development File Edit Project Instrument Execut
214. ease the distance traveled by increasing the Delta value maximum setting is 1 0 cm If the tips are almost to the desired location reduce the Delta value to fine tune the position minimum setting is 0 005 cm 2 Select the directional button representing the motion required to physically move the tips into position over the framing target on top of the ALP Figure 2 15 Note Each time a directional button is selected the pod and tips move the distance specified in Delta in the indicated direction Note The tips can be physically positioned over the framing target using e the directional buttons in Manual Teach e the directional keys on the keyboard e the directional keys on the numeric keypad The directional buttons displayed in Manual Teach parallel the keys on the numeric keypad More specifically Fwd correlates to the 1 on the numeric keypad while Down is found on the 2 Left is found on the 4 Right on 6 Up on 8 and Back on 9 3 Visually verify the position of the tips on the pod in relation to the framing target on top of the ALP If the tips are still not accurately positioned above the framing target on top of the ALP repeat steps and 2 until they are accurately positioned above the framing target Note The tips may also be aligned with the framing target using the graphic alignment tool refer to Section 2 3 1 Using the Graphic Alignment Tool 4 Once the tips are ali
215. eck change ADR2 to a unique address between zero 0 and F Note ADR2 is set to a default address of zero 0 If only one Stirring ALP is on the deck ADR2 should be left at the default setting 8 Place a reservoir on the ALP 9 Carefully load the liquid into the reservoir 10 Carefully place the stir bar in the center of the reservoir Note When placed into the center of the reservoir correctly the stir bar self aligns 11 Set the stirring speed and ramp time in the software refer to Section 20 4 Using the Stirring ALP in a Method The stir bar ramps up from a resting still state to the set speed and ramps back down when stirring is completed 20 3 Framing Instructions Frame the Stirring ALP according to the instructions in the specific user s manual for the instrument 20 4 Using the Stirring ALP in a Method CAUTION Adjust the stirring speed using the software Set the stirring AN speed only as high as absolutely necessary to avoid splashing high with an inadequate amount of liquid in the reservoir or ramping the stirring speed up too fast in a high viscosity liquid may force the stir bar off center The stir bar would then have to be reset to the center position f WARNING Setting the stirring speed too high or setting the speed too To use the Stirring ALP in a method it must be installed in Hardware Setup For more information refer to the specific user s manual for the instrument Note Confi
216. ecting the Deck Positions for a Test Tube Rack ALP 22 4 22 2 2 Mounting Test Tube Rack ALPs to the Deck 22 4 22 3 Framing Instructions 25 lt 5 oncanns hoe ces SAR eR ER RRR eR eS 22 5 22 4 Adding Test Tube Racks to Test Tube Rack ALPs 0005 22 7 22 5 Adding and Removing Septum Piercing Tube Racks to Tube Rack ALPs NX S8 only 2 0 ccc eects 22 11 22 5 1 Adding Septum Piercing Tube Racks 000000 22 11 22 5 2 Removing Septum Piercing Tube Racks 0005 22 15 22 6 Removing Test Tube Rack ALPs from the Deck 22 15 22 6 1 Removing the Septum Piercing Adaptor from Test Tube Rack ALPs NX S8 only 20005 22 15 22 ROTA oe ob th nah ead dae bow neu eed a head AR on dws ake oaleg de 22 15 22 8 Preventive Maintenances lt 4 is4 08444 666A de GOS ORAAEARD ARMED RRR ES 22 16 23 Tip Loader ALP 23 1 COVEIVICW 24 tre aha s bead eee ee ET ENa E OA Grade pa EES 23 1 23 1 1 Tip Loader Air Requirements 0 cee ee ee eee eee 23 2 23 2 Installing the Tip Loader AUP 2 ke es vee Oa ease ON e464 4S HERR EHR ATER 23 3 23 2 1 Choosing a Deck PositiOty 66445 2s6040 encsiavidareweaenus 23 3 23 2 2 Mounting the Tip Loader ALP to the Deck 23 3 23 3 Framing Instructions res secese steret utieka ee kaea EEEa E 23 5 23 4 Using the Tip Loader ALP in a Method 00 0 ee eee ee eee 23 6 23 41
217. ed before any pod movement in a method for obstacle avoidance Biomek Software Method1 New File Edit Project Instrument Execution Options Help Dee BRS Boo a gt SPE amp z TP Sz 3 ry g 2 iw 3 be o 5 cy A Comment New Tips Wi Unload Tips 9 Loop Mowe Pod Run Method Eh Worklist o no IB Start Instrument Setup Finish BA Labware Category Used to filter labware types to display only labware in the selected category JV Pause to confirm setup Pause for bar code input IV verify Pod Setup Configure SS _ eee Fee BCFulReserve BCUpsideDo Dy sinableRefil FilterHolder IMReservoirse NuncReservol NuncReservoi Reservoir DrainableRefillableReservoir labware type Method1 BiomekNx MC BiomekNx MC ETC 0 00 02 Beckman Coulter Inc Figure 4 8 Configuring an Instrument Setup step for a Drainable Refillable Reservoir 2 In Labware Category choose Reservoir to display labware in the Reservoir category only 3 Drag a DrainableRefillableReservoir labware type onto an available standard position Note The reservoir should only be mounted on the outside positions of a 4x3 High Density Passive ALP the two inner positions do not provide adequate space to correctly route the tubing and sensor leads Drainable Refillable Reserv
218. ed is _ underscore The first character must be a letter 4 Specify the X Y and Z Coordinates of the appropriate pod by teaching the ALP Note ALPs are taught indirectly when positions are taught gt FX Ifa position is accessible by both pods in a dual pod system each pod must be framed to the position 5 Select More gt gt to display the device association and labware offset options 6 In Device choose the appropriate MagBeadALP to associate with the deck position 7 If desired choose Per labware Offsets to customize the offsets for specific types of labware refer to Section 10 4 2 3 Defining Per Labware Offsets 8 Adjust the Min Safe Height if necessary The Min Safe Height is the height at which the pod s move when moving to or passing over the Magnetic Bead ALP and is predefined at a height that avoids collisions between the clamp arms and the pod s Note The Labware Offsets and Position Span are predefined in the software Do not modify these properties 9 Choose OK to save the deck position properties and return to the Deck Editor 10 Choose Save to close the Deck Editor Note The deck must be framed taught using the framing tools after creating or modifying a deck Beckman Coulter Inc Magnetic Bead ALP 10 13 10 4 2 3 Defining Per Labware Offsets A Per Labware Offset tells the software that the labware type is offset from the default labware position when placed on the
219. efer to Section 6 4 Adding the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir to the Deck in Biomek Software prior to using the Device Action step to operate components of the HDR Cleaning System D Insert a Device Action step into the Method View Figure 6 23 c Note The Device Action step is located on the Devices Step Palette Refer to the Device Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 22 2 Displaying the Devices Step Palette Action to display the Devices Step Palette Biomek Software Method3 New File Edit Project Instrument Execution Options Help Dee ORS teloe a x Ea A Start Device 0 YS Instrument Instrument Setup Command i Comment Method3 BiomekF BiomekFX ETC 0 00 10 Figure 6 23 Device Action step ALPs User s Manual 6 38 HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 6 6 2 1 Configuring the Device Action Step for a Circulating Reservoir To configure the Device Action step for a Circulating Reservoir Figure 6 24 1 Insert a Device Action step into the Method View 2 In Device select the WashPump performing the required operation OR Click on the desired circulating reservoir in the Current Deck Display to select it The configuration for the Wash Pump appears Figure 6 24 Note The deck position has a blue border in the Current Deck Display Biomek Software Method3 New File Edit Project Instrument E
220. efer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 19 Using the HDR Step Palette FX 3000 only for information on using the HDR Transfer HDR Combine and HDR Move Labware steps in a method Note The HDR Pin Drying ALP can also be controlled using Manual Control in the Biomek Software refer to Section 6 7 Controlling the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir Outside a Method Note Ifa Light Curtain violation occurs while the fan is powering on or off the action is completed The state of the fan does not change when the light curtain is violated or during a pause in a method 6 6 1 Using the HDR Tool Cleaning Step The HDR Tool Cleaning step washes pins on the HDR Tool Body The HDR Tool Cleaning step uses a dunk and dry methodology to wash pins by dipping the pins in one or more reservoirs with wash solutions and drying the pins at the HDR Pin Drying ALP The HDR Tool Cleaning step configuration is similar to that of the HDR Transfer or HDR Combine step Instead of Source and Destination configurations however a series of wash operations either dipping the pins into a wash reservoir or drying the pins at the HDR Pin Drying ALP are configured Cleaning operations are performed in the order they are configured The HDR Tool Cleaning Step Configuration includes specifying e Pod that performs the cleaning operations e Cleaning operation configuration s ALPs User s Manual 6 28 HDR Pin D
221. egative number Choose Go The magnet moves to the specified position 10 Repeat steps 6 and 7 as needed until the magnet is in the desired engaged position Record the Magnet Position once the magnet is in the desired engage position Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control Choose Exit to close Manual Control Choose Project gt Labware Type Editor Labware Types appears Figure 10 12 Select the desired labware type and choose Edit from the toolbar OR Double click the desired labware type OR Right click the desired labware type and choose Edit from the menu Basic Information appears Magnetic Bead ALP 10 29 16 Choose Magbead Figure 10 20 BCFlat96 W Save Cancel Basic Information Miscelenecus Height en Movement Information O 96 WellPostMagnet 0 O 96 WellFlatMagnet 0 Orbital Shaker Ordering Information Stacking Clamp during pipetting or engaging magnet I Move arms to maximum height when clamping JV Sense labware before pipetting or gripping Preview Describes how the Magbead ALP should There are no errors in this labware type terree interact with the labware and what definition magnets are supported FHSS SESEEESS Figure 10 20 Magbead configuration for the selected labware type 17 Magnet Type lists all available magnet types Select the magnet types that may be used with the selected labware type Note Ifa magnet type is not selected the magnet cannot be e
222. eld with solid and cutout blanking plates 17 16 Figure 17 12 Right side bottom shield with solid and cutout blanking plates 17 17 ALPs User s Manual xxxvi List of Figures Figure 18 1 Span 8 Tip Wash ALP 1 2 cece teens 18 2 Figure 18 2 Position Properties for the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP 000 18 5 Figure 18 3 Manual Teaching Warning 0 0 ccc cece een eens 18 6 Figure 18 4 Manual Teaching Setup 0 0 c cece cece cece eee ence ee ae teenies 18 7 Figure 18 5 Manual Teaching Teach X Y 0 0 ccc ccc eens 18 8 Figure 18 6 Manual Teaching Teach Z 1 0 0 0 0 ccc cece eens 18 10 Fig t 19 1 1x1 Passive ALP puare vo ii GAY Ao reani So Headed a DRE ee ew E 19 2 Figure 19 2 LLS Plate Top View as sawsdas doc eut de ds ae Goede aR eisa ddd ReR ae ds 19 3 Figure 19 3 Installing an LLS Plate ona 1 x 1 Passive ALP 0 00 00 ue 19 4 Figure 19 4 1 x 1 Passive ALP with the LLS plate option installed 19 5 Figure 19 5 1 x 1 Passive ALP with Indented Sides 0 0 eee eee eee eee 19 6 Figure 19 6 1 x 3 Passive ALP oy sosearhewetsiaredendae tone Seucisaewaede ee td awk 19 7 Figure 19 7 1 x 5 Passive ALP xs 4 66 hpce ee REA LA AHS AERA RAME RRA RUNG AKA REELS 19 8 Figure 20 1 Stirring ALP side view lt i xaks16 dasa iae bavaw dee Seah once weedek areas 20 2 Fig re 2052 0Ub AL sea eae Creant Kanaa EEA E EA ERA aa ea
223. ength of the lead or by the fiber core Dots printed on leads The lead with the larger dots connects to amplifier transmitter port the lead with smaller dots connects to the amplifier receiver port e Fiber core Look at the cut ends of the fiber leads Figure 4 6 The lead with a solid core connects to the amplifier transmitter port the lead with several fibers multi core connects to the amplifier receiver port Receiver lead multi core E a Transmitter lead solid core Figure 4 6 Identifying the fiber optic leads Transmitter port 10 Insert the leads into the ports until they stop and tighten the screw to the left of the ports until the leads are secured 11 Turn on power to the Biomek instrument Beckman Coulter Inc Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP 4 9 4 2 2 3 Calibrating the Sensor Amplifier Sensitivity The sensitivity of the sensor amplifier must be calibrated before the Drainable Refillable Reservoir can be used in a method Calibrating the sensitivity of the sensor amplifier is recommended each time a different type of liquid is used in the reservoir and anytime the draining and refilling process is not working correctly Note The Biomek instrument must be turned on to supply power to the ALP during calibration To calibrate the sensitivity 1 On the controller locate the amplifier sensitivity adjustment dial and use the supplied screwdriver to slowly turn the dial clockw
224. ent Time to reach full speed Booo seconds Time to shake fi seconds Figure 11 4 Advanced Manual Control for a Microplate Shaking ALP with Timed Shake choices 5 Enter a percentage in Shaking speed Note The allowed minimum percentage is 1 and the allowed maximum percentage is 100 Enter a time in seconds in Time to reach full speed Enter a time in seconds in Time to shake Choose Go Oo N A Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control 10 Choose Exit to close Manual Control ALPs User s Manual 11 8 Microplate Shaking ALP 11 5 3 Turning Off the Microplate Shaking ALP Outside a Method To turn off the Microplate Shaking ALP 1 Choose Instrument gt Manual Control Manual Control appears 2 Choose Advanced Controls 3 Select the desired Shaker ALP Advanced Manual Control for the selected Microplate Shaking ALP appears Figure 11 3 From Command choose Off Choose Go Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control NY DH Nn A Choose Exit to close Manual Control 11 5 4 Clamping or Unclamping a Plate Outside a Method To clamp or unclamp a plate on the Microplate Shaking ALP 1 Choose Instrument gt Manual Control Manual Control appears 2 Choose Advanced Controls 3 Select the desired Shaker ALP Advanced Manual Control for the selected Microplate Shaking ALP appears Figure 11 3 4 From Command choose Clamp to activate the clamp on the Microplate Shaking ALP
225. ented to the left and back of the Biomek deck and the clamp is on the right front corner of the ALP Note The front of the ALP is indicated with the word FRONT etched on the microplate platform of the ALP Note Use the deck laser etchings as a guide when positioning an Orbital Shaker ALP on the deck 3 Fasten the ALP to the deck using the thumbscrews on the base of the ALP WARNING Disconnect main power before connecting or disconnecting uN CAN cables 4 Plug the female end of the CAN communication cable into the male CAN Port on the ALP Figure 14 2 Note Short CAN cables should be used whenever possible especially when positioning the ALP in the back row of the Biomek deck Long CAN cables can be used when positioning the ALP in the first three rows on the Biomek deck WARNING Do not chain Orbital Shaker ALPs together or to any other ALP CAUTION A maximum of four 4 Orbital Shaker ALPs may be used on a deck at one time gt gt 5 Plug the male end of the CAN communication cable into any female connector labeled CAN Port on the Biomek instrument Note Make sure the cable routing does not interfere with the operation of the Biomek instrument or any other active ALP ALPs User s Manual 14 4 Orbital Shaker ALP 6 Verify that one of the address switches ADR1 or ADR2 is set to a unique address between zero 0 and F Figure 14 2 Note ADR2 is set to a default address of zero 0 If only one
226. eservoirs FX only Properties Beckman Coulter Inc 4 Select Properties OR Double click on the deck position OR Right click on the deck position and select Properties from the menu Position Properties appears Figure 6 8 Note The deck position is highlighted with a pink line inside the ALP Position Properties Name Ps ALP Type OneByO ne x crm Y fcm Z cm Precision Pod1 Coordinates 43 484 6 737 5 5 Not Framed Pod2 Coordinates 43 484 6 737 ja 5 7 Not Framed Pi Pod Advanced Mc Teach More gt gt C Pod2 Manual Teach Auto Teach Cancel Figure 6 8 Position Properties for deck positions 5 Rename the deck position if desired Note Names for deck positions must be alphanumeric with no spaces the only nonalphanumeric character allowed is _ underscore The first character must be a letter Specify the X Y and Z Coordinates of the appropriate pod by framing the ALP Note ALPs are taught indirectly when positions are taught Note Ifa position is accessible by both pods in a dual pod system each pod must be framed to the position 6 19 7 Select More gt gt to display the device association and labware offset options 10 11 12 Name Ps ALP Type OneByO ne x erm Y fcm Z crm Precision Pod1 Coordinates 43 484 6 737 ja 5 7 Not Framed Pod2 Coordinates 43 484 6 737 In 5 7 Not Framed Pod Podi Advanced Mc Te
227. eshooting a Source Waste Sensor cccccccssecesecesseeeseceseceeeeeeeeeeseecsaeeeteeeees B 10 ALPs User s Manual Introduction to ALPs About This Manual This ALPs Automated Labware Positioners User s Manual provides information on using and configuring ALPs on a Biomek Laboratory Automation Workstation This chapter contains information general on all ALPs while the individual ALP chapters contain specific hardware and software information applicable to the specific ALP Generally the individual chapters provide the following information e Overview of the ALP e Installing the ALP to the deck e Any special hardware information on using the ALP in a method e Framing instructions e Specific information on using the ALP in a method e Specific information on using the ALP outside a method e Removing the ALP from the deck Storage e Preventive maintenance Since several ALPs and devices such as a wash pump or fan associated with ALPs require an Device Controller to operate an appendix on the Device Controller is included 1 1 1 Related User s Manuals The following related user s manuals for accessing more in depth information on the Biomek Software and Biomek Laboratory Automation Workstations are provided as links to this ALPs Automated Labware Positioners User s Manual e Biomek Software User s Manual Biomek FX Laboratory Automation Workstation User s Manual e Biomek NX Multi
228. eshooting the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir 6 44 6 11 1 Troubleshooting the HDR Pin Drying ALP 6 44 6 11 2 Troubleshooting the Circulating Reservoir 0 6 44 7 Heating and Cooling ALP 7 1 CIVEIVICW eiretie triin nET EEE AEk EEEE E E R RENEE EESE AA REER 7 1 7 2 Installing the Heating and Cooling ALP 0 0 0 cece eee eee 7 3 7 2 1 Mounting the Heating and Cooling ALP to the Deck 7 3 7 2 2 Circulator Bath Specifications 000 cece eee 7 5 7 3 Framing Instructions nnana anaua a naera 7 5 74 Removing the Heating and Cooling ALP nanannana naana annae 7 5 7 5 ONE T A E ang E EEEE E E eee ene EE EEE 7 6 TO Preventive Mamta ess resrirrintira mieie eenia eA EE a amet 7 6 Jsl TroubleshootinS 05 eno hh aig eres eaa EE Re ek oe ee eS 7 6 8 High Density Passive ALPs 8 1 OVET VIEW 20h didn thged dice Ries en PON Ge OREM KEARSE REEDS 8 1 8 1 1 4 x 4 High Density Passive ALP oy csa4cstedaeee dues Yas ekaesess 8 2 8 1 2 4x3 High Density ALP cgadedadvtay cues eesas sadepateceaeks 8 3 8 2 Installing High Density Passive ALPs 00 cece eee eee eee ees 8 6 8 2 1 Choosing a Deck Position for the 4 x 3 ALP 0 8 6 8 2 2 Mounting a 4x 3 ALP to the Deck 0 00 00 0 0 eee 8 6 8 2 3 Choosing a Deck Position for the 4x 4 ALP 0 0 8 7 8 2 4 Mounting the 4x 4 ALP to the Deck n nnnnunananaara nanan 8
229. ets from the Magnetic Bead ALP 4 Position the magnet such that the mounting holes on the bottom of the magnet slip over the dowels on the mounting plate Figure 10 4 Place the magnet on the mounting plate such that the mounting holes on the bottom of the magnet slip over the dowels on the mounting plate Dowels Mounting plate Figure 10 4 Attaching magnet to mounting plate Note The magnet type configured in Hardware Setup must match the magnet type installed in the Magnetic Bead ALP When changing magnet types make sure appropriate changes are also made in Hardware Setup refer to Section 10 4 1 Installing and Configuring a Magnetic Bead ALP in Hardware Setup Beckman Coulter Inc Magnetic Bead ALP 10 7 10 2 2 2 Removing Magnets from the Magnetic Bead ALP To remove a magnet from the Magnetic Bead ALP 1 In Advanced Manual Control use the Move Magnet command to raise the magnet to a Magnet Position of 5 cm refer to Section 10 5 Controlling the Magnetic Bead ALP Outside a Method The magnet moves to its highest position and a motion error appears Figure 10 5 Motion error Positive Limit reached Figure 10 5 Motion error resulting from magnet reaching Positive Limit 2 Choose OK to close the error message 3 Lift the magnet in an upward motion to clear the mounting holes from the dowels on the mounting plate and remove the
230. fficient to quickly dry pins after washing in one or more reservoirs Fan guards are installed on both sides of the fan to prevent airflow from affecting operation on other ALPs and for safety The fan is operated by a Device Controller refer to Appendix A Device Controller Figure 6 1 HDR Pin Drying ALP Beckman Coulter Inc HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 6 3 6 1 1 1 Components of the HDR Pin Drying ALP The HDR Pin Drying ALP comes in a preassembled kit with the following components e 1x1 Passive ALP a standard passive ALP with one position e adaptor plate plate mounted to the 1 x 1 Passive ALP that allows the fan and fan guard to be fastened to the ALP e fan active component that provides airflow to dry pins WARNING Do not stick objects through the fan guards e two 2 fan guards located directly above and below the fan these prevent airflow from affecting operation on other ALPs and provide safety HDR Pin Drying ALP collar reservoir stand placed on the labware positioner of the HDR Pin Drying ALP to direct air from the fan upwards for better drying results Note The HDR Pin Drying ALP collar is not preassembled If desired the adaptor plate fan and fan guards can be removed from the 1 x 1 Passive ALP and mounted onto another ALP with an open centered position such as a 4 x 3 High Density ALP
231. fine tune the position minimum setting is 0 005 cm 15 Select the directional button representing the motion required to physically move the tip into position over the white framing points on the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP Figure 18 5 Note The directional keys on the numeric keypad can also be used to physically position the tips over the wells of the microplate The directional buttons displayed in the software parallel the keys on the numeric keypad More specifically the Fwd directional button correlates to the 1 on the numeric keypad while Down is found on the 2 Left is found on the 4 Right on 6 Up on 8 and Back on 9 Note Each time a directional button is selected the pod and tips move the distance specified in Delta in the indicated direction OR Using the graphic alignment tool Drag the center small circle until it represents the tips physical position in relation to the white framing points on the ALP Note The large circle represents the position of the white framing points on the top of the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP while the small circle represents the position of the tips on the Span 8 Pod The objective is to provide the software with a representation of the tips position in relation to the white framing points on the ALP The software uses this graphical representation and the Delta value to know approximately how far in any direction the tips must move 16 Select Go The Span 8 Pod
232. fuse box Plug in the unit nH On A W N Turn on the power switch A 6 2 Replacing the High Voltage Output Fuse To replace a high voltage output fuse 1 Using a flat head screwdriver turn the cover over the fuse 1 2 turn to the left Take pressure off the cover The fuse cover and fuse will pop out Replace the fuse with a 5X20mm 3 15 Amp Fast Acting fuse Place the cover back over the fuse and press in the cover nA A W N Turn the cover back 1 2 turn Beckman Coulter Inc Device Controller A 1411 A 7 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting techniques for a Device Controller are found in Table A 2 Table A 2 Troubleshooting a Device Controller IF THEN Power is not transmitted Check connections to make sure they are correct and secure Power is not transmitted but Replace the fuse refer to Section connections are correct and secure A 6 1 Replacing the Power Input Fuse The host computer does not recognize Make sure the address switch is set to the Device Controller the correct device address refer to Section A 3 Setting Address Switches ALPs User s Manual Appendix B Source Waste Sensor B 1 Overview When properly installed and configured in Biomek Software the Source Waste Sensor indicates whether a source container is running below a specified level or a waste container is running above a specified level The chapter includes the following sections
233. g Tube Rack with side plates left facing 8 Add test tubes to the test tube rack if necessary Once the top adaptor plate is installed it must be removed to add test tubes to the rack Note Ifusing a partially full tube rack place an equal number of test tubes on each side of the test tube rack or add blank test tubes to the opposite side to balance it This helps to provide a level surface for the septum piercing tips and equalizes the force distribution when the tips press down on the septa covered tubes ALPs User s Manual 22 14 Test Tube Rack ALPs 9 Place the top adaptor plate above the ALP position so that the four grooves on the adaptor slide over the four thumbscrews on the side plates It may be necessary to loosen one or more of the thumbscrews to allow the grooves of the top adaptor plate to slide over them Note Ifthe septum piercing tube rack has not already been placed on the Test Tube Rack ALP position do so before placing the top adaptor Top adaptor plate Make sure tubes are Side plate centered between the slots Slide grooves in top plate over the thumbscrews and fasten to secure top adaptor plate Thumbscrews Firmly press on top adaptor plate when fastening 10 11 12 13 Beckman Coulter Inc Figure 22 11 Septum Piercing Tube Rack with top adapter plate left facing Push the top adaptor plate down until stopped by the top of the test tubes Make su
234. g any active ALP WARNING SPILL HAZARD WARNING Do not kink the hoses WARNING Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous materials WARNING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials WARNING Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer CAUTION Do not overflow the reservoir CAUTION Do not attempt to access a 96 Channel or 384 Channel Tip Wash ALP with a Multichannel Pod equipped with an HDR Tool Body The gripper may crash and damage the pod HDR Tool Body or Tip Wash ALP CAUTION Do not access labware positioned on a 1 x 5 Passive ALP with the HDR Tool Body The gripper may crash with the ALP CAUTION Do not access labware on a Stirring ALP with the HDR Tool Body The magnetic stirrer may bend the pins or interfere with the liquid transfer performance of the pins CAUTION Turn off power to the Biomek FX instrument and the Device Controller before attaching or removing any active ALP Heating and Cooling ALP WARNING The Heating and Cooling ALP can reach extremely high temperatures Allow the Heating and Cooling ALP to cool before removing it from the deck WARNING Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous materials WARNING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by your s
235. g the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir from the Deck 6 8 1 Removing the HDR Pin Drying ALP The HDR Pin Drying ALP can be used as a standard deck position when not in use during a method To remove the HDR Pin Drying ALP from the deck CAUTION Turn off power to the Biomek FX instrument and the Device A N Controller before attaching or removing any active ALP 1 Turn off power to the Biomek FX instrument and Device Controller before removing any ALP 2 Unplug the fan from the Device Controller 3 Loosen the thumbscrews on the base of the HDR Pin Drying ALP 4 Lift the unit in an upward motion to clear the locating pins from the locating holes on the deck 6 8 2 Removing the Circulating Reservoir The circulating reservoir needs to be carefully dismantled prior to removing it from the deck To dismantle and remove the circulating reservoir from the deck WARNING SPILL HAZARD WARNING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials WARNING Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous materials WARNING Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer gt P pe 1 Remove the outlet tubing from the peristaltic pump head 2 Run the peristaltic pump in reverse until the reservoir is sufficiently drained 3
236. g to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer to determine the safe maximum shaking speed for any type and amount of liquid CAUTION If using Biomek FX Software version 2 1c or prior crashes may occur when executing a Continuation method To avoid crashes delete any partially completed Orbital Shaker ALP steps and reinsert them into the Continuation method Positive Position ALP WARNING Disconnect main power before connecting or disconnecting CAN cables CAUTION Orient the Positive Position ALP so the CAN connections are to the right of the ALP and the clamp is in the front right corner of the ALP when facing the Biomek instrument CAUTION A maximum of one long CAN cable can be used in each chain of ALPs If more than one long CAN cable is used in a chain CAN communication errors may occur WARNING Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous materials WARNING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials WARNING Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer WARNING Pinch Point The clamps used to secure a microplate to the Positive Position ALP could cause personal injury Avoid interference with the clamps while a microplate is on the ALP Solid Phase Extraction SPE Vacuum Manifold ALP WARNI
237. gently down into the adaptor Figure 13 5 6 Frame the ALP according to procedures outlined in the specific user s manual for the instrument Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs_ 13 11 13 5 Entering Offsets for the Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs If a more precise location of the tips in the cleaning wells of the Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs during a wash is desired offsets for framing the Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs may be entered Refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Section 5 4 3 3 Changing Per Labware Offsets for instructions on changing Per labware Offsets The X and Y offsets are entered using the following instructions 1 Create a short method using the Multichannel Tip Wash ALP Note Washing tips in a method using a Multichannel Tip Wash ALP is configured in the Transfer or Combine steps refer to the Biomek Software User 5 Manual Chapter 15 3 Configuring Transfer and Combine Steps and Wash steps refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 16 6 Wash Step 2 Based on a visual observation during the method run use the following explanation to determine the offsets Ifthe tips are positioned too much to the left of the center of the wells increase the number in the X cm Figure 13 6 e Ifthe tips are positioned too much to the right of the center of the wells decrease the number in the X cm Figure 13 6 e Ifthe tips are positioned too much to the back of the center of the wells increase
238. gether with a Magnetic Bead ALP is two including the Magnetic Bead ALP Each chain of two devices must plug into the main Biomek instrument 6 Verify that address switch ADR1 is set between 0 and 7 7 Verify that address switch ADR2 is set between 0 and F 10 2 2 Using Interchangeable Magnets The Magnetic Bead ALP uses interchangeable magnets to draw magnetic beads to specific positions in a microplate Interchangeable magnets make it possible to use different magnet types for different applications Flat or post magnets designed for laboratory use may be used with the Magnetic Bead ALP The Magnetic Bead ALP supports the following magnets e 96 Well Post Magnet Part Number 379511 e 96 Well Flat Magnet Part Number 379512 10 2 2 1 Installing Magnets to the Magnetic Bead ALP To install a magnet in the Magnetic Bead ALP 1 In Advanced Manual Control use the Move Magnet command to raise the magnet to a Magnet Position of 5 cm refer to Section 10 5 Controlling the Magnetic Bead ALP Outside a Method The magnet raises to its highest position and a motion error appears Figure 10 3 3 Motion error Positive Limit reached Figure 10 3 Motion error resulting from magnet reaching Positive Limit 2 Choose OK to close the error message ALPs User s Manual 10 6 Magnetic Bead ALP 3 If another magnet is already installed remove the magnet from the Magnetic Bead ALP refer to Section 10 2 2 2 Removing Magn
239. gned with the framing target choose Next to continue Biomek NX Manual Framing Wizard displays Teach Z refer to Section 2 3 3 Framing the Z Axis ALPs User s Manual 2 18 8 Channel Active Wash ALP 2 3 3 Framing the Z Axis After the X and Y axes are framed the Z axis must be framed to ensure tips are washed at the desired height The final screen in Bilomek NX Manual Framing Wizard is for framing the Z axis Figure 2 16 W Biomek NX Manual Framing Wizard 10 x The tips should be 0 5 centimeters above the ALP Lower the pod until the tips touch the top of the ALP Delta 0 05 E cm A Back Left Bight Teach Z Fwd Down J Hysteresis compensation Total Moved From Start cm 0 10909 0 12272 o ot cont or Figure 2 16 Manual Teaching Teach Z 1 In Delta select the magnitude of change applied to the pod each time a directional button is selected Figure 2 16 Note The default Delta value is 0 05 cm If the tip is a considerable distance above the position increase the distance traveled by increasing the Delta value maximum setting is 1 0 cm If the tip is almost to the desired location reduce the Delta value minimum setting is 0 005 cm Note Since the X and Y axes were framed previously it is safe to move the pod in the X and Y axes if it makes framing the pod in the Z axis easier Beckman Coulter Inc 8 Channel Active Wash AL
240. gnetic Bead ALP from the deck WARNING Disconnect main power before connecting or disconnecting AN CAN cables 1 Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before removing any ALP 2 Unplug the CAN communication cable s from the CAN Port s on the Magnetic Bead ALP 3 Loosen the thumbscrews on the base of the Magnetic Bead ALP 4 Lift the unit in an upward motion to clear the locating pins from the locating holes on the deck 10 7 Storage To prepare the Magnetic Bead ALP for storage 1 Remove the installed magnet from the Magnetic Bead ALP refer to Section 10 2 2 2 Removing Magnets from the Magnetic Bead ALP 2 Disengage the magnet mounting plate to its lowest position refer to Section 10 5 2 Engaging and Disengaging the Magnet 3 Remove the Magnetic Bead ALP from the deck refer to Section 10 6 Removing the Magnetic Bead ALP 4 Return the Magnetic Bead ALP to the original packing materials and store in a dry dust free environmentally controlled area Note It is desirable to allow the Magnetic Bead ALP to air dry before returning it to the original packing materials 10 8 Preventive Maintenance Follow the appropriate decontamination and cleaning procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer ALPs User s Manual 10 34 Magnetic Bead ALP 10 9 Troubleshooting Beckman Coulter Inc Do not attempt to repair the unit without first contacting a Beckman Coulter Service Engineer
241. guration in Hardware Setup is not necessary for the Stirring ALP The Stirring ALP is controlled and operated through the Device Action step in Biomek Software refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 22 6 1 10 Configuring the Device Action Step for the Stirring ALP FX NX only The speed stirring time and ramp time are all configured through the Device Action step for use in a method Beckman Coulter Inc Stirring ALP 20 5 20 5 Controlling the Stirring ALP Outside a Method To control the Stirring ALP outside a method use Advanced Manual Control to Turn on the Stirring ALP at a particular speed Turn off the Stirring ALP To turn on or adjust the speed of a Stirring ALP 1 Choose Instrument gt Manual Control Manual Control appears 2 Choose Advanced Controls 3 Select the desired Stirrer ALP Advanced Manual Control for the selected Stirring ALP appears Figure 20 3 Command si tsti s i sYS Stirring speed 5 percent Time to reach full speed Booo seconds Stop for pipetting Yes X Figure 20 3 Advanced Manual Control for a selected Stirring ALP 4 From Command choose Stir 5 Enter a percentage in Stirring speed Note The allowed minimum percentage is 1 and the allowed maximum percentage is 100 Enter a time in seconds in Time to reach full speed Choose Yes or No in Stop for pipetting Choose Go Oo N A Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control 10
242. h ALP WARNING Always wear protective gloves when draining the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP of fluid WARNING The waste fluid may be contaminated Follow the appropriate disposal procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer WARNING Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous materials WARNING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by your safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials CAUTION Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer CAUTION SPILL HAZARD To remove the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP 1 Turn the waste port on the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP up so that no fluid from the ALP leaks onto the deck gt PEPER E Detach the drainage tube from the waste port Raise the drainage tube until the fluid in the tube drains into the waste container Remove the tubing from the Biomek instrument deck and the waste container Loosen the Phillips screws on the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP base from the deck nH nA A W N Remove the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP from the deck by lifting until the locating pin clears the locating hole on the deck WARNING Follow the appropriate disposal procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer to dispose of the fluid The cleaning wells and reservoir of the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP may contain hazardous chemicals and fluids 7 Carefully empty the Spa
243. h is displayed below the graphic adjusts in 0 1 millimeter mm increments e Right click on the graphic of a pin inside a well and a menu appears Select Custom Height and Custom Height appears Figure 6 19 Insert the Height in millimeters mm and in from select a reference point from the drop down list Choose OK Height fl mm from Bottom X Cancel Figure 6 19 Custom Height prompt 16 Configure additional Cleaning Operations following the procedures in Sections 6 6 1 1 1 Configuring a Wash Operation and 6 6 1 1 2 Configuring a Drying Operation ALPs User s Manual 6 34 HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 6 6 1 1 2 Configuring a Drying Operation To configure a drying operation for the HDR Tool Cleaning step 1 Select Click here to add a cleaning drying operation The Cleaning Operation configuration appears Figure 6 20 Biomek Software Method1 New File Edit Project Instrument Execution Options Help D eet ORS elo oa 0 oO Ea A Start Use pod Po Z for transfer Instrument Setup Q HDR Transfer HBR Tool Cleaning 0 00 mm from bottom ig Finish Cleaning Dipping Corfiguration Click here to add a cleaning operation Comment bx ES A 7s 0 ks za Z8 A Rect g Method1 BiomekFX BiomekFX ETC 0 03 45 Figure 6 20 HDR Tool Cleaning step new cleaning operation
244. h pump on after the HDR Tool Body moves away from the circulating reservoir Note The default value for Leave pump on for is 2 seconds Select Run pump during wash operation to leave the pump running continuously during the wash operation if desired 4 To specify the quadrants of a microplate to access double click the source labware in the step configuration to zoom in on the labware Note To call up a menu for Zoom and a Specify Selection as Text option right click on the labware Specify Selection as Text allows selection of quadrants as targets for aspirate and dispense operations Specify Selection as Text may also be used to enter variables or expressions refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 13 Using Variables and Expressions in a Method Note Specify Selection as Text is not applicable for 96 well microplates reservoirs or 384 well microplates accessed by a 384 pin plate 5 Select the desired quadrant s on the zoomed in graphic of the labware Note Selecting any well automatically selects all wells in that quadrant Note To select multiple quadrants click and drag over the desired quadrants or hold down Ctrl or Shift and select the desired quadrants 6 Choose Zoom Out to return to the step configuration screen ALPs User s Manual 6 32 HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 7 Choose Dipping Configuration to configure the wash operation Dipping Configuration appears
245. hannel Active Wash ALP 2 5 To route the tubing to the peristaltic pump and 8 Channel Active Wash ALP 1 10 11 12 13 Position the peristaltic pump at an off deck location near the ALP Note The peristaltic pump must be connected to a Device Controller refer to Appendix A Device Controller Unlock the pump head by rotating the locking lever counterclockwise from the front of the pump Ensure that the supply container contains the desired system cleaning fluid Attach the source tubing to the source port on the ALP Route the source tubing off the deck by passing it through either the access holes between the towers at the back of the instrument or between the light curtain and the deck on the side of the Biomek instrument Note Make sure the tube routing does not interfere with the operation of the Biomek instrument or the light curtain Route the source tubing through the pump head from right to left facing the front of the pump Cut the source tubing to the desired length Route the source tubing from the pump head to the system fluid or source container Lock the pump head by rotating the locking lever clockwise from the front of the pump Place the waste container under the lab bench or in an accessible space lower than the instrument deck height Attach the drainage tube to the waste port on the ALP Figure 2 1 Run the opposite end of the drainage tube to t
246. he SPE step 16 9 deck positions 16 5 defined 16 1 framing 16 7 framing the collar stand 16 7 installing 16 5 mounting 16 5 mounting collar stand 16 6 preventive maintenance 16 12 removing 16 12 removing the collar stand 16 12 storage 16 12 troubleshooting 16 12 using in a method 16 9 Source Waste Sensor calibrating the sensor B 5 controlling outside a method B 9 defined B 1 installing B 2 preventive maintenance B 10 troubleshooting B 10 using in a method B 6 Span 8 Disposal ALP framing 17 18 preventive maintenance 17 20 storage 17 20 Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide deck positions 17 10 defined 17 1 17 4 installing 17 10 installing protective shield blanking plate 17 15 mounting to the deck 17 11 removing 17 20 Span 8 Disposal ALP without Slide deck positions 17 5 defined 17 1 17 3 installing 17 5 mounting to the deck 17 5 removing 17 19 removing the bagging extension 17 19 Span 8 High Density 4x3 ALP framing 9 7 storage 9 7 Span 8 Tip Wash ALP deck positions 18 3 defined 18 1 framing 18 5 how system fluid is pumped 18 1 installing 18 3 mounting to the deck 18 4 preventive maintenance 18 12 ALPs User s Manual xliv Index removing 18 5 18 11 storage 18 12 troubleshooting 18 12 SPE Step defined 16 9 Standard Passive ALPs 1x 1 ALP defined 19 2 installing LLS plate option 19 4 LLS plate option defined 19 3 1 x 1 ALP with Indented Sides defined 19 6 1 x 3 ALP defined 19 7 1 x 5 ALP defined
247. he Storage ALP Move step 1 To insert a Storage ALP Move step into a method drag and drop Storage ALP Move from the Integrated Devices step palette to the Method View Figure 21 11 Biomek Software Method1 New ile Edit Project Instrument Execution Options Help a Z RS melo all gt wo lt S amp Start Using pod Podi 7 To Instrument Setup Metazoa Z to sri z Storage ALP Move a Storage ALP Move 3 Move the entire stack of labware C Move stack leaving the bottom piece of labware at the source position C Move the topmost T piece of labware from the stack Advanced Controls I IMethod1 Tutorial BiomekFX ETC 0 00 03 Figure 21 11 Storage ALP Move step inserted into the Method View 2 In Using Pod select the pod to move the labware Note In Using Pod Pod1 is the default on a single pod Biomek FX instrument and the only pod capable of moving labware on or off the Storage ALPs 3 In Move labware from select the position where labware desired to move is located 4 In to select the desired position where the selected labware will be moved 5 The In Move labware from select the position where labware desired to move is located 6 In to select the desired position where the selected labware will be moved Note Storage ALP position must be chosen in either Move labware from or to this step is used only to move labwa
248. he Test Tube Rack must be a uniform height Note Biomek Software assumes a Test Tube Rack contains one size and type of test tube not a combination of test tube sizes and types Test Tube Rack ALPs support four sizes of Beckman Coulter test tube racks 10 mm x75 mm 12 mm x75 mm e 13mm x100 mm e 15 5 mm x100 mm The NX S8 also supports two sizes of Beckman Coulter septum piercing tube racks e 13mm x100 mm e 15 5 mm x100 mm ALPs User s Manual 22 2 Test Tube Rack ALPs The sections in this chapter include e Installing Test Tube Rack ALPs Section 22 2 Framing Instructions Section 22 3 e Adding Test Tube Racks to Test Tube Rack ALPs Section 22 4 e Adding and Removing Septum Piercing Tube Racks to Tube Rack ALPs NX S8 only Section 22 5 e Removing Test Tube Rack ALPs from the Deck Section 22 6 e Storage Section 22 7 e Preventive Maintenance Section 22 8 22 1 1 1x2 Test Tube Rack ALP A 1x2 Test Tube Rack ALP Figure 22 1 can hold up to two racks of test tubes Test tubes and test tube racks are not gripper accessible or stackable 1 x 2 Test Tube Rack ALP left facing Labware positions Thumbscrew Two thumbscrews are used to secure the 1 x 2 Test Tube Rack ALP to the deck There is another thumbscrew on the corner diagonal to the one shown here Overhang Figure 22 1 1 x 2 Test Tube Rack
249. he installed digital devices under Digital Devices in the left pane New Devices Available Devices MagBead4LP HW Address 01 MagBead4LP HW Address 02 MagBead4LP HW Address 03 OrbitalShakerALP Hw Address 00 OrbitalShakerALP Hw Address 01 OrbitalShakerALP Hw Address 02 OrbitalShakerALP Hw Address 03 PositivePositionSLP HW Address 00 PositivePosition4LP Hw Address 01 Simple Stacker Carousel WashPump OOOUOOOOOOOUG Install Cancel Figure 2 3 New Devices displaying all detected devices Beckman Coulter Inc 8 Channel Active Wash ALP 2 7 3 Select the WashPump under Digital Devices to configure it The configuration screen for the WashPump appears to the right in Hardware Setup Figure 2 4 Biomek Hardware Setup la Reconnect ft Home All Axes cp Add Device Remove Device J Accept gt lt Cancel El Biomek NX SN None Line Name On Off fj AccuFrame 8 Podi Box DeviceContraller0 7 THES Cne 47 DeviceControllerO 7 PurgePumpO 47 ShakerALPO oF ShakerALP1 ae SourceWasteSensor0 oF SourceWasteSensor1 gy StirrerALPO g7 StirrerALP1 47 TiploaderO 7 m F Tiploader1 E Digital Devices E WashPump1 B E Simulator OP Camera E Materials Stacker Carousels BiomekNX Span Figure 2 4 WashPump configuration in Hardware Setup 4 In Box select the Device Controller to which the WashPump is connected 5 In Line select
250. he two connectors labeled CAN PORT on the controller Figure 4 4 Note When possible short CAN cables should be used when connecting devices to each other or to the Biomek instrument Sensor amplifier Amplifier Amplifier receiver port transmitter port Figure 4 4 Automatic Reservoir Controller ports Beckman Coulter Inc Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP 4 7 Verify the ADR1 address switch is set to 1 Set ADR2 to a unique address between zero 0 and F if multiple Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALPs are on the deck Note ADR2 is set to a default address of zero 0 If only one Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP is on the deck leave the setting at zero 0 Connect the other end of the CAN cable to a CAN port on the Biomek instrument or another active ALP to create a chain Insert both sensor leads about 1 2 13 mm into the 2 2 mm holes in the supplied fiber cutter Figure 4 5 Press down to cut leads Figure 4 5 Fiber cutter Press down on the top of the cutter to cut the leads simultaneously On the controller use the supplied screwdriver to loosen the screw to the left of the sensor amplifier receiver and transmitter ports Figure 4 4 This screw secures the sensor leads to the amplifier ALPs User s Manual 4 8 Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP 9 Identify the transmitter and receiver sensor leads either by the size of the colored dots printed along the l
251. he waste container by passing the tube through either the access holes between the towers at the back of the instrument or between the light curtain and the deck on the side of the instrument Note Make sure the tube routing does not interfere with the operation of the Biomek instrument or the light curtain Cut the drainage tube to the appropriate length to ensure there is no excess that could cause a rise or bump in the drainage tubes route from the ALP to the waste container and place it in the waste container ensuring the end of the tubing is no more than 6 inches from the top of the container Note Since the ALP is gravity fed it is crucial that the drainage tube run down hill without any rises between the ALP and the waste container ALPs User s Manual 2 6 8 Channel Active Wash ALP 2 2 3 Adding a WashPump in Hardware Setup The 8 Channel Active Wash ALP uses a peristaltic pump to wash tips This pump must be added in Hardware Setup as a digital device and configured with the appropriate Device Controller To add a WashPump in Hardware Setup 1 From Biomek Software choose Instrument gt Hardware Setup Hardware Setup appears 2 In Hardware Setup right click Digital Devices or any device under Digital Devices and choose Add Device then select WashPump OR Choose Add Device from the top of Hardware Setup New Devices appears Figure 2 3 Select WashPump and choose Install The WashPump is added to t
252. hod Section 11 5 3 e Clamping or Unclamping a Plate Outside a Method Section 11 5 4 11 5 1 Turning On the Microplate Shaking ALP Outside a Method To turn on a Microplate Shaking ALP 1 Choose Instrument gt Manual Control Manual Control appears 2 Choose Advanced Controls 3 Select the desired Shake ALP Advanced Manual Control for the selected Microplate Shaking ALP appears Figure 11 3 Command Shake 7 Shaking speed 5 percent Time to reach full speed Booo seconds Figure 11 3 Advanced Manual Control for a selected Microplate Shaking ALP 4 From Command choose Shake 5 Enter a percentage in Shaking speed Note The allowed minimum percentage is 1 and the allowed maximum percentage is 100 Enter a time in seconds in Time to reach full speed Choose Go Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control O N A Choose Exit to close Manual Control Beckman Coulter Inc Microplate Shaking ALP 11 7 11 5 2 Timing a Shaking Operation Outside a Method To time a shaking operation 1 Choose Instrument gt Manual Control Manual Control appears 2 Choose Advanced Controls 3 Select the desired Shaker ALP Advanced Manual Control for the selected Microplate Shaking ALP appears Figure 11 3 4 From Command choose Timed Shake Advanced Manual Control for the Microplate Shaking ALP with Timed Shake appears Figure 11 4 Command Timed Shake id Shaking speed 5 perc
253. ical switch uses three connections and signal e Contact switch uses two connections A 4 3 1 Connecting an Optical Switch To connect an optical switch 1 Connect the positive wire from the optical switch to the positive connector on the digital input 2 Connect the ground wire from the optical switch to the negative connector on the digital input 3 Connect the signal wire from the optical switch to the S connector on the digital input A 4 3 2 Connecting a Contact Switch To connect a contact switch 1 Connect one lead from the contact switch to the S connector on the digital input 2 Connect the other lead from the contact switch to the negative connector on the digital input Device Controller A 9 A 5 Using Advanced Manual Control to Manually Control Device Controllers Use Advanced Manual Control for a selected Device Controller to e Turn the output channels on or off manually e Monitor input channels When opened Advanced Manual Control for a selected Device Controller displays which channels are on and which channels are off To manually control Device Controller channels 1 Choose Instrument gt Manual Control Manual Control appears 2 Choose Advanced Controls 3 Select the desired Device Controller Advanced Manual Control for the selected Device Controller appears Figure A 4 4 To toggle a channel off or on click the button Note Channels that are on ar
254. ice Engineer Table 7 2 Troubleshooting the Heating and Cooling ALP The Heating and Cooling ALP is not Make sure that the hoses are attached functioning correctly properly Contact the circulating bath manufacturer Beckman Coulter Inc 8 1 Overview High Density Passive ALPs The High Density Passive ALPs are open structures that hold multiple pieces of labware allowing more labware on the Biomek deck at one time while using as few deck positions as possible The High Density Passive ALPs increase deck flexibility when a method requires access to large amounts of labware but still requires access to other ALPs such as the Tip Wash ALPs or the Solid Phase Extraction SPE Vacuum Manifold ALP These ALPs are also useful when running the Plate Replication Wizard or when running high throughput screening methods High Density Passive ALPs include 4 x 4 High Density Passive ALP refer to Section 8 1 1 4 x 4 High Density Passive ALP 4 x 3 High Density Passive ALP refer to Section 8 1 2 4 x 3 High Density ALP Note AnLLS plate can be installed in any or all labware positions on the 4 x 3 High Density ALP The sections in this chapter include Installing High Density Passive ALPs Section 8 2 Framing Instructions Section 8 3 Removing High Density Passive ALPs from the Deck Section 8 4 Storage Section 8 5 Preventive Maintenance Section 8 6 ALPs User s Manual
255. ide the ALP Note Tips may stick to the slide which could cause tips or labware to jam in the chute Check the slide periodically during the method run to ensure it is clear of tips Figure 5 4 Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide ALPs User s Manual 5 8 Half Position Disposal ALP NX S8 only ZN A Beckman Coulter Inc 5 3 1 Mounting the Half Position Disposal ALP with Slide to the Deck CAUTION The Half Position Disposal ALP with Slide must be mounted in the left or right outside columns of the Biomek NX deck to avoid collisions CAUTION Make sure the correct Disposal ALP is chosen when configuring the deck setup in the Deck Editor Disposal ALPs vary in height and failure to choose each Disposal ALP correctly in the software may result in collisions between pod s and Disposal ALPs during operation The Half Position Disposal ALP can be mounted on half of a standard deck position in the outside columns of the Biomek NX deck Refer to the Biomek Software User 5 Manual Chapter 5 Preparing and Managing the Deck to learn how to configure the deck and where to place the ALP on the Biomek NX deck The Half Position Disposal ALP with Slide is referred to as HalfTrashLeft or Half TrashRight in the Deck Editor The following conditions should be noted before choosing a deck position e Ifthe ALP is placed in the first or second row from the front the gripper cannot grip labware on or off an adjacent ALP from the fron
256. ies governing returned goods apply to this product Subject to the exceptions and upon the conditions stated below the Company warrants that the products sold under this sales agreement shall be free from defects in workmanship and materials for one year after delivery of the products to the original Purchaser by the Company and if any such product should prove to be defective within such one year period the Company agrees at its option either 1 to correct by repair or at the Company s election by replacement any such defective product provided that investigation and factory inspection discloses that such defect developed under normal and proper use or 2 to refund the purchase price The exceptions and conditions mentioned above are as follows a Components or accessories manufactured by the Company which by their nature are not intended to and will not function for one year are warranted only to reasonable service for a reasonable time What constitutes a reasonable time and a reasonable service shall be determined solely by the Company A complete list of such components and accessories is maintained at the factory b The Company makes no warranty with respect to components or accessories not manufactured by it In the event of defect in any such component or accessory the Company will give reasonable assistance to Purchaser in obtaining from the manufacturer s own warranty c Any product claimed to be defective must if required
257. igital device 4 Repeat steps 1 3 to configure any remaining digital devices 5 Choose Accept Hardware Setup saves changes and closes Note Accept must be chosen after the digital device has been configured to allow Hardware Setup to accept the configuration changes Cancel closes Hardware Setup without saving any changes ALPs User s Manual Remove Device Beckman Coulter Inc HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 6 3 3 Removing Digital Devices Digital devices no longer on the Biomek FX deck can be removed Note Ifa device is removed from Hardware Setup it may no longer be used when creating methods in the Biomek FX software To remove a device 1 In Hardware Setup right click on the desired device under Digital Devices 2 Choose Remove Device The device is removed from the list of installed devices under Digital Devices OR 1 Select the desired device under Digital Devices 2 Choose Remove Device from the top of Hardware Setup The device is removed from the list of installed devices under Digital Devices HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 6 17 6 4 Adding the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir to the Deck in Biomek Software Biomek Software needs to know the location of the HDR Pin Drying ALP and any circulating reservoirs on the deck before they can be used in a method The software representation of the instrument deck is configured in the Deck Editor Note For
258. igure 10 11 Per Labware Offsets 6 Select the labware type that is not flush with the top surface of the ALP when it is placed on it 7 In X enter the distance the left edge of the labware type is offset from the right side of the left most locating cone when placed on the deck position Note The X offset is 0 if the labware type is positioned against the left most locating cones 8 In Y enter the distance the back edge of the labware type is offset from the front of the back most locating cone when placed on the deck position Note The Y offset is 0 if the labware type is positioned against the back most locating cones 9 In Z enter the distance the bottom of the labware type is offset from the top of the ALP surface when placed on the deck position Note A negative Z offset indicates that the bottom of the labware is below the surface of the ALP Note While the offset values in steps 7 8 and 9 may be calculated using calipers a more precise measurement should be obtained from the manufacturer s drawings 10 Repeat steps 6 9 for each labware type that requires per labware offsets at the position ALPs User s Manual 10 16 Magnetic Bead ALP 11 12 13 14 Beckman Coulter Inc Choose OK to save the offset values Position Properties appears Choose OK Deck Editor appears Repeat steps 2 12 for each position that requires per labware offsets Choose Save to save per labware offsets along with any
259. igured in the HDR Tool Cleaning step Note Cleaning Operations are performed in the order they appear in the step configuration Beckman Coulter Inc Hi DR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 6 29 6 6 1 1 1 Configuring a Wash Operation A Wash operation dips pins in a piece of labware a specified number of times for a specified length of time Note Usually a reservoir is used as wash labware but pins can be dipped in any labware type To configure a wash operation for the HDR Tool Cleaning step CAUTION Do not attempt to access a 96 Channel or 384 Channel Tip Wash ALP with a Multichannel Pod equipped with an HDR Tool Body The gripper may crash and damage the pod HDR Tool Body or Tip Wash ALP CAUTION Do not access labware positioned on a 1 x 5 Passive ALP with the HDR Tool Body The gripper may crash with the ALP CAUTION Do not access labware on a Stirring ALP with the HDR Tool Body The magnetic stirrer may bend the pins or interfere with the liquid transfer performance of the pins gt gt gt 1 Select Click here to add a cleaning drying operation Figure 6 15 The Cleaning Operation configuration appears Biomek Software Method1 New File Edit Project Instrument Execution Options Help Dsm Ra e ocea 0 x Ea Start Use pod Po Z tor transfer Inu Instrument Setup Cleaning Q HDR Transfer a HDR Move ii HBR Tool Cleaning P P IB Finish o 2 HDR Combine 1
260. immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer To mount the SPE ALP Figure 16 2 Note The SPE ALP is the combination of the SPE ALP Base and the SPE ALP Stand 1 Position the SPE ALP so the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP stand slip into locating holes on the deck 2 Attach the SPE ALP to the deck using the thumbscrews on the ALP stand Figure 16 2 3 Attach a vacuum hose to the SPE ALP as directed by the manufacturer of the vacuum unit Note The SPE ALP filtration manifold requires a minimum vacuum supply of 20 in Hg 4 5 SCFM 67 7 kPa 0 127 m min Note The vacuum hose must run toward the back of the Biomek deck so make sure the barbed fitting on the SPE ALP is horizontal to the ALP edge Note Make sure the hose routing does not interfere with the operation of the Biomek instrument 4 Provide a waste container as specified by the vacuum pump manufacturer ALPs User s Manual 16 6 Solid Phase Extraction SPE Vacuum Manifold A 16 2 3 Mounting the SPE Collar Stand To mount the SPE Collar Stand Figure 16 4 Note The SPE Collar Stand must be adjacent to the SPE ALP 1 Position the SPE Collar Stand so the locating pins on the bottom of the stand slip into locating holes on the Biomek deck Locating holes Thumbscrews Figure 16 4 SPE Collar Stand locating holes and thumbscrews 2 Attach the SPE Collar S
261. ing a Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide 17 11 17 4 Installing Protective Shield Blanking Plate on the Biomek FX 17 15 17 4 1 Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide in L2 004 17 16 17 4 2 Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide in L3 004 17 16 17 4 3 Span 8 Disposal ALPs with Slide in Both L2 and L3 17 17 17 4 4 Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide in R2 005 17 17 17 4 5 Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide in R3 0005 17 18 17 4 6 Span 8 Disposal ALPs with Slide in Both R2 and R3 17 18 17 5 Framing Instructions 4 i0 lt 32605ccees4as buen ced EREN dees ERN EEEE 17 18 17 6 Removing the Span 8 Disposal ALP without Slide 17 19 17 6 1 Removing the Bagging Extension 00 00005 17 19 17 7 Removing a Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide 0 00 000 17 20 LG SOTS SS go ace oak oh Sah eek a eRe ak ae eee eR ERP RL A s 17 20 17 9 Preventive Maintenance lt a2eciccana he syaeetek even saneeeen see eeewes 17 20 Beckman Coulter Inc Table of Contents xxix 18 Span 8 Tip Wash ALP LGR OVETVIEW sa tidra tenned ne teaei ER 18 1 18 2 Installing the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP 20 0 cece eee eee 18 3 18 2 1 Deck Positions for the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP 18 3 18 2 2 Mounting the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP to the Deck 18 4 18 3 Framing Instructions 0 0 ccc cece cence ene
262. ing or removing any active ALP 1 Remove the ALP with the fan from the deck refer to Section 6 8 Removing the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir from the Deck 2 Place the ALP upside down 3 Remove the four 4 mounting screws from the adaptor plate 4 Lift the adaptor plate along with the fan and fan guards and remove it from the ALP To install the adaptor plate fan and fan guards to another ALP or position 1 Remove the ALP with the desired position from the deck if necessary 2 Place the ALP upside down 3 Position the fan adaptor plate assembly on the desired position on the ALP 4 Fasten the adaptor plate to the position by tightening the four 4 mounting screws CAUTION Turn off power to the Biomek instrument and the Device A N Controller before attaching or removing any active ALP 5 Mount the ALP to the deck as described in the appropriate section of this manual 6 Place the HDR Pin Drying ALP collar in the labware position directly above the fan Note Operating the HDR Pin Drying ALP without the collar in place allows the air from the fan to disperse and reduces drying efficiency 6 2 1 2 Connections The HDR Pin Drying ALP requires a Device Controller to operate Refer to Appendix A Device Controller for information on setting up a Device Controller Note The Device Controller must be turned on to provide power to attached devices The green light on the Device Controller indica
263. instrument upon which the ALP is installed ALPs User s Manual 3 6 Bar Code Reader ALP 3 5 Using the Bar Code Reader ALP in a Method To read bar code labels in a method a Bar Code Reader step must be configured Move Labware steps move labware with bar code labels to read to and from the bar code reader as needed The Bar Code Reader step is available on the Integrated Devices step palette immediately after performing the Bar Code Reader software installation Figure 3 4 Biomek Software Transfers Development d Fie Edit Project Instrument Execution Options Help PEZAS IDEAL Instrument DTX Run KS Instrument Setup Setup Protocol Jiii a Move Labware C44A32 Transfer Bar Code Q Transfer Reader lt B Finish Combine a integrated Devices step palette The steps available on this palette depend on which integrated devices are installed on the system Transfers BiomekFX BiomekFX new ETC 0 00 00 Figure 3 4 The Integrated Devices step palette shown in the main editor Beckman Coulter Inc Bar Code Reader ALP 3 7 To read bar code labels in a method 1 To move labware to the Bar Code Reader ALP insert a Move Labware step into the Method View and configure as desired refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Section 15 4 Move Labware Step CAUTION Do not use the Bar Code Reader step u
264. ion 20 2 e Framing Instructions Section 20 3 e Using the Stirring ALP in a Method Section 20 4 Controlling the Stirring ALP Outside a Method Section 20 5 e Removing the Stirring ALP Section 20 6 e Storage Section 20 7 e Preventive Maintenance Section 20 8 Troubleshooting Section 20 9 ALPs User s Manual 20 2 Stirring ALP CAN PORT ONTEN O00060 Q Oo wx ae a CAN PORT eo R lt OO O Figure 20 1 Stirring ALP side view Figure 20 2 Stir bar Beckman Coulter Inc Stirring ALP 20 3 20 2 Installing the Stirring ALP Installing the Stirring ALP includes choosing any standard deck position on the deck and mounting the ALP to the deck 20 2 1 Mounting the Stirring ALP to the Deck WARNING Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous materials WARNING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials WARNING Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer W
265. ion Options Help Dee EAS SeBooa y 05 xB H Using the Bar Code Reader at position BR1 E FA R Read bar code for decision making z 5 Instrument a cay mt Run Method IV Flag error and stop when bar code not read Use ABC for method validation Setup p Device Move Dest A to Bar Code Reader Action Wi till Read Dest A Bar Code Tploader W Move Dest A to P4 Bar Code Reader ALP BR1 PN IIF If Properties P5 Barcode Properties P4 Then Data Set Q Transfer to plate Dest A Destination Source ce Data Set End plate P4 plate P5 Management Il A Else Ca4Aa2 Bacco paaa ig Pause with Warning Reader Processing 2 DTX Run Reporting a Protocal Step amp Finish MotherDaughterTransfer BiomekFX BiomekFX new ETC 0 00 10 Figure 3 6 A method configured to read bar codes for decision making ALPs User s Manual 3 10 Bar Code Reader ALP Table 3 1 Example of a Method Where Bar Codes are used for Decision Making Step Description Move the source plate to the Bar Code Reader ALP read the bar code then move the plate back to the original deck position Actions 1 Configure a Move Labware step to move the plate Source from P5 to the Bar Code Reader ALP BR1 refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Section 15 4 Move Labware Step 2 Configure a Bar Code Reader step to
266. ipulated M Note The cursor changes to a hand when positioned over the graphic e Selecting the graphic of a pin inside a well and use the and 4 keys The textual representation of the height which is displayed below the graphic adjusts in 0 1 millimeter mm increments e Right click on the graphic of a pin inside a well and a menu appears Select Custom Height and Custom Height appears Figure 6 22 Insert the Height in millimeters mm and in from select a reference point from the drop down list Choose OK Height fT tst S mm from Bottom 7 Cancel Figure 6 22 Custom Height prompt 7 Configure additional Cleaning Operations following the procedures in Sections 6 6 1 1 1 Configuring a Wash Operation and 6 6 1 1 2 Configuring a Drying Operation Beckman Coulter Inc HI DR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 6 37 6 6 2 Using the Device Action Step The Device Action step can be used to configure the actions of the HDR Cleaning System on the deck during a method such as turning the fan in the HDR Drying ALP on and off or turning wash pumps for the circulating reservoir s on and off Note An HDR Pin Drying ALP and or circulating reservoir must be configured in Hardware Setup refer to Section 6 3 Installing and Configuring Devices Associated with the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir in Hardware Setup and placed on the deck in the Deck Editor r
267. is not violated by the AccuFrame cable If the light curtain is violated the framing process halts immediately A Beckman Coulter Inc WARNING Make sure the AccuFrame cable does not interfere with pod movement 4 Manually place the AccuFrame into the Framing Tool Adaptor by placing the front right corner first and pushing the AccuFrame gently down into the Adaptor Figure 22 3 and Figure 22 4 5 Turn on power to main unit 6 Frame the Test Tube Rack ALP according to the procedures outlined in the appropriate instrument user s manual Test Tube Rack ALPs 22 7 22 4 Adding Test Tube Racks to Test Tube Rack ALPs Test tube racks must be properly added to the Test Tube Rack ALPs so position Al on the test tube rack is in the front left corner of a labware position on the Test Tube Rack ALP gt NX S8 Septum piercing tube racks may also be placed on Test Tube Rack ALPs refer to Section 22 5 Adding and Removing Septum Piercing Tube Racks to Tube Rack ALPs NX S8 only Proper placement of test tube racks on the Test Tube Rack ALPs is ensured by inserting the labware positioning screws in the labware positioning screw holes on the left side of the ALP after the ALP is added to the deck The labware positioning screws are always on the left side of the ALP regardless of whether the ALP is left or right facing Figure 22 5 and Figure 22 6 Note Labware positioning screws must be next to the test tube in positi
268. ise until it stops Figure 4 7 Figure 4 7 Calibrating the sensor amplifier sensitivity 2 Manually fill the reservoir with the desired liquid until the liquid level covers at least half of the reservoir sensor window 3 Use the supplied screwdriver to slowly turn the sensitivity adjustment dial counterclockwise When the sensitivity indicator LED turns on stop turning the dial immediately Figure 4 7 Note Ifthe LED does not turn on make sure the sensor leads are connected to the correct ports on the amplifier refer to Section 4 2 2 2 Connecting the CAN Communications Cables and Sensor Leads ALPs User s Manual 4 10 Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP 4 Manually drain the reservoir and observe if the indicator LED turns off 5 Ifthe indicator LED turned off manually fill the reservoir again If the LED turns on when the liquid level covers at least half the sensor window the sensitivity calibration is complete OR If the indicator LED did not turn off when the reservoir was drained repeat the steps in this section again 4 3 Framing Instructions Frame the passive ALP the reservoir occupies according to the instructions in the appropriate hardware manual Biomek Software treats the reservoir as a piece of labware and does not require additional framing Beckman Coulter Inc Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP 4 11 4 4 Using the Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP in a Method To use th
269. k Editor 10 10 10 4 3 Configuring LabwareTypes for Use on the Magnetic Bead ALP 10 17 10 4 4 Understanding How the Magnetic Bead ALP Performs Automatically 44 4 4 civieeawin So eernne bee ee sud aSes 10 20 10 4 5 Configuring the Device Action Step for a Magnetic Bead ALP 10 21 10 5 Controlling the Magnetic Bead ALP Outside a Method 10 24 10 5 1 Homme the Magnet 2 lt scosc0cad ev ebace oe ends oe eae nee awn 10 24 10 5 2 Engaging and Disengaging the Magnet 04 10 25 10 5 3 Determining Magnet Engage Height for Labware Types 10 27 10 5 4 Clamping or Unclamping Labware on a Magnetic Bead ALP 10 30 10 5 5 Verifying the Sensor on the Magnetic Bead ALP Recognizes a Labware Type 0 0 c cece eens 10 31 10 6 Removing the Magnetic Bead ALP 0 0 eee 10 33 10 7 Oa ga a es A acd Biota ee od E hin Re Ae Wee E Ree EAA 10 33 10 8 Preventive Maintenance 0 eee eee 10 33 10 9 TWroublesnoonngs 652 44 sb04ae dade taovenbetaciesbowdetgeddeteswes 10 34 11 Microplate Shaking ALP MR OVINE ogre ed eo ba eka ad eens a ad Se aie op te ae oe eae ae es 11 1 11 2 Installing the Microplate Shaking ALP 00 eee 11 3 11 2 1 Mounting the Microplate Shaking ALP to the Deck 11 3 11 3 Framing Instructions vas dia ekd anes awcdae dea Rn ewe andar dads 11 5 11 4 Using the Microplate Shaking ALP ina Method 04
270. ker ALP Section 14 2 Framing Instructions Section 14 3 e Using the Orbital Shaker ALP in a Method Section 14 4 e Controlling the Orbital Shaker ALP Outside a Method Section 14 5 e Removing the Orbital Shaker ALP from the Deck Section 14 6 e Storage Section 14 7 e Preventive Maintenance Section 14 8 Troubleshooting Section 14 9 ALPs User s Manual 14 2 Orbital Shaker ALP CAUTION Clamp all labware positioned on the Orbital Shaker ALP even when using the ALP as a standard deck position such as a 1x1 or a swap space Thumbscrews Figure 14 1 Orbital Shaker ALP Beckman Coulter Inc Orbital Shaker ALP 14 3 14 2 Installing the Orbital Shaker ALP Installing the Orbital Shaker ALP includes choosing any standard position and mounting the ALP to the deck Note After a deck position has been chosen on which to physically mount the ALP configure the ALP in the Deck Editor refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 5 Preparing and Managing the Deck 14 2 1 Mounting an Orbital Shaker ALP to the Deck Note Orbital Shaker ALPs cannot be chained together or to any other ALP To mount the Orbital Shaker ALP to the deck 1 Turn off power to Biomek instrument before mounting any active ALP 2 Position the ALP so the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP slip into locating holes on the deck the CAN connections are ori
271. ker ALPs may be used ona deck at one time WARNING Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before attaching or removing the AccuFrame CAUTION Make sure there are no tips on the head CAUTION When creating a method with an Orbital Shaker and a stack of labware first move the labware to another ALP preferably a passive ALP and then move it to the Orbital Shaker The offsets allowed with stacking may cause the labware to be gripped off center however moving labware from a passive ALP ensures it is gripped properly CAUTION Only labware compliant with the Society for Biomolecular Screening SBS proposed microplate standards is recommended for use on the Orbital Shaker ALP Non compliant labware may not be securely grasped by the ALP or may cause physical damage to the ALP WARNING Do not shake tip boxes tip box lids or reservoirs on the Orbital Shaker ALP The clamps on the ALP cannot hold tip boxes tip box lids or reservoirs securely during a shaking procedure WARNING To ensure labware stays securely clamped on the Orbital Shaker ALP do not exceed the recommended maximum shaking speed WARNING Always observe appropriate cautionary procedures as defined by your safety officer when using flammable solvents or toxic pathological or radioactive materials Safety Information xvii WARNING The type and amount of fluid being shaken will impact the maximum shaking speed for all types of labware Conduct testing accordin
272. king the Sensor State Use Advanced Manual Control to check the sensor state Checking the sensor state allows method runs to proceed when the liquid level in the reservoir is sufficient To check the sensor state 1 Choose Instrument gt Manual Control Manual Control appears 2 Choose Advanced Controls A list of the installed pod and devices appears 3 Select the desired DrainableRefillableReservoir Advanced Manual Control for the selected ALP appears 4 In Command choose AssertSensor Sensor State appears Figure 4 12 Advanced Manual Control DrainableRefillableRese Command Asserts ensor ha Sensor State On z Figure 4 12 Advanced Manual Control for a Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP with AssertSensor selected 5 In Sensor State choose e On allows the method run to proceed when sufficient liquid is detected in the reservoir e Off allows the method run to proceed when liquid is not detected in the reservoir 6 Choose Go The sensor state is configured 7 Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control 8 Choose Exit to close Manual Control Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP 4 17 4 6 Removing the Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP From the Deck WARNING The Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP may be contaminated from method solutions Follow the appropriate decontamination and cleaning procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer WARNING SPILL HAZARD WARNING Use an approp
273. l ALP 17 3 17 1 1 Span 8 Disposal ALP without Slide WARNING When using the Span 8 Disposal ALP without Slide do not UN overfill the disposal bag Tips may spill over onto the deck possibly contaminating the deck with hazardous materials When the Span 8 Disposal ALP is used as a self contained waste receptacle the bagging extension is attached to the ALP base and a waste bag is mounted inside the Span 8 Disposal ALP Figure 17 1 The ALP can be used in a standard deck position in the outside columns of the deck and is particularly effective when lab space is at a premium Note The Span 8 Disposal ALP without Slide is used only for collecting shucked tips Bagging extension used for Span 8 Disposal ALP without Slide Span 8 Disposal ALP base Thumbscrew Figure 17 1 Span 8 Disposal ALP without Slide ALPs User s Manual 17 4 Span 8 Disposal ALP 17 1 2 Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide The Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide Figure 17 2 is positioned on the deck in the outside columns and extends off the edge of the deck The slide is directed through the gap between the deck and light curtain or side safety shield A trash receptacle is placed on the floor at the end of the slide to catch the waste The Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide allows the disposal of as many used tips as the trash receptacle is capable of holding CAUTIO
274. l Sensing LLS Plate The Biomek NX Span 8 High Density 4 x 3 ALP stand supports an LLS plate option Figure 9 2 which when installed improves liquid level sensing capabilities in labware positioned on the ALP An LLS plate can be installed in any or all labware positions on the Biomek NX Span 8 High Density 4 x 3 ALP Note Labware positioned on a Biomek NX Span 8 High Density 4 x 3 ALP with the LLS Plate option installed is gripper accessible and stackable LLS Plate Mounting Screw Holes Four mounting screws are S used to secure the LLS Plate to the NX S8 High Density 4 x 3 ALP There are two more screw holes tS on the opposite side Figure 9 2 LLS Plate Top View To install an LLS plate 1 Turn ALP upside down 2 Position the LLS plate upside down in the desired position on the ALP stand Figure 9 3 ALPs User s Manual 9 4 High Density 4 x 3 Passive ALP NX S8 only 3 Attach the LLS plate to the ALP with the four mounting screws provided by turning the screws clockwise until finger tight The LLS plate is now installed Figure 9 4 LLS Plate Mounting Screws Bottom of LLS Plate Top of NX S8 High CL Density 4 x 3 ALP Density 4 x 3 pe N W Figure 9 3 Installing an LLS Plate on an NX S8 High Density 4 x 3 ALP Bottom of NX S8 High Beckman Coulter Inc NX S8 High Density 4
275. ld This creates an opening next to L3 for a slide Note Do not attach both blanking plates Store the unused blanking plate in an environmentally controlled area Multichannel Disposal ALP 12 13 12 4 3 Multichannel Disposal ALPs with Slide in Both L2 and L3 When Multichannel Disposal ALPs with Slide are installed in both L2 and L3 1 Remove the four fasteners holding the solid blanking plate 2 Remove the solid blanking plate This creates an opening large enough for two slides 12 4 4 Disposal ALP in R2 When a Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide is installed in R2 on the Biomek FX deck Figure 12 9 orient and install the blanking plate with the cutout as follows 1 Remove the four fasteners holding the solid blanking plate 2 Remove the solid blanking plate 3 Rotate the blanking plate with the cutout 180 from the one shown in Figure 12 11 4 Attach the blanking plate with the cutout to the bottom shield This creates an opening next to R2 for the slide Note Do not attach both blanking plates Store the unused blanking plate in an environmentally controlled area Standoffs R4 Solid blanking plate R3S R2 Dy C Ka RA D B z ji T 7 RY N FA A N z Fastener locations Y N Bottom ae shield Blanking plate with cutout Figure 12 11 Right side bottom shield with solid
276. lected labware type Note Ifa magnet type is not selected the magnet cannot be engaged while the labware type is located on the Magnetic Bead ALP 5 In Height enter the distance in centimeters cm from the top of the ALP to which the top of the specified magnet raises to when engaged This Height is used to configure how close the magnet gets to the bottom of the labware type when engaged Note Refer to Section 10 5 3 Determining Magnet Engage Height for Labware Types for instructions on determining the appropriate engage height Note For a value greater than zero the top of the magnet raises above the top of the ALP For a value less than zero the top of the magnet is below the top of the ALP ALPs User s Manual 10 20 Magnetic Bead ALP 6 Select Clamp during pipetting or engaging magnet to clamp the labware during all pipetting operations or while the magnet is engaging Note Clamp during pipetting or engaging magnet is deselected by default 7 Select Move arms to maximum height when clamping to allow the clamps to move to their maximum height before clamping labware Note Move arms to maximum height when clamping is deselected by default If Move arms to maximum height when clamping is not selected the clamps go to a specified height determined by the height of the labware type before clamping CAUTION The Magnetic Bead ALP may be damaged if liquid is uN dispensed into an ALP that does not have labware po
277. lightly different bagging extension however when used with Biomek Software 3 2 a new bagging extension must be used This new bagging extension is included in an upgrade kit Beckman Coulter Part A20304 The Span 8 Disposal ALP purchased with Biomek Software 3 2 includes the new bagging extension CAUTION Older versions of the Span 8 Disposal ALP must be modified with the new bagging extension when upgrading to Biomek Software 3 2 Failure to modify the ALP could result in Span 8 Pod crashes gt FX When the Biomek FX instrument is configured with a Span 8 Pod and a Multichannel Pod the Span 8 Disposal ALP must be positioned on the Span 8 side of the deck in the outside column NX S8 The Half Position Disposal ALP is designed to dispose of tips used by the Biomek NX Span 8 instrument refer to Chapter 5 Half Position Disposal ALP NX S8 only ALPs User s Manual 17 2 Span 8 Disposal ALP The sections in this chapter include Beckman Coulter Inc Installing the Span 8 Disposal ALP without Slide Section 17 2 Installing the Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide Section 17 3 Installing Protective Shield Blanking Plate on the Biomek FX Section 17 4 Framing Instructions Section 17 5 Removing the Span 8 Disposal ALP without Slide Section 17 6 Removing a Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide Section 17 7 Storage Section 17 8 Preventive Maintenance Section 17 9 Span 8 Disposa
278. lined by the laboratory safety officer 13 9 Troubleshooting Do not attempt to repair a Multichannel Tip Wash ALP without first contacting a Beckman Coulter Service Engineer Table 13 1 Troubleshooting the Multichannel Tip Wash ALP IF THEN A Multichannel Tip Wash ALP is not Make sure that the hoses and cables functioning correctly are attached and routed to the Multichannel Tip Wash ALP properly The pod is not using the correct wash Make sure the desired liquid type is station selected for use during the wash process OR Make sure a specific wash station is selected when the wash process is configured Beckman Coulter Inc Orbital Shaker ALP 14 1 Overview The Orbital Shaker ALP Figure 14 1 is an active ALP that shakes labware using an orbital shaking motion Thumbscrews attach the ALP to the Biomek deck and a clamping mechanism anchors and positions labware for shaking and pipetting operations Microplates can be added to the Orbital Shaker ALP by a lab technician or the gripper Note When labware is manually placed on the Orbital Shaker ALP it should be placed in the back left corner of the device Note Labware positioned on the Orbital Shaker ALP is gripper accessible but not stackable Note The Orbital Shaker ALP supports pipetting to and from all labware except 1536 well microplates and PCR microplates The sections in this chapter include e Installing the Orbital Sha
279. ll labware positioned on the Orbital Shaker ALP even 1x1 or a swap space The Clamp and Unclamp commands found in the Device Action step configuration for the Orbital Shaker ALP are used to actuate the clamps at any time during a method No configuration is necessary beyond the selection of Clamp or Unclamp in the step configuration Note The microplate platform on the Orbital Shaker ALP must be in the home position before labware on the ALP can be accessed for a pipetting operation If access to a microplate is required the ALP actuates the clamps and homes the microplate platform if necessary prior to allowing access to the labware on the ALP Note Ifa light curtain violation occurs while the clamp on the Orbital Shaker ALP is in motion the motion is completed The state of the clamp on the ALP does not change when the light curtain is violated or during a pause in a method Note The Orbital Shaker ALP can also be controlled outside a method using Manual Control in Biomek Software refer to Section 14 5 6 Manually Clamping and Unclamping Labware Beckman Coulter Inc Orbital Shaker ALP 14 33 To configure the Orbital Shaker ALP to clamp or unclamp labware during a method run In Command select Clamp or Unclamp Figure 14 23 Biomek Software Method6 Development File Edit Project Instrument Execution Options Help D eet S Mlo o gt 0 oO Xe start Device OrbiaGhakeAlPO z ENA Instrument Set
280. llows other ALPs to be added To move labware to and from a Storage ALP a Storage ALP Move step must be used refer to Section 21 4 Configuring the Storage ALP Move Step Note When the Storage ALP installation is run the Storage ALP deck positions in the Deck Editor and Storage ALP Move step are available Storage ALPs are installed removed stored and preventively maintained like Standard Passive ALPs Use the following information from the Standard Passive ALPs chapter e Installing Standard Passive ALPs Section 19 2 Note Ensure the correct deck plate holes on the deck are used to allow the Storage ALP to be partially positioned off the left side e Removing Standard Passive ALPs from the Deck Section 19 4 e Storage Section 19 5 e Preventive Maintenance Section 19 6 The sections in this chapter include e Configuring Storage ALPs in the Deck Editor Section 21 2 Framing Storage ALPs Section 21 3 Configuring the Storage ALP Move Step Section 21 4 ALPs User s Manual 21 2 Storage ALPs FX only 21 2 Configuring Storage ALPs in the Deck Editor Before Storage ALPs can be used in a method Biomek Software must know the location of the ALPs on the deck The software representation of the instrument deck is configured in the Deck Editor Configuring the Deck Editor to use a Storage ALP includes Adding a Storage ALP to the Deck Section 21 2 1 Setting Storage ALP
281. lly used with small volumes and higher viscosity fluids 3 Choose Go The ALP runs the selected profile OR Choose Abort to immediately stop the action in process 4 Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control 5 Choose Exit to close Manual Control Beckman Coulter Inc Orbital Shaker ALP 14 43 14 5 4 Manually Controlling a Pulsing Shake WARNING The type and amount of fluid being shaken will impact the maximum shaking speed for all types of labware Conduct testing according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer to determine the safe maximum shaking speed for any type and amount of liquid To configure the Orbital Shaker ALP to shake labware using a pulsing motion Note The default values for Pulse do not correspond with the parameters displayed in Table 14 1 Refer to Table 14 1 Recommended Maximum Labware Shaking Speeds for recommended shaking speeds for tested labware and fluid combinations 1 In Command select Pulse Figure 14 31 Advanced Manual Control OrbitalShakerALPO Command Pulse speed 300 RPM 1 1800 Time to pulse fi seconds 0 5 5 Number of times to pulse fi 1 1000 Go Abort Close Figure 14 31 Using Advanced Manual Control for a pulsing shake motion on an Orbital Shaker ALP 2 Enter a Pulse Speed in RPM Note The minimum Pulse Speed allowed is 1 RPM and the maximum is 1800 RPM 3 In Time to Pulse enter the duration in seconds the Orbital
282. ly acceptable To frame the ALP using the AccuFrame manually position the AccuFrame against the locating surfaces in the back left corner of the ALP and refer to the specific user s manual for the instrument to complete the process ALPs User s Manual 15 8 Positive Position ALP 15 4 Using the Positive Position ALP in a Method A A A A Beckman Coulter Inc WARNING Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous materials WARNING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials WARNING Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer WARNING Pinch Point The clamps used to secure a microplate to the Positive Position ALP could cause personal injury Avoid interference with the clamps while a microplate is on the ALP To use the Positive Position ALP in a method it must be installed in Hardware Setup refer to Chapter 1 3 Installing and Configuring ALPs The Positive Position ALP unclamps automatically at the end of a method however a Device Action step can be used to actuate the clamps in the middle of a method or to verify the presence or absence of labware on the ALP If access to an unclamped microplate is required the Positive Position ALP clamps before a pod is allowed to access the microplate After acce
283. ly related injuries and property damage properly inspect all electrical equipment prior to use and immediately report any electrical deficiencies Contact a Beckman Coulter Service Representative for any servicing of equipment requiring the removal of covers or panels High Voltage This symbol indicates the potential of an electrical shock hazard existing from a high voltage source and that all safety instructions should be read and understood before proceeding with the installation maintenance and servicing of all modules Do not remove system covers To avoid electrical shock use supplied power cords only and connect to properly grounded three holed wall outlets Do not use multiplug power strips This symbol indicates that a potential hazard to personal safety exists from a laser source When this symbol is displayed in this manual pay special attention to the specific safety information associated with the symbol Laser Specifications Laser Type Class II Laser Diode Maximum Output ImW Wavelength 670 nm Safety Information vii Chemical and Biological Safety Normal operation of labortory equipment may involve the use of materials that are toxic flammable or otherwise biologically harmful When using such materials observe the following precautions e Handle infectious samples according to good laboratory procedures and methods to prevent the spread of disease e Observe all cautionary information printed on th
284. magnet from the ALP Note The magnet type configured in Hardware Setup must match the magnet type installed in the Magnetic Bead ALP When changing magnet types make sure appropriate changes are also made in Hardware Setup refer to Section 10 4 1 Installing and Configuring a Magnetic Bead ALP in Hardware Setup 10 3 Framing Instructions Special instructions are necessary to frame the Magnetic Bead ALP To frame the Magnetic Bead ALP 1 In Advanced Manual Control use the Disengage command to move the magnet to its home position refer to Section 10 5 1 Homing the Magnet 2 Frame the Magnetic Bead ALP according to the instructions in the user s manual for the Biomek instrument on which the ALP is installed ALPs User s Manual 10 8 Magnetic Bead ALP 10 4 Using the Magnetic Bead ALP in a Method WARNING Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous materials WARNING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by your safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials WARNING Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer WARNING Pinch Point The clamps used to secure a microplate to the Magnetic Bead ALP could cause personal injury Avoid interference with the clamps while a microplate is on the ALP A A A A Beckman Coulter Inc It is important that deck a
285. mly attached to the controller Place the controller back on the base Push the locking lever to the left to open the pump if necessary Route the tubing so that it runs right to left from the reservoir to the supply container Figure 4 3 From Reservoir Figure 4 3 Tubing routed correctly through pump head Push the locking lever to the right to lock the pump head closed Figure 4 3 If necessary adjust the tubing retainers by pushing them into the pump head body slightly and then down until firmly in contact with the tubing Note Refer to the pump manufacturer s instructions for more information Attach the free end of the tubing to the fitting on the container ALPs User s Manual 4 6 Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP 4 2 2 2 Connecting the CAN Communications Cables and Sensor Leads The Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP uses a CAN communications connection to communicate with and draw power from the Biomek instrument The sensor leads from the reservoir connect to the transmitter and receiver ports on the sensor amplifier WARNING Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before connecting CAN communication cables 1 Turn off power to the Biomek instrument CAUTION A maximum of one long CAN cable can be used in each chain of ALPs If more than one long CAN cable is used in a chain CAN communication errors may occur gt gt 2 Plug one end of the CAN communications cable into either of t
286. more information on the Deck Editor refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 5 Preparing and Managing the Deck 6 4 1 Adding an HDR Pin Drying ALP to the Deck An HDR Pin Drying ALP is added to the deck in the appropriate locations using the Deck Editor and an Instrument Setup step The fan must be associated with an open centered deck position such as on a 1 x 1 Passive ALP to provide an air flow to dry the pins Then in the first Instrument Setup step in a method the fan labware must be added to the deck in the appropriate deck position for obstacle avoidance The fan is activated by turning on the fan using a Device Action step in the method refer to Section 6 6 2 2 Configuring the Device Action Step for the HDR Pin Drying ALP or Advanced Manual Control outside of a method refer to Section 6 7 Controlling the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir Outside a Method 6 4 1 1 Associating a Fan with a Deck Position To associate a fan with a deck position for an HDR Pin Drying ALP 1 Choose Instrument gt Deck Editor The Deck Editor appears 2 If necessary drag and drop the OneByOne or FourByThree ALP from the ALP Types list to the desired location The ALP appears and deck positions are named automatically 3 Select the desired deck position on which to place the HDR Pin Drying ALP Note The selected deck position must have an open center ALPs User s Manual 6 18 HDR Pin Drying ALP and R
287. n Labware Properties for the wash station appears Figure 13 4 Labware Properties Liquid Type Eu OK Cancel Figure 13 4 Labware Properties for a Wash Station ALP 3 In Liquid Type select the unique liquid type created for that wash station for example WS1_ Liquid 4 Choose OK to save the change and close Labware Properties 5 For each additional wash station repeat steps 2 through 4 selecting the appropriate liquid type for each wash station Note Each wash station must use a unique liquid type 6 In any steps where tips are washed such as Transfer or Combine select a specific wash station by selecting the appropriate liquid type in Wash tips in Beckman Coulter Inc Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs 13 9 13 4 Framing Instructions Special framing instructions are necessary for Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs which are framed using the AccuFrame and a Framing Tool Adaptor The Framing Tool Adaptor for the 96 Channel Tip Wash ALP is red and the Framing Tool Adaptor for the 384 Channel Tip Wash ALP is blue Make sure the correct Framing Tool Adaptor is used for each type of Multichannel Tip Wash ALP If a more precise location of the tips when they are submerged into the cleaning wells during a wash is desired offsets for framing both ALPs may be entered refer to Section 13 5 Entering Offsets for the Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs To frame the Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs 1 Place the Framing Tool Ada
288. n 14 4 3 6 Clamping and Unclamping Labware on the Orbital Shaker ALP Note The configuration for the Orbital Shaker ALP changes based on the selection made in Command Note Ifa light curtain violation occurs while the Orbital Shaker ALP is operating the shaking operation is completed Beckman Coulter Inc Orbital Shaker ALP 14 23 14 4 3 1 Configuring the ALP to Run a Standard Shaking Procedure Shaking operations on the Orbital Shaker ALP can be configured to run continuously in a specified direction The number of RPM applied during the shaking operation and the amount of time the device uses to ramp up to the specified shaking speed are configured when using the Shake command Note The default configuration for the Orbital Shaker ALP is to shake labware CounterClockwise with a 1 one second ramp up to 300 revolutions per minute RPM To configure the Orbital Shaker ALP to shake labware using new parameters 1 In Command select Shake Figure 14 18 Biomek Software Method6 Development lol x File Edit Project Instrument Execution Options Help Dee BRS ne Ko Device OrbitalShakerALPO oo gt x en Instrument Setup Command Shake x Setup orvon Q rit Load tips from TL1 Shaking speed 300 RPM 0 1800 pe eke oe 4 Device Action Time to reach full speed 1 seconds 0 5 600 fe e ig Finish Direction CounterClockwise x Device Action f
289. n 8 Disposal ALP with Slide CAUTION Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any UN spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer To remove the Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide 1 Verify that no labware remains on the slide If labware remains on the slide remove the labware as specified by the laboratory safety officer 2 Remove the trash receptacle and dispose of the contents as specified by the laboratory safety officer 3 Remove the grounding screw from the bagging extension Figure 17 9 4 Grasp the bagging extension firmly with one hand and the base firmly with the other 5 Pull the bagging extension forcefully from the ALP base to separate the extension from the base Insert the grounding screw back into the threaded hole on the disposal base Remove the grounding screw from the slide Lift the slide from the base O N A Insert the grounding screw back into the threaded hole on the disposal base 10 Loosen the Span 8 Disposal ALP thumbscrews on the base of the Span 8 Disposal ALP Figure 17 7 11 Lift the Span 8 Disposal ALP from the deck so that the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP base clear the locating holes on the deck 12 To detach the chute remove the four screws attaching the chute to the disposal base and remove the chute 13 Insert the four screws back into the threaded holes in the disposal base 17 8 Storage
290. n 8 Tip Wash ALP of fluids by turning the ALP over and pouring the waste into an approved waste container gt ALPs User s Manual 18 12 Span 8 Tip Wash ALP 18 5 Storage Return the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP to the original packing materials and store in a dry dust free environmentally controlled area Note Allow the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP to air dry before returning it to the original packing materials 18 6 Preventive Maintenance Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer Also periodically clean the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP by filling the supply container with a bleach solution and running it through the ALP 18 7 Troubleshooting Do not attempt to repair the unit without first contacting a Beckman Coulter Service Engineer Table 18 1 Troubleshooting the Tip Wash ALP IF THEN The Span 8 Tip Wash ALP is not Make sure that the hoses and cables functioning correctly are properly attached and routed to the Tip Wash ALP The Span 8 Tip Wash ALP is not Look into the wells and reservoir and draining waste fluid verify they are not clogged Beckman Coulter Inc Standard Passive ALPs 19 1 Overview Standard Passive ALPs are open structures that hold labware on the deck during liquid handling procedures These ALPs can be mounted on any deck position and ensure that labware is accessible by the pod at a predetermined height Standard Passive ALPs are also use
291. n Disposal ALP 2 0 0 cece eee nes 5 2 Figure 5 2 Half Position Disposal ALP rubber band placement 0 5 4 Figure 5 3 Half Position Disposal ALP with correct bag placement 5 5 Figure 5 4 Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide 2 0 2 kee eee 5 7 Figure 5 5 Removing bottom panels 4 iascc os sade ided esau dere des cea ve dae shawses 5 10 Figure 5 6 Adding the slide to the Half Position Disposal ALP 4 5 11 Figure 5 7 Adding the chute to Half Position Disposal ALP 0 0 0 00 5 12 Figure 6 1 HDR Pin Drying ALP 2 oncwed ox oho Khaw vad week Ca eee eRe ae es oes 6 2 Figure 6 2 Circulating reservoir 0 0 cece cent e nen n en eees 6 5 Figure 6 3 HDR Pin Drying ALP and collar 0 0 cece eee 6 7 Figure 6 4 Quick disconnect fittings on the HDR circulating reservoir 6 10 Figure 6 5 Tubing connections between circulating reservoir and pump 6 11 Figure 6 6 New Devices displaying all detected devices 0 00 eee eee 6 14 Figure 6 7 Hardware Setup showing the configuration for a digital device 6 15 Figure 6 8 Position Properties for deck positions 0 0 cece ee eee eee ene 6 18 Figure 6 9 Expanded Position Properties for deck positions 0 0e eee eee 6 19 Figure 6 10 Instrument Setup step configuration saasa cece cece eee ee 6 20 Figure 6 11 Position Properties
292. n Instrument 13 8 ISA Framing Instructions iawis aac chosi deni acnsamadas daknnn dada Rhee Kes 13 9 13 5 Entering Offsets for the Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs 13 11 13 6 Removing the Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs 0000 e eee 13 13 13 7 Stota TE oei pueia peed beet a a ewes Gaede ee eee T E ER 13 13 13 8 Preventive Maintenance 24 4 0 ievn0 a cde eet hY eee ide RSS 13 14 13 9 Troubleshooting 244045 48484044402 ees de atGeevondticnetae crews ties 13 14 14 Orbital Shaker ALP TA SU CI IEW 6g ee ho gh ORY ae a Ea ORE ES Ka RARE REE ER RAE ORE EE 14 1 14 2 Installing the Orbital Shaker ALP 2 eee 14 3 14 2 1 Mounting an Orbital Shaker ALP to the Deck 14 3 Beckman Coulter Inc Table of Contents xxvii 14 3 Framing Instructions aoan 0 0 0 n ees 14 5 14 3 1 Installing the Framing Fixture Homing the Axes and Installing the AccuFrame Tool 2 0 0 eee eee eee 14 5 14 3 2 Homing the Microplate Platform and Actuating the Clamps 14 8 14 3 3 Framing the Deck Position with the Deck Editor 14 10 14 3 4 Removing the AccuFrame from the ALP and the Framing Fixture from the Biomek Instrument Pod 00 0 e eee eee ee 14 13 14 4 Using the Orbital Shaker ALP ina Method 00 0 000005 14 14 14 4 1 Establishing a Safe Maximum Shaking Speed 14 14 14 4 2 Configuring a New Labware Type fo
293. n Properties Name wsi ALP Type WashStation96 x cm Y cm Z cm Precision Pod1i Coordinates 25 915 f 2 016 fai 968 Not Framed Advanced MC Teach gz Less Manual Teach Auto Teach Device none x Device Index z Device Control Sensor Device ZARA e x cm Y cm Z cm Labware Offset j j j Per labware Offsets Position Span 14 605 fi 1 43 Min Safe Height fi Cancel Figure B 7 SourceWasteSensor selected in Sensor Device 4 Choose OK The sensor is associated with that wash ALP and monitors the liquid levels of the supply or waste containers of the ALP B 3 3 Error Messages for the Source Waste Sensor If the Source Waste Sensor is properly installed associated and configured in a method when the source container is running low or the waste container is running high an error message similar to the following appears Figure B 8 x The source bottle is nearly empty Figure B 8 Source Waste Sensor error Beckman Coulter Inc Source Waste Sensor B 9 B 4 Controlling the Source Waste Sensor Outside a Method To control a selected Source Waste Sensor outside a method use Advanced Manual Control to e Check the Source Sensor e Check the Waste Sensor To manually control the Source Waste Sensors 1 Choose Instrument gt Manual Control Manual Control appears 2 Choose Advanced Controls 3 Select the desired Source Waste Sensor Advanced Manual Control for the selected Source Waste
294. n be attached to either fitting since the fluid circulation in the Heating and Cooling ALP is not directionally specific Note Make sure the hose routing does not interfere with the operation of the Biomek instrument 5 Follow the manufacturer s instructions for hooking up the circulating bath refer to Section 7 2 2 Circulator Bath Specifications ALPs User s Manual 7 4 Heating and Cooling ALP 6 Apply power to the circulating bath lt __Top of Heating and Cooling ALP X Bottom of Heating and Cooling ALP Figure 7 2 Heating amp Cooling Unit O Bottom of 1 x 1 ALP A Locating pins Thumbscrew Thumbscrew Top of 1 x 1 Standard Passive ALP Re TV Figure 7 3 Heating and Cooling Unit mounting bottom view Beckman Coulter Inc Heating and Cooling ALP 7 5 7 2 2 Circulator Bath Specifications The user supplied circulator bath which heats or cools water to a specified temperature to heat or cool the heating amp cooling unit on top of the Heating and Cooling ALP requires minimum specifications see Table 7 1 While the obtainable temperature range is dependent on the particular bath used the nominal temperature range for the Biomek heating amp cooling unit is 4 C to 25 C Table 7 1 Minimum specifications for a Circulator Bath Tem
295. nce Wash plastic periodically 16 8 Troubleshooting Do not attempt to repair the SPE ALP without first contacting a Beckman Coulter Service Engineer Table 16 1 Troubleshooting the SPE Vacuum Manifold ALP IF THEN The SPE ALP is not applying Verify the vacuum unit has been set appropriate vacuum to the microplate up and attached to the ALP as directed by the manufacturer The SPE ALP is not functioning Contact a Beckman Coulter service correctly Engineer Note Do not remove the cover s for any reason Gaskets become worn Replace gaskets using the Gasket Replacement Kit 719404 Follow instructions in the kit Beckman Coulter Inc 17 1 Overview A 17 1 Span 8 Disposal ALP The Span 8 Disposal ALP is a passive ALP that provides a means to dispose of tips during a method This ALP is designed to dispose of tips used by the Span 8 Pod in one of two ways Span 8 Disposal ALP without Slide The disposed tips are placed into a waste receptacle positioned inside the Span 8 Disposal ALP base used for tip disposal only OR Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide A slide that extends beyond the edge of the Biomek deck is inserted into the Disposal ALP Tips placed inside the ALP slide down into a receptacle placed below Note The Span 8 Disposal ALP is shipped so that either of the two options above can be assembled and used Earlier versions of the Span 8 Disposal ALP included a s
296. nd Section 16 5 ALPs User s Manual 16 2 Solid Phase Extraction SPE Vacuum Manifold ALP e Storage Section 16 6 e Preventive Maintenance Section 16 7 e Troubleshooting Section 16 8 When framing the SPE ALP the AccuFrame rests inside the SPE ALP Base as indicated Figure 16 1 SPE ALP with Collar Note The interior of the SPE ALP Base is used for framing refer to Section 16 3 Framing Instructions The SPE Collar must be removed to frame the SPE ALP Beckman Coulter Inc d Phase Extraction SPE Vacuum Manifold ALP 16 3 16 1 1 Components of the SPE ALP The components of the SPE ALP are stacked on two ALP stands which are used simultaneously during a method run The components of the SPE ALP are e SPE ALP Base connects to the vacuum used during filtration operations all filtered fluids are drained through the SPE ALP Base SPE ALP Collar supports the source microplate and encloses the receiver filter microplate during filtration operations referred to as the Manifold in the Biomek Software Note There are multiple SPE Collars available for use on the SPE ALP The specific collar used during a method run is specified by the wizard e Filter Microplate the labware through which fluids are separated from solids in the SPE ALP referred to as the Filter Source and Receiver Source in the Biomek Software e Filter Holder a plastic de
297. nd labware settings are configured appropriately in the Deck Editor refer to Section 10 4 2 Configuring a Magnetic Bead ALP in the Deck Editor and Labware Type Editor refer to Section 10 4 3 Configuring LabwareTypes for Use on the Magnetic Bead ALP prior to using the Magnetic Bead ALP in a method for obstacle avoidance and accurate pipetting Using the Magnetic Bead ALP in a method includes e Installing and Configuring a Magnetic Bead ALP in Hardware Setup Section 10 4 1 Configuring a Magnetic Bead ALP in the Deck Editor Section 10 4 2 e Configuring LabwareTypes for Use on the Magnetic Bead ALP Section 10 4 3 e Configuring the Device Action Step for a Magnetic Bead ALP Section 10 4 5 10 4 1 Installing and Configuring a Magnetic Bead ALP in Hardware Setup After physically installing the Magnetic Bead ALP on the deck the ALP is detected on the Biomek instrument and must be properly installed and configured in Hardware Setup Follow the instructions in Chapter 1 3 1 Jnstalling an ALP in Hardware Setup to install the Magnetic Bead ALP Follow the instructions in 10 4 1 1 Configuring a Magnetic Bead ALP in Hardware Setup Magnetic Bead ALP 10 9 10 4 1 1 Configuring a Magnetic Bead ALP in Hardware Setup The software needs to know the magnet type installed in the Magnetic Bead ALP to utilize the ALP in a method To configure the Magnetic Bead ALP 1 Select the MagBeadALP from th
298. nd secure Calibrate the sensor refer to Section B 2 1 Calibrating the Sensor No errors are generated even though waste container is full or source container is empty Associate the sensor with the appropriate deck position Index Numerics 8 Channel Active Wash ALP configuring multiple wash ALPs in the software 2 20 defined 2 1 framing 2 10 Manual Teach framing Z axis 2 18 using delta values 2 16 using graphic alignment tool 2 15 mounting 2 3 routing tubing 2 4 preventive maintenance 2 22 removing 2 21 storage 2 22 troubleshooting 2 22 using in a method 2 20 A active ALPs defined 1 2 address switches setting A 6 ALPs installing and configuring 1 3 installing in Hardware Setup 1 4 overview 1 2 B Bar Code Reader ALP aligning laser beam 3 4 applying labels to labware 3 5 deck positions 3 3 defined 3 1 framing 3 5 installing 3 3 mounting to the deck 3 3 removing 3 12 storage 3 12 supported bar codes 3 1 troubleshooting 3 12 using in a method 3 6 Bimoek NX Span 8 High Density 4x3 ALP storage 9 7 Biomek NX Span 8 High Density 4x3 ALP adding an LLS Plate 9 3 defined 9 1 framing 9 7 mounting 9 5 preventive maintenance 9 7 removing 9 7 Cc circulator bath specifications for the Heating and Cooling ALP 7 5 D Device Controller connecting devices to A 7 contact switch A 8 digital device inputs A 8 digital device outputs A 7 high voltage A 7 optical switch A 8 ALPs User
299. nd where to place the ALP on the Biomek NX deck The Half Position Disposal ALP is referred to as HalfTipTrashLeft or HalfTipTrashRight in the Deck Editor The following conditions should be noted before choosing a deck position e Ifthe ALP is placed in the first or second row from the front the gripper cannot grip labware on or off an adjacent ALP from the front or behind e Ifthe ALP is placed in the third row from the front the gripper can grip from behind the ALP but not from the front e Ifthe ALP is placed in the back row it can grip only from the front To mount a Half Position Disposal ALP to the deck 1 Choose a deck position in the outside column of the deck then slip the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP into the locating holes of the desired deck position 2 Fasten the ALP to the deck using the thumbscrews on the bottom of the ALP recommended for hazardous applications The waste bags shipped with the Half Position Disposal ALP are not biohazard bags Contact the laboratory safety officer for appropriate biohazard bags and procedures f WARNING Appropriately marked autoclavable biohazard bags are 3 Fold the top of a waste bag over the frame so that the bottom of the bag reaches the bottom of the ALP base 4 Smooth out the bag to allow items to drop directly to the bottom of the bag 5 To hold the bag in place stretch the rubber band over the top of ALP and use the notches to position it in the loca
300. nder the SILAS AN category in the Step Palette Builder The Bar Code Reader Step from the Integrated Devices step palette must be used to ensure the Bar Code Reader operates properly 2 Insert a Bar Code Reader step into the Method View Figure 3 5 Biomek Software Transfers Development File Edit Project Instrument Execution Options Help PEACE CEILE Start Using the Bar Code Reader at position eR1 al Read bar code for decision making 7 i IV Flag error and stop when bar code not read aS gt Move Labware from Use src for method validation ee Hil Read Bar Code ca4Aa2 Labware Ca4AaZ Bar Code Reader 2 Instrument DTX Run Instrument Setup Set Protocol Move Labware frorn Finish Transfers BiomekFx BiomekFx new ETC 0 00 11 Figure 3 5 Bar Code Reader step inserted in the Method View 3 In Using the Bar Code Reader at position select the bar code reader to scan bar codes ALPs User s Manual 3 8 Bar Code Reader ALP Beckman Coulter Inc 4 Select the desired bar code reading option Initialize establishes communication between Biomek Software and the ALP only no bar code is read To read bar codes insert another Bar Code Reader step into the method and configure it with the desired bar code reading option Note By default Biomek Software is configured to establish communication with the ALP automati
301. nfiguring the deck setup in the Deck Editor Disposal ALPs vary in height and failure to choose each Disposal ALP correctly in the software may result in collisions between pod s and Disposal ALPs during operation The Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide can be positioned in the outside columns and extends off the edge of the Biomek deck Note When adding a Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide to the Biomek deck the ALP must be associated with a deck position in the Deck Editor To associate the Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide with a deck position in the Deck Editor drag and drop Span8TrashLeft or Span8TrashRight to the appropriate position in the deck view For more information about associating an ALP with a deck position refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 5 Preparing and Managing the Deck Span 8 Disposal ALP 17 11 17 3 2 Mounting a Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide To mount a Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide 1 Position the disposal chute by lining up the holes in the disposal chute with the threaded holes in the Span 8 Disposal ALP base Figure 17 7 2 Attach the disposal chute to the Span 8 Disposal ALP base using the four screws supplied Figure 17 7 3 Place the Span 8 Disposal ALP in an outside column of the deck This allows the slide to extend downward beyond the left or right side of the deck 4 Slip the locating pins on the bottom of the Span 8 Disposal ALP into the locating holes on the deck 5 Fasten the
302. ng a shaking procedure gt gt The Orbital Shaker ALP supports most labware used on the Biomek instrument although not all labware should be shaken at the same speed The maximum shaking speed appropriate for each type of labware is of particular concern since fluid in labware may splash or spill at different shaking speeds due to labware parameters and fluid viscosity 14 4 1 1 Recommended Maximum Shaking Speeds WARNING To ensure labware stays securely clamped on the Orbital uN Shaker ALP do not exceed the recommended maximum shaking speed Recommended maximum shaking speeds were determined for a variety of labware from each class of labware supported by the Biomek instrument A variety of fluids and shaking parameters were used to establish a recommended maximum shaking speed Testing on each piece of labware was conducted by filling the labware with the specified liquid to a percentage of the labware s maximum well capacity and executing a shaking operation The maximum shaking speeds presented in Table 14 1 show the results of testing Note Table 14 1 should be used only as general reference material Conduct testing according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer to determine the safe maximum shaking speed for all labware liquid and shaking sequence combinations Beckman Coulter Inc maximum shaking speed for all types of labware Conduct testing according to the procedures outlined by the l
303. ngaged or disengaged while the labware type is located on the Magnetic Bead ALP 18 In Height enter the Magnet Position recorded in step 9 This is the distance in centimeters cm between the top of the ALP and the top of the magnet when the magnet is fully engaged Note Ifthe desired engage position of the magnet is above the top of the ALP enter the value as a positive number if the desired engage position of the magnet is below the top of the ALP enter the value as a negative number 19 Choose Save Note Refer to Section 10 4 3 Configuring LabwareTypes for Use on the Magnetic Bead ALP for more labware configuration options ALPs User s Manual 10 30 Magnetic Bead ALP 10 5 4 Clamping or Unclamping Labware ona Magnetic Bead ALP To clamp labware on a Magnetic Bead ALP 1 Choose Instrument gt Manual Control Manual Control appears 2 Choose Advanced Controls A list of all the installed pods and devices s appears Advanced Controls 3 Select the desired Magnetic Bead ALP Advanced Manual Control for the selected Magnetic Bead ALP appears 4 From Command choose Manual Clamp Figure 10 21 Advanced Manual Control MagBeadALPO Command Manual Clamp Labware ab 384WellReactionPlate Figure 10 21 Advanced Manual Control for a Magnetic Bead ALP with Manual Clamp selected 5 In Labware specify the labware type to clamp on the Magnetic Bead ALP the labware type specified The clamps raise
304. nment tool Figure 2 14 is used to instruct Biomek Software of the current position of the tips in relation to the framing target on top of the ALP Biomek Software uses the information it is given to move the pod so the tips are directly above the target position I Biomek Nx Manual Framing Wizard 5 xj The tips should be about a half centimeter above the plate Drag the circle to where the tips are in relation to the Well Center and press Go Press Next gt when the tips are directly above their target Delta 0 05 H em R Back Left Bight T h XY a eac z ma ea Down IV Hysteresis compensation Total Moved From Start cm TeachZ 0 0 0 f WellComer Well Center Go Graphic alignment tool The graphic alignment tool is a visual representation of the tip small circle and the framing target on the top of the ALP The small circle is moved until it represents the tip s current physical location in relation to the framing target on the top of the ALP Figure 2 14 Manual Teaching the X and Y axes To use the graphic alignment tool 1 Drag the small circle until it represents the tip s physical position in relation to the framing target on top of the ALP represented by the intersection of the two lines in the graphical display Note The small circle represents the tip on the pod The objective is to provide the software with a representation of
305. ns to frame the NX S8 High Density 4 x 3 ALP refer to the Biomek NX Span 8 Laboratory Automation Workstation User Manual Chapter 4 Framing Instructions Preventive Maintenance WARNING The NX S8 High Density 4 x 3 ALP may be contaminated uN from method solutions Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer To clean wipe all surfaces on the NX S8 High Density 4 x 3 ALP with a soft cloth ALPs User s Manual 10 1 Magnetic Bead ALP Overview The Magnetic Bead ALP Figure 10 1 is an active ALP that positions magnetic beads in microplates for pipetting operations A magnet is engaged moved closer to the microplate and disengaged moved away from the microplate to position and release magnetic beads for re suspension in a microplate A clamping mechanism is provided to flatten microplates such as thermocycler plates for pipetting Microplates can be placed on the Magnetic Bead ALP by a lab technician or the Biomek gripper Note The Magnetic Bead ALP has one open centered position When using miniskirted labware or other labware in which the bottom of the wells is below the top surface of the ALP per labware offsets must be defined for the head s to access the bottom of these labware types refer to Section 10 4 2 3 Defining Per Labware Offsets The sections in this chapter include Installing the Magnetic Bead ALP Section 10 2 e Framing Instr
306. nsion onto the Span 8 Disposal ALP base by lining up the springs on the bagging extension with the cutouts on the Disposal ALP base Figure 17 3 ALPs User s Manual 17 6 Span 8 Disposal ALP 3 Apply downward force to the top of the bagging extension The springs slip through to the inside of the Span 8 Disposal ALP base and lock into the cutouts Figure 17 3 Bagging extension Adding bagging extension to Span 8 Grounding tab and screw The screw is inserted through the tab and into the base at this location Disposal ALP base Apply downward force to snap the two springs into the cutouts and to align the grounding tab so that the grounding screw can be inserted Springs 2 lt ____ Second spring is on the opposite side of the bagging extension Cutout for springs The springs must snap through to the inside surface of the base ALP base Span 8 Disposal 4 Beckman Coulter Inc Figure 17 3 Span 8 Disposal ALP without Slide exploded Insert a screw through the hole in the grounding tab on the bagging extension and into the threaded hole in the Span 8 Disposal ALP base Figure 17 4 Note This screw is necessary for proper ESD grounding of the ALP Choose a deck position in the outside column of the deck then slip the locating pins on the bottom of the Span 8 Disposal
307. ntally controlled area Note Allow the 8 Channel Active Wash ALP to air dry before returning it to the original packing materials Store the peristaltic pump and source and waste tubing according to the instructions from the manufacturer 2 7 Preventive Maintenance Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer Observe the following guidelines e Periodically clean the 8 Channel Active Wash ALP by filling the supply container with a bleach solution and running it through the ALP e Check with tubing manufacturer for chemical compatibility information e Periodically inspect the tubing for wear and stress fractures e Periodically inspect the tubing connections for leakage e Replace tubing periodically or as needed Note Refer to the pump and tubing manufacturer user manuals for their recommended maintenance procedures and intervals 2 8 Troubleshooting Do not attempt to repair the unit without first contacting a Beckman Coulter Service Engineer Table 2 1 Troubleshooting the 8 Channel Active Wash ALP IF THEN The 8 Channel Active Wash ALP is Make sure that the hoses and cables not functioning correctly are attached to the ALP properly The 8 Channel Active Wash ALP is Look into the wells and reservoir and not draining waste fluid verify they are not clogged Beckman Coulter Inc 3 1 Overview WARNING CLASS II LASER PRODUCT THIS PRODUCT CONFORMS TO
308. nted on the deck The positions capable of supporting the ALP are indicated by dashed lines Note In the Deck Editor the 96 Channel Tip Wash ALP is referred to as WashStation96 and the 384 Channel Tip Wash ALP is referred to as WashStation384 Note After a deck position has been chosen on which to physically mount the ALP configure the ALP in the Deck Editor refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 5 Preparing and Managing the Deck 13 2 2 Mounting Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs to the Deck Before mounting the Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs to the deck ensure the requirements for tubing are met refer to Section 13 2 2 1 Tubing 13 2 2 1 Tubing The supply tubing for the Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs is 1 4 inside diameter while the drain tubing is 3 8 inside diameter When the tubing is connected the drain tubing must run through the peristaltic pump in the opposite direction to the supply tubing and into the waste reservoir Note Make sure the tube routing does not interfere with the operation of the Biomek instrument ALPs User s Manual 13 6 Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs To mount Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs to the deck 1 Ensure the requirements for tubing are met refer to Section 13 2 2 1 Tubing 2 Attach the tip wash reservoir to the tip wash stand using the supplied thumbscrews to create the Multichannel Tip Wash ALP Figure 13 3 Multichannel Tip Wash ALP
309. ntrol to load tips for a method is not recommended due to inadequate and unequal pressure application Locking rods are the rods that extend from the Tip Loader ALP Figure 23 4 and lock onto the pod to assist in tip loading Advanced Manual Control controls the locking rods for a selected Tip Loader ALP in the following manner e Extend or retract the locking rods e Lock or unlock the locking rods To control the locking rods on Tip Loader ALP outside a method use Advanced Manual Control to Troubleshoot the Tip Loader ALP e Recover from a failed tip load Locking rods A a a Figure 23 4 Tip Loader ALP with locking rods extended ALPs User s Manual 23 8 Tip Loader ALP To manually control the locking rods 1 Choose Instrument gt Manual Control Manual Control appears 2 Choose Advanced Controls 3 Select the desired Tiploader Advanced Manual Control for the selected ALP appears Figure 23 5 Advanced Manual Control Tiploaderl Rods Up Rods Down Lock Rods Figure 23 5 Advanced Manual Control for a selected Tip Loader ALP 4 To move the locking rods up choose Rods Up OR To move the locking rods down choose Rods Down OR To move the rods to their locked position choose Lock Rods OR To move the rods to their unlocked position choose Unlock Rods 5 Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control 6 Choose Exit to close Manual Cont
310. ntrols how many seconds and in which direction labware is shaken The maximum shaking speed and the amount of time used to reach that speed are also configured in the Timed Shake command Note The default configuration for a timed shaking sequence is to shake labware for 10 seconds in a CounterClockwise direction with a 1 second ramp up to 300 RPM To configure the Orbital Shaker ALP to shake labware a specific length of time 1 In Command select Timed Shake Figure 14 19 Biomek Software Method6 Development i File Edit Project Instrument Execution Options Help Desmeon oea B Start Device OrbitalShakerALPO 7 Tntumant Instrument Setup Command LUEC ELELG RE Setup eegeee a ii Load tips from TL1 Shaking speed 300 RPM 0 1800 D Device Action Time to reach full speed 1 seconds 0 5 600 g Finish Time to shake 10 seconds 1 100000 Direction CounterClockwise z Mi Tip Loader Comment Method6 BiomekFX BiomekFX ETC 0 00 22 Figure 14 19 Device Action step configured for a timed shaking motion on an Orbital Shaker ALP 2 In Shaking speed indicate the desired shaking speed in RPM Note The minimum Shaking speed allowed is 0 RPM while the maximum is 1800 RPM Refer to Section 14 4 1 Establishing a Safe Maximum Shaking Speed for more information ALPs User s Manual 14 26 Orbital Shaker ALP 3 In Time to reach full speed enter the duration in se
311. ny of the Automated Labware Positioners ALPs ALPs User s Manual viii Safety Information Cleaning Maintenance o Important SK Beckman Coulter Inc Observe the cleaning procedures outlined in this user s manual for each specific Automated Labware Positioner ALP Prior to cleaning equipment that has been exposed to hazardous material e Appropriate Chemical and Biological Safety personnel should be contacted e The Chemical and Biological Safety information contained in this user s manual should be reviewed Perform only the maintenance described in this manual Maintenance other than that specified in this manual should be performed only by Beckman Coulter Service Representatives It is your responsibility to decontaminate Automated Labware Positioners ALPs before requesting service by a Beckman Coulter Service Representative or returning parts to Beckman Coulter for repair Beckman Coulter will NOT accept any items which have not been decontaminated where it is appropriate to do so If any parts are returned they must be enclosed in a sealed plastic bag stating that the contents are safe to handle and are not contaminated Safety Information ix Warnings and Cautions Found in this Manual gt gt Pr PPP PRPRPRPBEE Please read and observe all cautions and instructions Remember the most important key to safety is to operate these Automated Labware Positioners ALPs with care The WARNINGs and
312. o Dipping Configuration Click here to add a cleaning operation Comment D nell fae fae ele we C ed uel ei ie afefe v ES LY Uv farg O Method1 BiomekF BiomekFX ETC 0 03 45 Figure 6 16 HDR Tool Cleaning step new cleaning operation configuration ALPs User s Manual 6 30 HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 2 Click on the piece of labware with the desired wash solution in the Current Deck Display Information for that piece of labware is entered automatically into the Cleaning Operation configuration Figure 6 15 OR Select a Cleaning Labware type Figure 6 15 Note Subsequent labware selections modify the active Cleaning Operation configuration To configure additional Cleaning Operations select Click here to add a cleaning drying operation or select outside a cleaning operation configuration and then select another piece of labware from the Current Deck Display If an incorrect piece of labware is selected right click on the labware title and select Delete on the menu that appears Biomek Software Method1 New 3 lol x Fie Edit Project Instrument Execution Options Help PEALE ELLUG wollen od Start Use pod Pod1 for transfer HOR Instrument Instrument Setup Cleaning Bleach Combine Sete RE seconds before a Q HDR T
313. o pulse 1 1 1000 Method6 BiomekFX BiomekFx ETC 0 00 22 Figure 14 21 Device Action step configured for a pulsing shake motion on an Orbital Shaker ALP ALPs User s Manual 14 30 Orbital Shaker ALP Beckman Coulter Inc 2 Enter a Pulse Speed in RPM Note The minimum Pulse Speed allowed is 1 RPM and the maximum is 1800 RPM 3 In Time to Pulse enter the duration in seconds the Orbital Shaker ALP shakes in each direction Note The minimum value allowed in Time to Pulse is 0 5 second while the maximum value allowed in Time to Pulse is 5 seconds 4 Enter the Number of times to Pulse within the time frame specified in Time to Pulse Note The minimum value allowed in Number of times to Pulse is 1 and the maximum is1000 Note A pulsing shake sequence is an effective technique for removing bubbles from solutions Some experimentation may be necessary when designing a pulsing shake sequence effective at removing bubbles from a specific solution Orbital Shaker ALP 14 31 14 4 3 5 Stopping a Shaking Procedure Already in Process Stopping a shaking procedure already in process is accomplished using the Stop command The number of seconds the Orbital Shaker ALP has to stop the shaking procedure is specified in the Stop command configuration Note The default configuration for stopping a shaking procedure is 1 second To configure the Orbital Shaker ALP to stop a sh
314. oader ALP air tubing to a 110 115 psi air port on the inside left or right tower Figure 23 3 Note Make sure the tube routing does not interfere with the operation of the Biomek instrument OUTSIDE LEFT OUTSIDE RIGHT ETE E ASIE CRPI INSIDE RIGHT outpu KA i O O O Q O Valve handles JA 110 PSI output Gz A sat connections T aka i e OF 5 Roy Gy MAK 100 Bataan ere O amp E p oS O O 40 PSI output Air input Valve handles connection connection Figure 23 3 Tip Loader ALP Pneumatic Connections on the Biomek FX Towers 7 Turn on the corresponding air valve 23 3 Framing Instructions Frame the Tip Loader ALP according to the instructions in the specific user s manual for the instrument ALPs User s Manual 23 6 Tip Loader ALP 23 4 Using the Tip Loader ALP in a Method To use the Tip Loader ALP in a method it must be installed in Hardware Setup refer to Chapter 1 3 Installing and Configuring ALPs Note Configuration in Hardware Setup is not necessary for the Tip Loader ALP An understanding of how tips are loaded in a method using the Tip Loader ALP is necessary to ensure tips are properly seated for pipetting operations refer to Section 23 4 1 Loading Tips To provide mo
315. ocating holes of the desired deck position ALPs User s Manual 12 6 Multichannel Disposal ALP 6 Fasten the Multichannel Disposal ALP to the deck using the thumbscrews on the base of the Multichannel Disposal ALP Figure 12 4 Rubber band notches Grounding tab and screw The screw is inserted through the tab and into the ALP base at this location Thumbscrew Two thumbscrews are used to secure the Multichannel Disposal ALP to the deck The second thumbscrew is positioned diagonally to the one shown here Figure 12 4 Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide grounding tab and screw recommended for hazardous applications The waste bags shipped with the Multichannel Disposal ALP are not biohazard bags Contact the laboratory safety officer for appropriate biohazard bags and procedures A WARNING Appropriately marked autoclavable biohazard bags are 7 Fold the top of a waste bag over the frame so that the bottom of the bag reaches the bottom of the ALP base 8 Smooth out the bag to allow items to drop directly to the bottom of the bag Note For hazardous applications appropriately marked autoclavable biohazard bags are recommended 9 To hold the bag in place stretch the rubber band over the top of the extension and receptacle bag until it fits into the notches on the corners of the extension Figure 12 4 Beckman Coulter Inc
316. od 14 37 controlling with a Device Action step 14 20 creating new labware for 14 17 defined 14 1 establishing a safe maximum speed 14 14 framing 14 5 homing the microplate platform on 14 33 homing the microplate platform outside a method 14 46 installing 14 3 installing in Hardware Setup 14 14 labware supported 14 1 mounting to the deck 14 3 overview 14 1 preventive maintenance 14 47 profile Cell pellet breakup 14 28 Magbead Mix 14 28 MagneSil Yellow 14 28 recommended maximum labware shaking speeds 14 15 removing 14 47 P running a previously defined profile outside a method 14 41 stopping a shaking procedure 14 31 stopping a shaking procedure outside a method 14 44 stopping and restating a method 14 35 storage 14 47 troubleshooting 14 48 using in a method 14 14 passive ALPs defined 1 2 per labware offsets defining for Magnetic Bead ALP 10 13 Positive Position ALP aligning labware with the head or probes 15 6 clamping or unclamping labware on 15 11 controlling outside a method 15 10 defined 15 1 21 1 framing 15 7 installing 15 3 installing in Hardware Setup 15 8 leveling 15 5 preventive maintenance 15 14 removing 15 14 storage 15 14 troubleshooting 15 14 using in a method 15 8 verifying the sensor 15 12 protective shield blanking plate S installing for Multichannel Disposal ALPs 12 11 installing for Span 8 Disposal ALPs 17 15 Solid Phase Extraction SPE ALP components 16 3 configuring t
317. oe SRE labware in the Current a Deck Display i Click here to add a cleaning operation Current Deck Display Displays the status of the Im labware selection deck upon completion of the previous step Also useful for A es 2 PECETE j f d d Method1 BiomekFX BiomekFX ETC 0 03 45 Figure 6 21 HDR Tool Cleaning step configuration for a drying operation 3 In Turn fan on for enter the length of time in seconds to turn the fan on before the HDR Tool Body moves to the HDR Pin Drying ALP Note The default value for Turn fan on for is 2 seconds In Dry for enter the length of time in seconds to keep the HDR Tool Body at the HDR Pin Drying ALP to dry Note The default value for Dry for is 5 seconds In Leave fan on for enter the length of time in seconds to leave the fan on after the HDR Tool Body moves away from the HDR Pin Drying ALP Note The default value for Leave fan on for is 2 seconds ALPs User s Manual 6 36 HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 6 Leave the pin height as is to use the default setting OR Set the pin height manually using one of the following methods e Position the cursor over the graphic of a pin inside a well Click and drag the graphic up or down The pin moves with the cursor and the height displayed below the graphic is adjusted as the graphic is man
318. of 1 for the next 15 Device Controllers on the system Note For each 16 addresses set on address switch 1 address switch 2 is moved up an increment of 1 to open the next available set of 16 addresses on switch 1 for use Continue this incremental process of coordinating both switches for setting addresses for up to 128 Device Controllers at that point the settings for the 128th Device Controller would be switch 1 set to F and switch 2 set to 7 10 After setting the necessary addresses turn on power to the Biomek instrument 11 Turn on the Device Controller power switch Beckman Coulter Inc Device Controller A 7 A 4 Connecting Devices to the Device Controller A A A WARNING To prevent electrical shock use standard electrical precautions when plugging the Device Controller into the power supply WARNING Turn off power to the Biomek before connecting CAN communication cables CAUTION Turn off power to the Biomek instrument and the Device Controller before attaching or removing any active ALP The main power ON OFF switch is on the rear of Device Controller The four ON OFF switches on the front panel of the Device Controller are for high voltage channels only Note The Device Controller must be turned on to provide power to attached high voltage devices The green light on the Device Controller indicates that the Device Controller is on A 4 1 Connecting High Voltage Devices To use a high voltage device th
319. off manually e Monitor input channels When opened Advanced Manual Control for a selected Device Controller displays which channels are on and which channels are off To manually control Device Controller channels 1 Choose Instrument gt Manual Control Manual Control appears 2 Choose Advanced Controls A list of all the devices installed on the Biomek FX instrument appears 3 Select the desired Device Controller Advanced Manual Control for the selected Device Controller appears Figure 6 26 4 To toggle the HDR Drying ALP fan on or off click the desired Fan On Off button Figure 6 26 OR To toggle the wash pump for the circulating reservoir on or off click the desired WashPump On Off button Figure 6 26 Note Channels that are on are highlighted with a bright green color Advanced Manual Control DeviceController0 High Yoltage Outputs washPump On Off washPump2 On Off washPump3 On Off uvs Digital Outputs Fant orot our2 ours ours 5 When adjustment of channels has been completed as desired choose Close Close Figure 6 26 Advanced Manual Control for a Device Controller with Fan on Digital Inputs ini in2 in3 ina Update Note Choose Update to view which digital inputs are on or off 6 Choose Exit to close Manual Control Beckman Coulter Inc HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 6 41 6 8 Removin
320. oir ALP 4 13 4 4 1 2 Configuring Labware Properties for a Drainable Refillable Reservoir The Drainable Refillable Reservoir is a piece of labware and may have parameters configured using Labware Properties To configure Labware Properties 1 Double click the DrainableRefillableReservoir labware type OR Right click on the DrainableRefillableReservoir labware type and choose Properties from the menu Labware Properties appears Figure 4 9 Labware Properties Name Jest Labware Type DrainableRefilableReservc Maximum Volume 71606 pL Device DrainableRefilableReservoir 1 E OK Cancel Figure 4 9 Labware Properties for a drainable refillable reservoir 2 In Name enter a name for the reservoir Note When a deck is populated by numerous pieces of labware naming labware is recommended Names should be descriptive of the contents of the labware or the work being accomplished during the method Naming labware in a meaningful fashion may reduce confusion Names given to pieces of labware may be entered as variables in other step configurations within the method 3 In Device choose the appropriate DrainableRefillableReservoir installed in Hardware Setup 4 Choose OK to close Labware Properties and save changes OR Choose Cancel to close Labware Properties without saving changes 4 4 2 Configuring a Device Action Step for a Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP The ALP is controlled and operating through the Devi
321. olled area Note It is desirable to allow the Multichannel Disposal ALPs to air dry before returning them to their original packing materials 12 9 Preventive Maintenance WARNING The Multichannel Disposal ALP may be contaminated A N Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer To clean wipe all surfaces on the Multichannel Disposal ALP with a soft cloth Beckman Coulter Inc Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs 13 1 Overview Using a step in a method the 96 Channel Tip Wash ALP Figure 13 1 and 384 Channel Tip Wash ALP Figure 13 2 are active ALPs that wash tips on the deck The 96 Channel Tip Wash ALP used with a 96 Channel Head has 96 cleaning wells while the 384 Channel Tip Wash ALP used with the 384 Channel Head has 384 cleaning wells Note Washing tips in a method using a Multichannel Tip Wash ALP is configured in the Transfer or Combine steps refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 15 3 Configuring Transfer and Combine Steps and Wash refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 16 6 Wash Step steps Note Use the Device Action step for a Multichannel Tip Wash ALP to allow the ALP to continue washing until the Finish step is executed refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 22 6 1 6 Configuring the Device Action Step for a Multichannel Tip Wash ALP FX NX MC only These ALPs provide a flow of wash fluid from a sourc
322. ollisions configuring the deck setup in the Deck Editor Disposal ALPs vary in height and failure to choose each Disposal ALP correctly in the software may result in collisions between pod s and Disposal ALPs during operation f CAUTION Make sure the correct Disposal ALP is chosen when The Span 8 Disposal ALP without Slide can be placed in positions in the outside columns of the Biomek deck Note Span 8 Disposal ALPs cannot be mounted adjacent to one another in the first three rows on the Biomek deck When adding a Span 8 Disposal ALP without Slide to the Biomek deck the ALP must be associated with that deck position in the Deck Editor To associate the Span 8 Disposal ALP without Slide with a deck position in the Deck Editor drag and drop Span8TipTrash to the appropriate position in the deck view For more information about associating an ALP with a deck position refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 5 Preparing and Managing the Deck 17 2 2 Mounting a Span 8 Disposal ALP without Slide To mount a Span 8 Disposal ALP without Slide 1 Remove the slide and chute from the Span 8 Disposal ALP Refer to 17 7 Removing a Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide for specific instructions and diagrams CAUTION Bagging extensions are not interchangeable between the A N Multichannel Disposal ALP and the Span 8 Disposal ALP Each Disposal ALP must use the bagging extension designed for that ALP 2 Snap the bagging exte
323. on A1 on the test tube rack Position Al on a test tube rack must be in the front left corner of a labware position on the ALP To add test tube racks to the Test Tube Rack ALPs 1 Insert the labware positioning screws by screwing them clockwise into the labware positioning screw holes on the left side of the Test Tube Rack ALP Figure 22 5 and Figure 22 6 Labware positioning screws Labware positioning screws must be beside position A1 on the test tube rack Labware positioning screw holes Locating Pins There are two A locating pins for each test tube rack one on the Overhang Labware short sides of the positioning screw Thumbscrew tube racks catty holes There are two thumbscrews for corner to each each Test Tube Rack ALP Figure 22 5 Labware positioning screws on a 1 x 2 Test Tube Rack ALP left facing ALPs User s Manual 22 8 Test Tube Rack ALPs Labware positioning screws Labware positioning ha screw must always be 1 I I I Labware positioning screw holes next to position Al on the test tube rack Labware positioning screw holes Overhang Thumbscrew There are two thumbscrews for each Test Tube Rack ALP Figure 22 6 Labware positioning screws on a 1 x 3 Test Tube Rack ALP right facing
324. on for the magnet is fully disengaged to the lowest point in the magnet s travel The magnet automatically homes at the beginning and end of each method To home the magnet 1 Choose Instrument gt Manual Control Manual Control appears 2 Choose Advanced Controls A list of all the installed pods and devices appears 3 Select the desired Magnetic Bead ALP Advanced Manual Control for the selected Magnetic Bead ALP appears Beckman Coulter Inc Magnetic Bead ALP 10 25 4 From Command choose Disengage Magnet Figure 10 17 Advanced Manual Control MagBeadALPO Command Disengage Magnet From Command choose Disengage Magnet Figure 10 17 Advanced Manual Control for a Magnetic Bead ALP with Disengage Magnet selected 5 Choose Go The magnet disengages to its lowest position 6 Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control 7 Choose Exit to close Manual Control 10 5 2 Engaging and Disengaging the Magnet Use Advanced Manual Control to engage raise the magnet to its highest position or disengage lower the magnet to its lowest position To engage the magnet 1 Choose Instrument gt Manual Control Manual Control appears 2 Choose Advanced Controls A list of all the installed pods and devices appears 3 Select the desired Magnetic Bead ALP Advanced Manual Control for the selected Magnetic Bead ALP appears ALPs User s Manual 10 26 Magnetic Bead ALP 4 From Command choose Manual
325. only 2 Choose Fan to install a fan for the HDR Pin Drying ALP OR Choose WashPump to install a wash pump for a circulating reservoir The selected device is added to the list of installed devices under Digital Devices in the left pane Note The first wash pump added to the system is named WashPump1 and second is named WashPump2 and so forth OR Choose Add Device from the top of Hardware Setup New Devices appears Figure 6 6 Available Devices Stacker Carousel WashPump Install Cancel Figure 6 6 New Devices displaying all detected devices Note All the devices detected but not installed are available to add in New Devices Note Right click on an available device and choose Select All to select all of the available devices or Clear Selection to disregard the selection Select the desired digital device s and choose Install The device s selected are added to the list of installed devices under Digital Devices in the left pane Note The first wash pump added to the system is named WashPump1 the second is named WashPump2 and so forth Note In the left pane an asterisk after a device indicates the device has been modified since the workspace was loaded A blue question mark before an installed device indicates the device has not been fully configured HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 6 15 6 3 2 Configure digital devices to make sure the co
326. ont of the Device Controller are Figure A 1 Four 4 high voltage channel power switches allowing for Automatic Manual On or Manual Off states e Channel indicator lights e System indicator light Pade FX Device Controller q System indicator gt O l ig ht MANUAL a AUTOMATIC MAN HABA pisteearic 1 6 ie ie High voltage gt w2 O Om gt channel power switches gt wa O ma WAT saa MANUAL MANUAL AUTOMATIC Q 6 ie O Figure A 1 Front of Device Controller Beckman Coulter Inc Device Controller A 3 Located on the back of the Device Controller are Figure A 2 e On off switch for AC power input e Device indicators for digital inputs outputs e Power input module e Two CAN communication ports Four high voltage power outputs e Four accessible fuses one for each high voltage power outlet e Four low voltage digital input channels e Four low voltage digital output channels e Two address switches High voltage High Address power outputs voltage switches fuses
327. ontacting a Beckman Coulter Service Engineer Table 4 1 Troubleshooting the Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP IF The ALP is not operating correctly THEN Check the CAN connections on the controller refer to Section 4 2 2 2 Connecting the CAN Communications Cables and Sensor Leads The sensitivity indicator LED is not turning on when sufficient liquid is present in the reservoir Calibrate the amplifier sensitivity with the desired liquid in the reservoir refer to Section 4 2 2 3 Calibrating the Sensor Amplifier Sensitivity Make sure the sensor leads are connected to the correct amplifier ports The lead with the larger dots printed along the length of the lead connects to the transmitter port the lead with smaller dots connects to the receiver port refer to Section 4 2 2 2 Connecting the CAN Communications Cables and Sensor Leads Repeated attempts to calibrate the amplifier sensitivity fail Contact Beckman Coulter Technical Support The reservoir is not filling and draining correctly Reverse direction of the tubing through the pump head The tubing must run left to right through the pump head from the container to the reservoir Make sure there are no kinks in the tubing Make sure the pump head is properly closed on the tubing Make sure the fitting on the container that supplies the reservoir is in contact with the liquid ALPs User s Manual Half
328. ontainer and run the tubing to the bottom of the container Note Make sure the inlet tubing is in contact with liquid Run the outlet tubing through the other pump head from right to left Figure 6 5 Insert the opposite end of the outlet tubing into the hole in the lid of the waste container Connect the peristaltic pump to one of the high voltage outputs on the Device Controller refer to Section A 4 1 Connecting High Voltage Devices Connect the Device Controller to one of the CAN ports on the Biomek instrument refer to Section A 2 Installing a Device Controller Turn on power to the Biomek FX instrument and Device Controller Turn on power to the peristaltic pump CAUTION Do not overflow the reservoir 16 Starting at 0 adjust the pump speed by turning the dial on the front of the pump clockwise until fluid fills the circulating reservoir and begins to spill over the inner edges Figure 6 2 Note If fluid spills over the outer edges slow down the pump ALPs User s Manual 6 12 HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 6 2 2 1 Connections The inlet tubing for the circulating reservoir is 0 31 inside diameter while the outlet tubing is 0 38 inside diameter however both the inlet and outlet tubing fit a 3 8 barbed connection When the tubing is connected the outlet tubing must run through the peristaltic pump in the opposite direction to the inlet tubing and into the waste reservoir
329. or a slide Note Do not attach both blanking plates Store the unused blanking plate in an environmentally controlled area Beckman Coulter Inc Span 8 Disposal ALP 17 17 17 4 3 Span 8 Disposal ALPs with Slide in Both L2 and L3 When Span 8 Disposal ALPs with Slide are installed in both L2 and L3 1 Remove the four fasteners holding the solid blanking plate 2 Remove the solid blanking plate This creates an opening large enough for two slides 17 4 4 Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide in R2 When a Span 8 Disposal ALP with slide is installed in R2 on the Biomek FX deck Figure 17 10 orient and install the blanking plate with the cutout as follows 1 Remove the four fasteners holding the solid blanking plate 2 Remove the solid blanking plate 3 Rotate the blanking plate with the cutout 180 from the one shown in Figure 17 12 4 Attach the blanking plate with the cutout to the bottom shield This creates an opening next to R2 for the slide Note Do not attach both blanking plates Store the unused blanking plate in an environmentally controlled area Standoffs Cutout for Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide in R4 position R4 Solid blanking plate Als Fastener locations Y x N Bottom we shield Cutout for Span 8 Disposal NS ALP with Slide in R1 position Blanking plate with cutout
330. osal ALP Return the Half Position Disposal ALP to its original packing materials and store in a dry dust free environmentally controlled area Note It is desirable to allow the ALP to air dry before returning it to its original packing materials 5 6 Preventive Maintenance A Beckman Coulter Inc WARNING The Half Position Disposal ALP may be contaminated Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer To clean wipe all surfaces on the Half Position Disposal ALP with a soft cloth 6 1 HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 6 1 Overview The HDR Pin Drying ALP Figure 6 1 an active ALP and reservoirs refer to Section 6 1 2 Reservoirs are part of a system for washing and drying pins on the HDR Tool Body between transfers in a method Pins are washed using a dunk and dry approach The HDR Tool Body immerses the pins in one or more reservoirs of wash solutions such as bleach ethanol or DMSO Reservoirs may be static or circulating The location and liquid type in each reservoir is configured in the Biomek Software using the Instrument Setup step refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 15 2 Instrument Setup Step After washing the pins in the reservoir s the HDR Tool Body moves above the HDR Pin Drying ALP to dry the pins by fan The HDR Pin Drying ALP must be configured in Hardware Setup and placed on the deck in the Deck Editor
331. ounts of labware but still requires access to other ALPs such as the Tip Wash ALPs or the Solid Phase Extraction SPE Vacuum Manifold ALP It is also useful when running high throughput screening methods Microplates can be added to the Biomek NX Span 8 High Density 4 x 3 ALP by a lab technician or by the Biomek NX Span 8 gripper Labware positioned on the High Density 4 x 3 ALP is gripper accessible and stackable The information in this chapter includes the following e Adding a Liquid Level Sensing LLS Plate Section 9 2 Mounting the High Density 4 x 3 ALP to the Deck Section 9 3 e Removing the High Density 4 x 3 ALP from the Deck Section 9 4 e Storage Section 9 5 Framing the High Density 4 x 3 ALP Section 9 6 Preventive Maintenance Section 9 7 ALPs User s Manual 9 2 High Density 4 x 3 Passive ALP NX S8 only Biomek NX High Density 4 x 3 ALP There are 12 labware positions on the NX S8 High Density 4 x 3 ALP Four labware positions are indicated here Thumb Screws Two of the three thumbscrews on the base of the Biomek NX Span 8 High Density 4 x 3 ALP are used to secure the ALP to the deck The ALP can be rotated therefore three thumb screws locations are available Figure 9 1 Biomek NX Span 8 High Density 4 x 3 ALP Beckman Coulter Inc High Density 4x 3 Passive ALP NX S8 only 9 3 9 2 Adding a Liquid Leve
332. p of ALP Bottom of ALP Figure 8 4 Installing an LLS Plate on an High Density 4 x 3 ALP 3 Attach the LLS plate to the ALP with the four mounting screws provided by turning the screws clockwise until finger tight The LLS plate is now installed Figure 8 5 High Density 4 x 3 Passive ALP with LLS plate option installed Labware rests on top of the LLS plate gt Installed LLS plate Figure 8 5 High Density Passive 4 x 3 ALP with the LLS plate option installed ALPs User s Manual High Density Passive ALPs Installing High Density Passive ALPs Beckman Coulter Inc Installing High Density Passive ALPS includes choosing the deck position and mounting the ALP to the deck The 4 x 3 ALP Sections 8 2 1 Choosing a Deck Position for the 4 x 3 ALP and 8 2 2 Mounting a 4 x 3 ALP to the Deck and the 4 x 4 ALP Sections 8 2 3 Choosing a Deck Position for the 4 x 4 ALP and 8 2 4 Mounting the 4 x 4 ALP to the Deck have different deck locations and slightly different instructions for mounting the ALP to the deck 8 2 1 Choosing a Deck Position for the 4 x 3 ALP The 4 x 3 ALP occupies four columns and three rows on the Biomek deck The 4 x 3 ALP can be placed in two separate positions on the Biomek deck although only one 4x3 ALP can appear on the deck at a time Use the Biomek Software Deck Editor to determine available positions when mounting a 4 x 3
333. peration required of the SPE step Figure 16 6 e Location of the filtered microplate used by the SPE ALP e Locations of the SPE vacuum manifold and receiver e Location of the SPE ALP on the deck e Pod constructing destroying the SPE stack Note The SPE step is for use with a Multichannel Pod only Note The SPE ALP can only be used on the DNA Preparation Deck Layout and occupies two deck positions ALPs User s Manual 16 10 Solid Phase Extraction SPE Vacuum Manifold To configure the SPE step 1 Insert a SPE step into the Method View Figure 16 6 Biomek Software Method1 New loj x File Edit Project Instrument Execution Options Help PEALE GEEAE Start Operation gt Trenen Instrument Setup Filter Source SPEI E Byd Setup Manifold Source SPE1 E 3 5 EPE Receiver plate configuration Q Receiver Source SPE1 Ba 3 A When the receiver microplate is Device Trasfer Finish J Receiver plate has a holder ae Sarp positioned in a microplate holder Location of SPE ALP SPE1 E e lt amp aa Pots the presence of the holder must be Device Combine a indicated by selecting Receiver Ea a plate has a holder O ees Tip Loader pears Pause SPE step configuration The operation performed by the SPE step as well as the position baled and identity of the components of the SPE ALP are provided in the SPE step configuration
334. perature Range 4 C min to 25 C max Flow 7 to 15 Liters per minute Reservoir 6 Liters Heating 1 000 W Cooling 120 W at zero 0 C Note The temperature difference of approximately 5 to 15 C between the circulator bath and the heating amp cooling unit should be considered when choosing a circulator bath 7 3 Framing Instructions Frame the Heating and Cooling ALP according to the instructions in the specfic user s manual for the instrument 7 4 Removing the Heating and Cooling ALP CAUTION Do not detach the hoses over the Biomek deck Immediately wipe up any spills with a soft cloth To remove the Heating and Cooling ALP 1 Power down the circulating bath 2 Loosen the mounting screws 3 Remove the ALP from the deck 4 Remove the hoses over a sink or reservoir container ALPs User s Manual 7 6 Heating and Cooling ALP 7 5 Storage Return the Heating and Cooling ALP to the original packing materials and store in a dry dust free environmentally controlled area Note Itis desirable to allow the Heating and Cooling ALP to air dry before returning it to the original packing materials 7 6 Preventive Maintenance Lime deposits may be removed from the Heating and Cooling ALP using an acidic solution of 0 1M Hydrochloric Acid HCI Flush liberally with water when done 7 7 Troubleshooting Do not attempt to repair the Heating and Cooling ALP without first contacting a Beckman Coulter Serv
335. pinch point when locking rods are moving up into the head pod Device Controller WARNING To prevent electrical shock use standard electrical precautions when plugging the Device Controller into the power supply WARNING Do not remove the cover of the Device Controller WARNING Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before connecting CAN communication cables WARNING Turn off power to the Biomek instrument and the Device Controller before attaching or removing any active ALP Source Waste Sensor WARNING Do not place the controller or the source or waste containers on the Biomek instrument deck WARNING Disconnect main power before connecting or disconnecting CAN cables ALPs User s Manual Table of Contents Safety Information 14 05 60060 ve renee eee ewer esoe ee eeteenas V Warning and Caution Definitions sansan aunan enaner reae v Elecmical Salet yns cea gs a gene E E E E TE E E EA en ee vi High V ON ARE 24 cn eh hee ed eadhaneeg GERAT E EEA GEE EE bea erek vi L ser Light sateeseen parea eidg aa tet tan E e eek do tet aa eian cadens vi Laser Specifications e sepes dn seed bes Re LR ERRE EER RE ERR vi Chemical and Biological Safety n nnana nnana nnana vii Movig Parts aes pesses gari ire aen MEA E es shea EEEN pe ae eee weg en ee ate vii Cleaning rerperr a EEEN eG ENT EE E EE bce EN viii M inte anc easpocr Gio y cek miie te aa ha BRAG oE EERE oe ee ka viii Warnings and Cautions Found in this
336. pins on the bottom of the ALP slip into locating holes on the deck 3 Using the thumbscrews on the base of the ALP attach the ALP to the deck CAUTION A maximum of one long CAN cable can be used in each chain of ALPs If more than one long CAN cable is used in a chain CAN communication errors may occur gt 4 Attach the CAN communications cable to the CAN communications port Note When possible short CAN cables should be used when connecting devices to each other or to the Biomek instrument ALPs User s Manual 11 4 Microplate Shaking ALP 5 Plug one end of the CAN communication cable into either of the two connectors labeled CAN Port on the Microplate Shaking ALP Figure 11 2 Note Make sure the cable routing does not interfere with the operation of the Biomek instrument Address switches ADR1 Air connection ADR2 Figure 11 2 Microplate Shaking ALP connections 6 Attach air tubing from a 40 psi port on the outside of the left or right tower to the air inlet on the Microplate Shaking ALP Figure 11 2 Note Make sure the tube routing does not interfere with the operation of the Biomek instrument 7 Turn on the corresponding air valve 8 Verify the ADR1 address switch is set to 1 Figure 11 2 9 Set ADR2 to a unique address between zero 0 and F if multiple Microplate Shaking ALPs are on the deck Figure 11 2
337. posal ALP 12 1 1 Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide WARNING When using the self contained Multichannel Disposal ALP AN without the slide do not overfill the disposal bag Tips can spill over onto the deck possibly contaminating the deck with hazardous materials When the Multichannel Disposal ALP is used as a self contained waste receptacle without the slide the bagging extension is attached and a waste bag is mounted inside the ALP Figure 12 1 The ALP is used in a standard deck position on the back row of the deck and is particularly effective when lab space is at a premium Note The Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide is used only for collecting shucked tips Bagging extension used for Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide ALP base Thumbscrew Figure 12 1 Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide Beckman Coulter Inc Multichannel Disposal ALP 12 3 12 1 2 Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide The Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide Figure 12 2 is positioned on the deck in one of the two center positions in the outside columns and extends off the edge of the deck The slide is directed through the gap between the deck and light curtain or side safety shield A trash receptacle is placed on the floor at the end of the slide to catch the waste The Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide allows the discard of as many used i
338. posal ALP 17 4 1 Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide in L2 When a Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide is installed in L2 on the Biomek FX deck Figure 17 10 install the blanking plate with the cutout as follows 1 Remove the four fasteners holding the solid blanking plate 2 Remove the solid blanking plate 3 Orient the blanking plate cutout as shown in Figure 17 11 4 Attach the blanking plate to the bottom shield This creates an opening next to L2 for a slide Note Do not attach both blanking plates Store the unused blanking plate in an environmentally controlled area Solid blanking plate Blanking plate with cutout Rotate this blanking plate 180 front to back as required to accommodate the Multichannel Disposal ALP Cutout for Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide in L1 and L4 positions Bottom shield Figure 17 11 Left side bottom shield with solid and cutout blanking plates 17 4 2 Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide in L3 When a Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide is installed in L3 on the Biomek FX deck Figure 17 10 orient and install the blanking plate with the cutout as follows 1 Remove the four fasteners holding the solid blanking plate 2 Remove the solid blanking plate 3 Rotate the blanking plate with the cutout 180 from the one shown in Figure 17 11 4 Attach the blanking plate to the bottom shield This creates an opening next to L3 f
339. positioned manually using the delta values and directional buttons to align it with the framing target on top of the ALP Pressing one of the directional buttons moves the pod in that direction by the distance specified in Delta Position the tips above the framing target on top of the ALP Delta value The magnitude of change applied to the tips each time a directional button is selected W Biomek NX Manual Framing Wizard The tips should be about a half centimeter above the plate Drag the circle to where the tips are in relation to the Well Center and press Go Press Next gt when the tips are directly above their target Warning Delta 0 05 em im a Back Left gt Bight Teach XY ae oy Down V Hysteresis compensation Total Moved From Start cm re p p ka Comer Well Center Go Directional buttons The directional buttons move the head assembly by the amount shown in Delta with each press of a button ee er Beckman Coulter Inc Figure 2 15 Manual Teaching the X and Y axes 8 Channel Active Wash ALP 2 17 To use the delta value and directional buttons to position the tip 1 In Delta select the magnitude of change applied to the tips each time a directional button is selected Figure 2 15 Note The default Delta value is 0 05 cm If the tips are a considerable distance from the desired location incr
340. positions on a Biomek FX deck ALPs User s Manual 21 4 Storage ALPs FX only Deck2 Default Deck Pr ee ee eee od New Deck Delete Deck Rename Deck OpenDeck ClearDeck Renumber Delete ALP Properties Save Cancel FourByFour FourByThree MagBeadALP OneByFive OneByOne OneByOneStorage OneByThree OneByThreeStorage OrbitalShakerALP PositivePositionALP ShakerALP Span8ActiveWashLefl SpansActiveWashRigl Span8TipTrashLeft Span8TipTrashRight Span8TrashLeft Span8TrashRight Span8WashLeft zl l gt Dashed lines indicate where the 1 x 3 Storage pasa T fia ALP Types List ALP can be placed on the Biomek FX deck cilia oak eee tae Ed Figure 21 2 1 x 3 Storage ALP deck position on a Biomek FX 3 Drag and drop OneByOneStorage or OnebyThreeStorage from the ALP Types List to one or more of the dashed locations on the deck The Storage ALP appears and the deck position is named automatically Note Attempting to place a Storage ALP in a location where another ALP resides results in a Warning Figure 21 3 Choose No and delete the currently placed ALP s before placing the Storage ALP on the deck For more information refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Section 5 4 1 Deleting ALPs and Deck Positions from a Deck Warning xi You are about to put an ALP where it will overlap another ALP Are you sure this is what you want to do J Figure 21 3 Warning indicating that an ALP is
341. propriate decontamination and disposal procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer WARNING Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous materials WARNING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials CAUTION Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer CAUTION SPILL HAZARD To remove the Span 8 Disposal ALP without Slide gt PEE gt 1 Remove the rubber band and waste receptacle from the ALP 2 Dispose of the bag and contents as specified by the safety officer 3 Loosen the Span 8 Disposal ALP thumbscrews on the base of the Span 8 Disposal ALP 4 Lift the Span 8 Disposal ALP from the deck so that the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP base clear the locating holes on the deck 17 6 1 Removing the Bagging Extension To remove the bagging extension from the Span 8 Disposal ALP 1 Remove the grounding screw 2 Grasp the extension firmly with one hand and the base firmly with the other 3 Pull the bagging extension forcefully from the ALP base to separate the extension from the base 4 Store the extension in a clean dry dust free area 5 Insert the screw back into the threaded hole on the Span 8 Disposal ALP base ALPs User s Manual 17 20 Span 8 Disposal ALP 17 7 Removing a Spa
342. psi requirement for tip loading The Tip Loader ALP must be attached to one of the 110 115 psi ports on the inner sides of the Biomek towers to seat tips properly Beckman Coulter Inc Tip Loader ALP 23 3 23 2 Installing the Tip Loader ALP Installing the Tip Loader ALP on the deck includes choosing the deck position and mounting the ALP to the deck 23 2 1 Choosing a Deck Position The size of the Tip Loader limits where it can be positioned on the deck Since the Tip Loader ALP covers more than one standard deck position placement is restricted to the outside columns and back row of the Biomek deck These positions are used in order to leave as many other deck positions available as possible Note Use the laser etchings as guides when placing the Tip Loader ALP Because of the size of the ALP the laser etchings are larger for the Tip Loader ALP than all other ALPs Note After a deck position has been chosen on which to physically mount the ALP configure the ALP in the Deck Editor refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 5 Preparing and Managing the Deck 23 2 2 Mounting the Tip Loader ALP to the Deck WARNING Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous materials WARNING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials WARNING Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any spills immedia
343. ptor on the ALP Figure 13 5 ensuring that the correct adaptor is used Note The Framing Tool Adaptor for the 96 Channel Tip Wash ALP is red and the Framing Tool Adaptor for the 384 Channel Tip Wash ALP is blue AccuFrame Use for both the 96 Channel and 384 Channel Tip Wash ALPs Framing Tool Adaptor The adaptor for the 96 Channel Tip Wash ALP is red and the adaptor for zm the 384 Channel Tip Wash ALP is blue Make sure the correct adaptor is used Tip wash reservoir L Tip wash stand Figure 13 5 AccuFrame Framing Tool Adaptor and the 96 Channel Tip Wash ALP CAUTION Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before attaching or A N removing AccuFrame from the instrument deck 2 Turn off power to Biomek instrument before connecting the AccuFrame ALPs User s Manual 13 10 Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs 3 Plug the AccuFrame into an available CAN port on the Biomek tower WARNING Make sure the light curtain is not violated by the AccuFrame cable If the light curtain is violated the framing process halts immediately A Beckman Coulter Inc WARNING Make sure the AccuFrame cable does not interfere with pod movement 4 Turn on power to Biomek instrument 5 Manually place the AccuFrame into the Framing Tool Adaptor by placing the front right corner first and pushing the AccuFrame
344. r Use on the Orbital Shaker ALP uke aaa eens enna eue cue daetecasaee eee 14 17 14 4 3 Controlling the Actions of an Orbital Shaker ALP 14 20 14 4 4 Stopping and Restarting a Method 00 0 0 0 eee ee 14 35 14 5 Controlling the Orbital Shaker ALP Outside a Method 14 37 14 5 1 Manually Controlling a Standard Shaking Procedure 14 39 14 5 2 Manually Controlling a Shaking Procedure of a Specific Length of Mime 45s 4 eaewexae ans cane eee kenga caw 14 40 14 5 3 Manually Executing a Previously Defined Shaking Profile 14 41 14 5 4 Manually Controlling a Pulsing Shake 14 43 14 5 5 Manually Stopping a Shaking Procedure Already in Process 14 44 14 5 6 Manually Clamping and Unclamping Labware 14 45 14 5 7 Manually Homing the Microplate Platform 14 46 14 6 Removing the Orbital Shaker ALP from the Deck 14 47 LAD PROTA S cag So a he hoe a ew Bhd S29 na 4 Se BEGET AVE ES Sey 14 47 14 8 Preventive Maimtenance ics ioeas deca dad idandoede dese dan taawnd sen 14 47 14 9 Wroubleshoonne s 0 n0sd40 s deudensedautiwwad d nisin ds ddencatawde 14 48 15 Positive Position ALP TS SOVEN EW araara na E a eae te a ale OE ata emg Se a eel ae A 15 1 15 2 Installing the Positive Position ALP 0 cece eee eee eee 15 3 15 2 1 Mounting a Positive Position ALP to the Deck 15 3 15 2 2 Le
345. ramed Advanced MC Teach lt lt Less Manual Teach Auto Teach Device Device Index fo 7 Device Control Sensor Device noned Xxfcm Y cm Z cm Labware Offset 2 723 349 2 54 Per labware Offsets Position Span f 128 8 999 Min Safe Height fi coat Figure 2 6 Expanded Position Properties for the 8 Channel Active Wash ALP 6 In Device select the WashPump that is connected to the ALP 7 If aSource Waste Sensor is configured for the source and or waste containers select the Sensor Device Note Refer to Appendix B Source Waste Sensor for more information on the Source Waste Sensor 8 Choose OK to save changes and close Position Properties 9 Choose Save to save changes and close Deck Editor ALPs User s Manual 2 10 8 Channel Active Wash ALP 2 3 Framing Instructions Beckman Coulter Inc The 8 Channel Active Wash ALP must be manually framed to ensure that the tips and probes on the Span 8 Pod access the cleaning wells of the ALP without causing any damage to the tips probes pod or ALP Since the cleaning wells of the ALP are relatively small it is crucial that the tips on the probes be framed as accurately as possible The 8 Channel Active Wash ALP is framed using Biomek NX Manual Framing Wizard which is accessed through Position Properties in the Deck Editor This process involves gt FX The 8 Channel Active Wash ALP on a Biomek FX instrument is framed using the Biomek
346. ransfer Tum pump on ff pod approaches q A Leave pump on for 2 scr HOR Move Transfer a HDR Tool Cleaning rth lg Finish Tan co Additional Cleaning AGE one Dipping Configuation Configuration a Operations Sn md Continue adding Click here to add a cleaning operation afr Cleaning Operations by clicking this button Cleaning Operation Pa or by selecting more configuration for washing gE labware in the Current with a circulating reservoir eal Deck Display Current Deck Display Displays the status of the deck upon completion of the previous step Also useful for labware selection Methodi Biome Biome k ETC Oss Figure 6 17 HDR Tool Cleaning step configuration for a wash operation Beckman Coulter Inc HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 6 31 3 Ifthe Cleaning labware selected is a static reservoir or microplate verify the labware type and deck position of the labware Note A bright yellow outline appears in the Current Deck Display around the labware designated for a Cleaning Operation OR If the Cleaning labware selected is a circulating reservoir Figure 6 15 In Turn pump on for enter the length of time in seconds to turn the wash pump on before the HDR Tool Body moves to the circulating reservoir Note The default value for Turn pump on for is 2 seconds In Leave pump on for enter the length of time in seconds to leave the was
347. rasping the Make sure a good air connection has labware been established ALPs User s Manual Multichannel Disposal ALP 12 1 Overview The Multichannel Disposal ALP is a passive ALP that provides a means to dispose of tips during a method When the slide is attached it can be used to dispose of tips tip boxes and labware during a method This ALP is used by the Multichannel Pod in one of two ways e Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide The disposed tips are placed in a waste receptacle positioned inside the Disposal ALP base OR e Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide A slide that extends beyond the edge of the Biomek deck is inserted into the ALP Tips tip boxes and labware placed inside the ALP slide down into a receptacle placed below Note The Multichannel Disposal ALP is shipped so that either of the two options above can be assembled and used The sections in this chapter include e Installing the Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide Section 12 2 Installing a Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide Section 12 3 Installing Protective Shield Blanking Plate Section 12 4 Framing Instructions Section 12 5 e Removing a Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide Section 12 6 e Removing a Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide Section 12 7 e Storage Section 12 8 e Preventive Maintenance Section 12 9 ALPs User s Manual 12 2 Multichannel Dis
348. rculating Reservoir 6 10 1 Preventive Maintenance for the HDR Pin Drying ALP Follow the appropriate decontamination and cleaning procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer 6 10 2 Preventive Maintenance for the Circulating Reservoir To ensure optimum operation perform the following maintenance procedures as necessary e Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer e Do not overflow the reservoir Empty any cleaning solutions from the reservoirs when not in use and rinse them thoroughly as outlined by the laboratory safety officer e Make sure the reservoir is dry before storing ALPs User s Manual 6 44 HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 6 11 Troubleshooting the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir Beckman Coulter Inc 6 11 1 Troubleshooting the HDR Pin Drying ALP Do not attempt to repair the HDR Pin Drying ALP without first contacting a Beckman Coulter Service Engineer Table 6 1 Troubleshooting the HDR Pin Drying ALP The HDR Pin Drying ALP is not Make sure the Device Controller is functioning correctly properly connected to the fan and the Biomek FX instrument 6 11 2 Troubleshooting the Circulating Reservoir Do not attempt to repair the circulating reservoir without first contacting a Beckman Coulter Service Engineer Table 6 2 Troubleshooting the Circulating Reservoir IF THEN The circulating reservoir is
349. re precise control over tip loading and unloading than other steps using a Tip Loader ALP such as a Transfer or Load Tips step use a Tip Loader step A Tip Loader step may be used when performing multiple aspirate and dispense operations with each operation requiring a specific set of tips Refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 22 7 Tip Loader Step FX NX MC only for information on configuring a Tip Loader step 23 4 1 Loading Tips WARNING Stay clear of the pinch point when locking rods are moving A N up into the head pod The force used to apply tips to the head comes from the Tip Loader not the pod or head Note Loading tips by hand or using Manual Control is not recommended due to inadequate and unequal pressure application Tips load onto the pod from a software issued command such as in a Transfer or Load Tips steps and the Biomek instrument performs the following e Places a tip box on the Tip Loader ALP e Raises the locking rods and rotates them to lock into the pod e Raises the tip box to seat the tips on the mandrels Note This process takes a few seconds to seat the tips properly e Unlocks and lowers the locking rods e Locks the locking rods to hold the empty tip box on the Tip Loader ALP e Moves the pod in the Z axis with the tips attached to the head Beckman Coulter Inc Tip Loader ALP 23 7 23 5 Controlling the Tip Loader ALP Locking Rods Outside a Method Note Using Manual Co
350. re the test tubes are centered between the slots of the top adaptor plate If not remove the top adaptor plate and repeat steps 7 and 8 When the test tubes are centered in the slots press firmly down on the top adaptor plate and fasten the four thumbscrews two on each side plate to secure it in place Repeat steps 1 to 10 to place another septum piercing tube rack on the Test Tube Rack ALP Test Tube Rack ALPs 22 15 22 5 2 Removing Septum Piercing Tube Racks To remove a septum piercing tube rack from a Test Tube Rack ALP 1 Loosen but do not remove the four thumbscrews on the side plates 2 Lift the top adaptor plate straight up so that the grooves slide completely over the thumbscrews and remove it from the ALP 3 Carefully lift the test tube rack up off the locating pins and slide it out between the side plates 22 6 Removing Test Tube Rack ALPs from the Deck To remove a Test Tube Rack ALP from the Biomek deck 1 Remove test tube racks from the Test Tube Rack ALP gt NX S8 If using a septum piercing test tube rack the septum piercing adaptor must be removed before removing the test tube rack from the ALP refer to Section 22 6 1 Removing the Septum Piercing Adaptor from Test Tube Rack ALPs NX S8 only 2 Loosen the thumbscrews on the base of the Test Tube Rack ALP 3 Lift the Test Tube Rack ALP straight up from the deck until the locating pins are clear of the locating holes 22 6 1 Removing th
351. re to or from the Storage ALP ALPs User s Manual 21 12 Storage ALPs FX only 7 Select the desired option for moving stacked labware Move the entire stack of labware moves all labware in the stack this option should be selected when moving a single unstacked piece of labware Move stack leaving the bottom piece of labware at the source position moves all labware in the stack except for the bottom piece Note Selecting Move stack leaving the bottom piece of labware at the source position when the source deck position contains only one piece of labware results in an error Move the topmost piece s of labware from the stack moves only the specified number of labware from the top of the stack Advanced Controls Figure 21 12 may be selected to change the offset values for the Storage ALP Move step however consult with Beckman Coulter Customer Support before changing the values in Advanced Controls Biomek Software Method2 New File Edit Project Instrument Execution Options Help D Sa BRAS Xe lo a gt oxe a sat Instrument Setup AA Storage ALP Move 4 Finish Storage ALP Move Using pod x Move labware from P6 gt to sr Move the entire stack of labware Move stack leaving the bottom piece of labware at the source position C Move the topmost 1 E piece of labware from the stack Advanced Controls Override Default Override value Original val
352. rea 5 Insert the screw back into the threaded hole on the Multichannel Disposal ALP base ALPs User s Manual 12 16 Multichannel Disposal ALP 12 7 Removing a Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide CAUTION Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any AN spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer To remove the Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide 1 Verify that no labware or tips remains on the slide If labware remains on the slide remove the labware as specified by the laboratory safety officer 2 Remove the trash receptacle and dispose of the contents as specified by the laboratory safety officer Remove the grounding screw from the grounding tab on the slide Lift the slide from the base Insert the grounding screw back into the threaded hole on the disposal base nH On A U Loosen the Multichannel Disposal ALP thumbscrews on the base of the Multichannel Disposal ALP 7 Lift the Multichannel Disposal ALP from the deck so that the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP base clear the locating holes on the deck 8 To detach the chute remove the four screws attaching the chute to the disposal base 9 Insert the four screws back into the threaded holes in the disposal base 12 8 Storage Return the Multichannel Disposal ALPs with and without Slide to their original packing materials and store in a dry dust free environmentally contr
353. reaks both light beams The pod stops after framing is completed and the two light beam indicators are illuminated Note An error message appears if both light beams are not broken when the pod is lowered into the AccuFrame If this occurs using Advanced Manual Control move the pod until the probe breaks both light beams and all the indicator lights are on Choose Teach and the pod continues the teaching process The pod may also be moved by hand until the probe breaks both light beams and all the indicator lights are on ALPs User s Manual 14 12 Orbital Shaker ALP Beckman Coulter Inc 8 Wait until the pod stops moving and Teaching Instructions appears Figure 14 13 Teaching Instructions The location is 58 597 cm 18 751 cm 16 750 cm The change is 3 937 cm 0 088 cm 1 050 cm What would you like to do C Shift ALP Shift position Cancel Figure 14 13 Teaching Instructions 9 Choose from Shift deck Shift ALP or Shift position for appropriate teaching instructions 10 Choose OK if the coordinates displayed in Teaching Instructions appear reasonable Position Properties appears again and the position is framed for the selected pod 11 Choose OK to save changes and close Position Properties 12 Choose Save to close the Deck Editor Now that the ALP has been framed finish the framing procedure by removing the framing fixture and the AccuFrame Orbital Shaker ALP 14 13
354. refer to Section 6 2 1 1 Removing and Installing the Fan Adaptor Plate Fan and Fan Guards Note When the HDR Pin Drying ALP is not used for drying pins in a method it may be used as a passive ALP position by removing the collar from the labware position Labware can be placed on the HDR Pin Drying ALP by a lab technician the ORCA robot or the Biomek FX gripper when the HDR Pin Drying ALP is used as a passive ALP position 6 1 2 Reservoirs Reservoirs are used to wash pins before the HDR Tool Body moves to the HDR Pin Drying ALP The HDR Tool Body dips the pins into one or more reservoirs to rinse residue from the pins There are two types of reservoirs that may be used with the HDR Pin Drying ALP e static reservoir labware placed on the deck to hold wash solutions for the duration of the method refer to Section 6 1 2 1 Static Reservoirs e circulating reservoir labware placed on the deck with inlet and outlet connections to circulate wash solutions through the labware during the method refer to Section 6 1 2 2 Circulating Reservoirs ALPs User s Manual 6 4 HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 6 1 2 1 Static Reservoirs A specially designed chemically resistant static reservoir is used to store wash solutions such as bleach ethanol or DMSO The static reservoir may be placed in any standard deck position and is not gripperable by the Orca robot or the gripper on the Multichannel Po
355. riately contained environment when using hazardous materials WARNING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials WARNING Do not spill liquids on or around the Biomek instrument Clean up any spills immediately according to the procedures defined by the laboratory safety officer To remove the Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP PPPRP P 1 Drain the reservoir if necessary refer to Section 4 5 2 Draining the Reservoir Turn off power to the Biomek instrument On the controller push the pump head locking lever to the left to open it Remove the tubing from the pump head Disconnect the CAN cable s from the CAN port s nH nA A W N Using the supplied screwdriver loosen the screws on the right and left of the sensor amplifier that fasten the sensor leads then disconnect the leads from the amplifier 7 Loosen the thumbscrews fastening the pump head to the controller and gently remove the pump head Note The pump head needs to be removed only if the ALP will be stored in the original packaging 8 On the reservoir disconnect the tubing from the inlet outlet fitting 9 Remove the reservoir from the deck 10 Decontaminate and clean the reservoir following procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer ALPs User s Manual 4 18 Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP 4 7 Storage To store the Drainable
356. ring Devices Associated with the HDR Pin Drying ALP and Circulating Reservoir in Hardware Setup Devices associated with the HDR Pin Drying ALP and circulating reservoirs must be configured in Hardware Setup A Device Controller must also be installed in Hardware Setup to add digital devices to the system Both the fan used in the HDR Pin Drying ALP and the wash pump used with the circulating reservoir are digital devices A separate wash pump is required for each circulating reservoir For example if using three circulating reservoirs a total of three wash pumps need to be added in Hardware Setup one for each circulating reservoir Note Refer to Appendix A Device Controller for information on adding and configuring a Device Controller When digital devices such as a fan or wash pump are installed they are displayed under Digital Devices in the left pane of Hardware Setup Installed digital devices must also be configured to the proper Device Controller and proper channel on the Device Controller in Hardware Setup 6 3 1 Installing Digital Devices for the HDR ALP and Circulating Reservoir Installing Digital Devices may be accomplished in two ways 1 In Hardware Setup right click Digital Devices or any device under Digital Devices and choose Add Device from the menu Note Fan Simple or WashPump are the available options ALPs User s Manual 6 14 Beckman Coulter Inc HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX
357. rol Beckman Coulter Inc Tip Loader ALP 23 9 23 6 Removing the Tip Loader ALP from the Deck To remove the Tip Loader ALP 1 Turn off power to main unit before removing any active ALP Close the air valve where the Tip Loader ALP is attached to the Biomek tower Detach the air tubing at the unit Detach the communications cable an A W N Lift the Tip Loader ALP straight up and off of the deck so the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP clear the locating holes on the deck 23 7 Storage Return the Tip Loader ALP to the original packing materials and store in a dry dust free environmentally controlled area Note It is desirable to allow the Tip Loader ALP to air dry before returning it to the original packing materials 23 8 Preventive Maintenance Clean up all spills immediately with a soft cloth that has been dampened with appropriate cleaning compound Keep liquids off the sensor Figure 23 2 ALPs User s Manual 23 10 Tip Loader ALP 23 9 Troubleshooting Do not attempt to repair the Tip Loader ALP Contact a Beckman Coulter Service Engineer for all required repairs Beckman Coulter Inc Note The following troubleshooting does not require any removal of covers or repair Table 23 1 Troubleshooting the Tip Loader ALP IF The tips are not seating properly THEN Check the air supply line for leaks Check that the device has been framed correctly Check that the pod i
358. rough the Device Controller 1 Connect power cable of high voltage device into the appropriate plug 2 Switch channel power switch for the chosen channel to Manual On This applies power to the device 3 Switch channel power switch to Automatic Note The maximum current allowable per high voltage port is 3 15 amps The Device Controller can handle a maximum of 6 3 amps so two ports at 3 15 amps each can be used at any one time A 4 2 Connecting Digital Device Outputs Any device that uses 24V and less than 100 milliAmps of current may be connected to the Device Controller via the digital connections Figure A 3 To connect Digital Devices 1 Turn off system power 2 Connect the positive wire to the 24V connector on the digital output ALPs User s Manual A 8 Device Controller Beckman Coulter Inc 3 Connect the negative wire to the control connector on the digital output Digital Inputs Digital Outputs Figure A 3 Digital connections attach devices here 4 Turn power to the system on and test the device A 4 3 Connecting Digital Device Inputs Each Device Controller digital input channel has three connectors Figure 38 3 e Positive 5V to supply a sensor e S Signal from the sensor e Negative Ground from the sensor There are two types of input devices e Opt
359. rrect Device Controller and high voltage or digital output are selected Configuring Digital Devices Note Refer to Appendix A Device Controller for more information on configuring devices to the proper Device Controller and channel 1 In Hardware Setup select the desired digital device The configuration for the selected device appears Figure 6 7 Biomek Hardware Setup Reconnect A Home All Axes Add Device Remove Device J Accept gt lt Cancel El Biomek FX SN None fj AccuFrame 96 Podi 8 Pod2 H Devices F DeviceControllerO gt MagBeadALPo F MagBead LP1 7 OrbitalShakerALPO F OrbitalshakerALP1 F PositivePositionALPO F PositivePositionALP1 ShakerALPO F ShakerALP1 F SpeedPumpo F StirrerALPO F TiploaderO S Digital Devices Line Name On Off Box DeviceController0 7 Line EEA bi f Ww i ev Fani Simple1 WashPump1 5 Stacker Carousels E Stacker1 Stacker2 BiomekFX Figure 6 7 Hardware Setup showing the configuration for a digital device 2 In Box select the Device Controller the device is connected to for power 3 In Line select the high voltage or digital output to which the device is connected Note Use a digital output port for a Fan for the HDR Pin Drying ALP and a high voltage port for a Wash Pump for the circulating reservoir Note When configuring digital devices make sure a distinct line on a Device Controller is used for each d
360. rst be installed in Hardware Setup refer to Section 1 3 1 Installing an ALP in Hardware Setup There are two ways in which the Source Waste Sensor may be used with Biomek Software e Using the Device Setup step to allow the sensor to check the levels of liquids of source or waste containers at specific times in a method refer to Section B 3 1 Using the Device Setup Step e Associating the sensor with a wash ALP to allow the sensor to check the levels of source or waste containers going into or out of a wash ALP refer to Section B 3 2 Associating the Source Waste Sensor with a Wash ALP B 3 1 Using the Device Setup Step Use the Device Setup step to use the Source Waste Sensor in a method to check the level of liquids at a specific time in the method refer to the Biomek Software User 5 Manual Chapter 22 6 1 8 Configuring the Device Action Step for a Source Waste Sensor FX and NX only If during the execution of the Device Setup step the sensor indicates the supply container is too low or the waste container is too high an error message appears refer to Section B 3 3 Error Messages for the Source Waste Sensor B 3 2 Associating the Source Waste Sensor with a Wash ALP The Source Waste Sensor also may be associated with a wash ALP or any ALP that uses a pump to allow the sensor to monitor the liquid level of the source and waste containers going into and out of the wash ALP This association is mad
361. ry to tell the software where the HDR Pin Drying ALP is placed on the deck in an Instrument Setup step for obstacle avoidance To add an HDR Pin Drying ALP to the deck 1 Insert an Instrument Setup step at the start of the method OR Select the first Instrument Setup step found in the method The Instrument Setup step configuration appears Figure 6 10 Note The first Instrument Setup step must be located before any pod movement for obstacle avoidance Biomek Software Method1 New Oo x File Edit Project Instrument Execution Options Help D ee BAS seMeo a gt wo XK lea A Start Deck JHOR_Deck x JV Pause to confirm setup Pause for bar code input Instrument Sd p Labware Category AEEA IV verify Pod Setup Configure IB Finish MEA BCFulReser CUpsidel Biomek200 BiomekFXH BiomekFXF FanShroud FilterHolder IMReservoir Labware Category Used to filter labware types to display only labware of a selected category Method1 BiomekFX BiomekFx ETC 0 00 09 Figure 6 10 Instrument Setup step configuration 2 Place the FanShroud labware type on the position s that are associated with a Fan in the Deck Editor Note Use Labware Category to filter the labware types to display only Reservoirs to locate the Fan labware type quickly Beckman Coulter Inc HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 6 21 6 4 2 Adding
362. rying ALP and Reservoirs FX only To configure an HDR Tool Cleaning step ir 1 Insert an HDR Tool Cleaning step into the Method View Figure 6 15 HDR Tool Cleaning Biomek Software Method1 New File Edit Project Instrument Execution Options Help Dee BRS SERB oo a m0 o A Start Use pod for transfer Inert Instrument Setup Click here to add a cleaning operation Q HDR Transfer ii HDR Tool Cleaning Pod selection lg Finish Click this button to add Source Labware and open the Source Labware configuration Comment Method1 BiomekFx BiomekFX ETC 0 03 45 Figure 6 15 HDR Tool Cleaning step configuration 2 In Use Pod specify the pod with the HDR Tool Body used to perform the transfer operations 3 Configure Cleaning Operations as described in Section 6 6 1 1 Configuring Cleaning Operations 6 6 1 1 Configuring Cleaning Operations The HDR Tool Cleaning step is configured through a series of cleaning operations There are two types of Cleaning Operations e Wash Operations pins are dipped in wash solution in a reservoir deep well microplate or other labware type refer to Section 6 6 1 1 1 Configuring a Wash Operation e Drying Operations pins are air dried by a fan at the HDR Drying ALP refer to Section 6 6 1 1 2 Configuring a Drying Operation As many Cleaning Operations as desired can be conf
363. s a 1x 1 or a swap space After an Orbital Shaker ALP has been physically added to the deck configured in Hardware Setup and associated with a device and a deck position in the Deck Editor Biomek Software understands the attributes of the ALP and can receive information on how to control it The Device Action step on the Devices Step Palette is used to control the actions of the Orbital Shaker ALP during a method run Note Refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 22 Using the Devices Step Palette for information on how to display the Devices Step Palette Note An Orbital Shaker ALP must be configured in Hardware Setup refer to Chapter 1 3 1 Installing an ALP in Hardware Setup and associated with a device and deck position in the Deck Editor prior to using the Orbital Shaker ALP in a method When a Device Action step is added to a method the configuration associated with the selected device appears in the Step Configuration Figure 14 18 Note Device Action steps that have not been appropriately configured generate errors when a method is validated or run Orbital Shaker ALP 14 21 To configure the Device Action step for an Orbital Shaker ALP D 1 Insert a Device Action step into the Method View Figure 14 17 E Device Fetion Biomek Software Method6 New i z jol x File Edit Project Instrument Execution Options Help Des ERS e o oe a 0 o Ea
364. s added to the deck To add a Magnetic Bead ALP to the deck complete the following 1 Select Instrument gt Deck Editor The Deck Editor appears 2 Click and hold the mouse button on the MagBeadALP in the ALP Types List Notice that the locations capable of supporting the ALP are indicated by dashed boxes 3 Drag and drop the MagBeadALP from the ALP Types list to the desired location on the Deck View The ALP appears and deck positions are named automatically Note Deck positions may be renamed refer to Section 10 4 2 2 Setting Magnetic Bead ALP Position Properties Note Ifthe MagBeadALP is about to be placed where another ALP is currently placed on the deck the following warning appears Figure 10 7 Delete the currently placed ALP before placing the MagBeadALP on the deck refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 5 4 1 Deleting ALPs and Deck Positions from a Deck F You are about to put an ALP where it will overlap another ALP d t Are you sure this is what you want to do Figure 10 7 Warning appears because an ALP is about to be placed where it overlaps another ALP Beckman Coulter Inc Magnetic Bead ALP 10 11 10 4 2 2 Setting Magnetic Bead ALP Position Properties After a Magnetic Bead ALP is placed on the deck set the properties of the ALP and related deck position Note For a description of all the ALP and deck position properties refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Ch
365. s defined by your safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials WARNING Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer WARNING Pinch Point The clamps used to secure a microplate to the Magnetic Bead ALP could cause personal injury Avoid interference with the clamps while a microplate is on the ALP CAUTION The Magnetic Bead ALP may be damaged if liquid is dispensed into an ALP that does not have labware positioned on it CAUTION Make sure the labware on the Magnetic Bead ALP matches the labware type specified The clamps raise to a height set for the labware type before clamping and incorrect settings may result in inaccurate clamping PRPPEPEEP PPR amp BB ALPs User s Manual xiv Safety Information A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Beckman Coulter Inc Microplate Shaking ALP WARNING Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous materials WARNING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials WARNING Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer WARNING Disconnect main power before connecting or disconnecting CAN cables CAUTION A maximum of one long CAN cable
366. s level No motion is occurring when a tip load has been requested Check the air pressure Check the communications cable Locating pins do not lock into position on the pod Re teach the Tip Loader position to orient the pod to the ALP s location on the deck A 1 Appendix A Device Controller A 1 Overview The Device Controller provides a means to control a number of high voltage and low voltage digital outputs as well as a means to monitor low voltage digital inputs A Controller Area Network CAN interface with a small microcontroller provides control over the output ports High voltage devices requiring 110VAC to 220VAC are attached to a Device Controller via a high voltage power outlet which is supplied through the AC Power Input Low voltage devices which use 24V at 100 mA are supplied via the CAN connection from the Biomek instrument Note Several ALPs and devices such as a wash pump or fan associated with ALPs require an Device Controller to operate The sections in this appendix include Installing a Device Controller Section A 2 Setting Address Switches Section A 3 e Connecting Devices to the Device Controller Section A 4 e Using Advanced Manual Control to Manually Control Device Controllers Section A 5 e Preventive Maintenance Section A 6 e Troubleshooting Section A 7 ALPs User s Manual A 2 Device Controller Located on the fr
367. s to load and the position on which the tip box is located Figure 2 13 8 Choose Next to continue to the next screen Biomek NX Manual Framing Wizard Teach X Y appears Figure 2 13 E Biomek NX Manual Framing Wizard The tips should be about a half centimeter above the plate Drag the circle to where the tips are in relation to the Wa Center and press Go Press Next gt when the tips are directly above their target Delta 0 05 om a Back Left gt Bight Teach XY mwe Down IV Hysteresis compensation Total Moved From Start cm well Comer Well Center Go Figure 2 13 Manual Framing Wizard Teach X Y 9 To align the tips in the X and Y axes with the framing target on top of the ALP lower the tips in the Z axis until they are approximately 1 mm above the top of the ALP Note Since tip height is set in the next step in the Manual Teaching process it is safe to move the pod to any height to make aligning the tips with the microplate easier 10 Visually verify the physical position of the tips in relation to the framing targets on top of the ALP 11 Adjust the position of the tip to align it with the framing target by either e Using the Graphic Alignment Tool Section 2 3 1 Using the Delta Value and Directional Buttons Section 2 3 2 Beckman Coulter Inc 8 Channel Active Wash ALP 2 15 2 3 1 Using the Graphic Alignment Tool The graphic alig
368. should be supplied whenever possible This information is used by many of the techniques supplied with the Biomek FX software when calculating the height to aspirate or dispense liquid These techniques are specified to aspirate and dispense at certain offsets from the liquid level If the volume is not supplied the liquid level cannot be determined by the Multichannel Pod and the aspirate and dispense heights must be specified in the pipetting steps Note A Span 8 Pod has the ability to detect the liquid level if LLS capable tips are used If Unknown is selected the liquid level is detected during method run if required by the technique and the wells are assumed to be full when validating the method A selection of Nominal also detects the liquid level during method run but the volume in the wells is assumed to be the entered value when validating the method If Known is selected the liquid level is not detected during method run and the entered value is used during validation and method run ALPs User s Manual 6 26 HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 7 Enter the Volume if Nominal or Known volume is selected Note A value entered in Volume is assigned to each well on the selected labware 8 Select the Liquid Type contained in the labware The liquid type is useful information when the Biomek FX auto selects a pipetting technique for any aspirate and dispense operations acted upon this piece of labware
369. sired labware type OR Right click the desired labware type and choose Edit from the menu Basic Information appears Figure 10 13 BCFlat96 Basic Information x a Miscellaneous S 12 7762 18 5471 Movement Information pan 127762 esm Orbital Shaker Height 1 4224 cm Ordering Information Stacking Colors Edit Wells_1 Bmp fo Description Beckman Coulter microplate with 96 round flat bottomed wells Preview The shape and general description of the There are no errors in this labware type SSSSSSSSSESE labware definition Figure 10 13 Basic Information for the selected labware type Beckman Coulter Inc Magnetic Bead ALP 10 19 3 Choose Magbead in the left pane The right pane changes to display the Magbead configuration information Figure 10 14 BCFlat96 Basic Information Miscelenecus Height em Movement Information O 96 WellPostMagnet 0 D 96 WellFlatMagnet 0 Orbital Shaker Ordering Information Stacking Clamp during pipetting or engaging magnet Move arms to maximum height when clamping IV Sense labware before pipetting or gripping Preview Describes how the Magbead ALP should There are no errors in this labware type eee ee Se Sess interact with the labware and what definition Magnets are supported Figure 10 14 Magbead configuration for the selected labware type 4 Magnet Type lists all available magnet types Select the magnet types that may be used with the se
370. sition Note After a deck position has been chosen on which to physically mount the ALP configure the ALP in the Deck Editor refer to the Biomek Software User 5 Manual Chapter 5 Preparing and Managing the Deck Mounting a Positive Position ALP to the Deck Section 15 2 1 e Leveling the Positive Position ALP Section 15 2 2 e Aligning the Top of the Positive Position ALP with the Multichannel Head or Span 8 Probes Section 15 2 3 15 2 1 Mounting a Positive Position ALP to the Deck WARNING Disconnect main power before connecting or disconnecting CAN cables To mount the Positive Position ALP 1 Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before mounting any ALP CAUTION Orient the Positive Position ALP so the CAN connections are to the right of the ALP and the clamp is in the front right corner of the ALP when facing the Biomek instrument 2 Position the Positive Position ALP so the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP slip into locating holes on the deck the CAN connections are to the right of the ALP and the clamp is in the front right corner of the ALP when facing the Biomek instrument 3 Fasten the Positive Position ALP to the deck using the thumbscrews on the base of the ALP CAUTION A maximum of one long CAN cable can be used in each chain of ALPs If more than one long CAN cable is used in a chain CAN communication errors may occur 4 Plug the female end of the CAN communication cable into
371. sitioned on it 8 Select Sense labware before pipetting or gripping to detect the presence of labware on the Magnetic Bead ALP prior to performing pipetting operations on the selected labware type when on the Magnetic Bead ALP Note Sense labware before pipetting or gripping is selected by default 9 Choose Save Note Three sections of hints are offered at the bottom of the edit option The first section displays a graphic of the labware the second section explains the selected field and the third section explains any errors resulting from editing the labware properties Place the cursor over the desired labware properties field and click to view these hints 10 4 4 Understanding How the Magnetic Bead ALP Performs Automatically When certain steps are used in a method that interact with the Magnetic Bead ALP some magnet positioning and clamping operations are performed automatically e The magnet is disengaged and clamps are deactuated whenever a gripper move is performed at the Magnetic Bead ALP The clamps are actuated whenever a liquid transfer operation is performed at the Magnetic Bead ALP if Clamp during pipetting or engaging magnet is selected in the Labware Type Editor for the specified labware type Note To access labware on the Magnetic Bead ALP without clamping it deselect Clamp during pipetting or engaging magnet on the MagBead configuration in the Labware Type Editor for the desired labware type refer to Section 10
372. sive ALPs to the deck 1 Choose an appropriate deck location to mount the ALP to the deck refer to Section 19 2 1 Choosing a Deck Position 2 Position the ALP on the appropriate deck location so the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP slip into the locating holes on the deck Note Use the deck laser etchings as a guide when positioning Standard Passive ALPs on the deck 3 Fasten the ALP to the deck using the thumbscrews on the base of the Standard Passive ALP 19 3 Framing Instructions Frame the Standard Passive ALPs according to the instructions in the specific user s manual for the instrument 19 4 Removing Standard Passive ALPs from the Deck To remove Standard Passive ALPs from the deck 1 Remove labware from the ALP manually or through a Biomek method 2 Loosen the thumbscrews on the base of the Standard Passive ALP 3 Lift the ALP straight up from the deck until the locating pins are clear of the locating holes ALPs User s Manual 19 10 Standard Passive ALPs 19 5 Storage Return Standard Passive ALPs to their original packing materials and store in a dry dust free environmentally controlled area Note It is desirable to allow the Standard Passive ALPs to air dry before returning them to the original packing materials 19 6 Preventive Maintenance WARNING Standard Passive ALPs may be contaminated from method AN solutions Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined by th
373. sly authorized officer of the Company Parts replaced during the warranty period are warranted to the end of the instrument warranty Note Performance characteristics and specifications are only warranted when Beckman Coulter replacement parts are used ALPs User s Manual Safety Information All Warnings and Cautions in this document include an exclamation point a lightning bolt or a light burst symbol framed within a triangle Please pay special attention to the specific safety information associated with these symbols WARNING If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by uN Beckman Coulter Inc the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired Warning and Caution Definitions The exclamation point symbol is an international symbol which serves as a reminder that all safety instructions should be read and understood before installation use maintenance and servicing is attempted When this symbol is displayed in this manual pay special attention to the specific safety information associated with the symbol WARNING A WARNING calls attention to a condition or possible situation that could cause injury to the operator CAUTION A CAUTION calls attention to a condition or possible situation that could damage or destroy the product or the operator s work ALPs User s Manual vi Safety Information Electrical Safety A Laser Light A Beckman Coulter Inc To prevent electrical
374. specific user s manual for the instrument ALPs User s Manual 14 14 Orbital Shaker ALP 14 4 Using the Orbital Shaker ALP in a Method To use the Orbital Shaker ALP in a method it must be installed in Hardware Setup refer to Section 1 3 1 Installing an ALP in Hardware Setup CAUTION When creating a method with an Orbital Shaker and a stack AN of labware first move the labware to another ALP preferably a passive ALP and then move it to the Orbital Shaker The offsets allowed with stacking may cause the labware to be gripped off center however moving labware from a passive ALP ensures it is gripped properly Using the Orbital Shaker ALP in a method includes e Establishing a Safe Maximum Shaking Speed Section 14 4 1 e Configuring a New Labware Type for Use on the Orbital Shaker ALP Section 14 4 2 e Controlling the Actions of an Orbital Shaker ALP Section 14 4 3 Stopping and Restarting a Method Section 14 4 4 14 4 1 Establishing a Safe Maximum Shaking Speed CAUTION Only labware compliant with the Society for Biomolecular Screening SBS proposed microplate standards is recommended for use on the Orbital Shaker ALP Non compliant labware may not be securely grasped by the ALP or may cause physical damage to the ALP WARNING Do not shake tip boxes tip box lids or reservoirs on the Orbital Shaker ALP The clamps on the ALP cannot hold tip boxes tip box lids or reservoirs securely duri
375. sposal ALP and the Span 8 Disposal ALP Each Disposal ALP must use the bagging extension designed for that ALP 2 Snap the bagging extension onto the Disposal ALP base by lining up the springs on the bagging extension with the cutouts on the Disposal ALP base Figure 12 3 Multichannel Disposal ALP 12 5 3 Apply downward force to the top of the bag ging extension The springs slip through to the inside of the Disposal ALP base and lock into the cutouts Figure 12 3 Bagging extension Adding bagging extension to Disposal ALP base Apply downward force to snap the springs into the cutouts and to align the grounding tab so that the grounding screw can be inserted Grounding tab and screw The screw is inserted through the tab and into the base at this location Disposal ALP base m Springs Second spring is on the opposite side of the bagging extension Cutout for springs The springs must snap through to the inside surface of the base Figure 12 3 Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide exploded 4 Inserta screw through the hole in the grounding tab on the bagging extension and into the threaded hole in the Disposal ALP base Figure 12 4 Note This screw is necessary for proper ESD grounding of the ALP 5 Slip the locating pins on the bottom of the Multichannel Disposal ALP into the l
376. ss to the microplate is completed the ALP remains clamped until a gripper move the Device Action step or the end of the method releases the microplate Note Ifa light curtain violation occurs while the clamp on the Positive Position ALP is in motion the motion is completed The state of the clamps on the Positive Position ALP do not change when the light curtain is violated or during a pause in a method Note The amount of force applied to accurately position a microplate depends upon the type of microplate placed on the Positive Position ALP When the Positive Position ALP is used in a method the force applied by the clamp is determined by the type of labware positioned on the ALP refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 7 Creating and Modifving Tip and Labware Types The force applied to clamp a microplate is a percentage of the total clamping force available To configure the Device Action step for the Positive Position ALP 1 Insert a Device Action step into the method view 2 From Device select the Positive Position ALP performing the required operation OR Click on the Positive Position ALP in the Current Deck Display to select it The configuration for the Positive Position ALP appears Figure 15 4 Note The deck position has a blue border in the Current Deck Display and is displayed to the right of Device Positive Position ALP 15 9 Biomek Software Method4 New i loj xi
377. ssible and stackable 1x1 ALP labware position Thumbscrews Figure 19 1 1 x 1 Passive ALP Note The 1 x 1 Passive ALP supports an LLS plate option which improves liquid level sensing and clot detection capabilities in labware positioned on the ALP refer to Section 19 1 1 1 Z x J Passive ALP with LLS Plate Option Beckman Coulter Inc Standard Passive ALPs 19 3 19 1 1 1 1x1 Passive ALP with LLS Plate Option The 1 x 1 Passive ALP stand supports a Liquid Level Sensing LLS plate option Figure 19 2 which when installed improves liquid level sensing capabilities in labware positioned on the 1 x 1 Passive ALP gt NX S8 The LLS plate option also improves clot dectection capabilities Note Labware positioned on a 1 x 1 Passive ALP with the LLS plate option installed is gripper accessible and stackable LLS plate mounting screw holes Four mounting screws are used to secure the LLS Plate to the 1 x 1 ALP There are two more screw holes on the opposite side Figure 19 2 LLS Plate Top View ALPs User s Manual 19 4 Standard Passive ALPs 19 1 1 1 1 Installing the LLS Plate Option on a1 x 1 Passive ALP To install the LLS plate complete the following 1 Turna 1 x 1 Passive ALP upside down 2 Position the LLS plate upside down in the center of the 1 x 1 Passive ALP stand Figure 19 3 Bottom of 1 x 1
378. ssive ALPs according to the instructions in the specific user s manuals for the instruments Removing High Density Passive ALPs from the Deck To remove High Density ALPs from the Biomek FX deck 1 Remove labware from the ALP 2 Loosen the thumbscrews on the base of the ALP 3 Lift the ALP straight up and off the deck so that the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP clear the locating holes on the deck Storage Return the High Density Passive ALP to its original packing materials and store in a dry dust free environmentally controlled area Note It is desirable to allow the High Density Passive ALP to air dry before returning it to the original packing materials Preventive Maintenance WARNING High Density ALPs may be contaminated from method uN solutions Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer To clean wipe all surfaces on the High Density Passive ALP with a soft cloth Beckman Coulter Inc 8 10 High Density Passive ALPs Beckman Coulter Inc High Density 4 x 3 Passive ALP NX S8 only 9 1 Overview The Biomek NX Span 8 High Density 4 x 3 ALP Figure 9 1 can hold up to twelve stacks of labware allowing more labware on the Biomek NX Span 8 deck at one time while using as few deck positions as possible It is accessible by the Span 8 Pod on the Biomek NX deck This ALP increases deck flexibility when a method requires access to large am
379. storage 11 9 troubleshooting 11 9 using in a method 11 5 Multichannel Disposal ALP defined 12 1 framing 12 15 installing protective shield blanking plate 12 11 preventive maintenance 12 16 storage 12 16 types 12 1 Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide deck positions for 12 7 defined 12 3 installing 12 7 mounting to the deck 12 8 removing 12 16 Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide deck positions 12 4 defined 12 2 12 4 mounting to the deck 12 4 removing 12 15 removing bagging extension 12 15 Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs 384 Channel defined 13 1 96 Channel defined 13 1 configuring multiple wash stations in the software 13 8 deck positions 13 5 framing 13 9 Framing Tool Adaptors 13 9 installing 13 4 mounting to the deck 13 5 preventive maintenance 13 14 removing 13 13 storage 13 13 supply tubing 13 5 troubleshooting 13 14 Beckman Coulter Inc Orbital Shaker ALP choosing Snap 14 35 clamping and unclamping labware 14 32 clamping and unclamping labware outside a methdod 14 45 command clamp 14 22 home 14 22 pulse 14 22 run 14 22 shake 14 22 stop 14 22 timed shake 14 22 unclamp 14 22 configuring a pulsing shake 14 29 configuring to run a profile 14 27 configuring to run a standard shaking procedure 14 23 configuring to run for a specified time 14 25 controlling a shaking procedure for a length of time outside a method 14 40 controlling a standard shaking procedure outside a method 14 39 controlling outside a meth
380. t a filter holder can be positioned inside a 1 x 1 ALP without damaging the microplate Note Labware including the filter holder is positioned on the Deck Layout in the Instrument Setup step Select the Location of SPE ALP on the Biomek deck Specify the Pod accessing the SPE stack gt FX Pod is available only if the Biomek instrument is configured as a dual pod instrument Pod1 is the default for a single pod Biomek FX system In a dual pod Biomek FX system the pod configured as the default pod is displayed in Pod If the other pod is desired select the pod from the drop down list Select a step that occurs after the SPE step or the Finish step to validate the step configuration ALPs User s Manual 16 12 Solid Phase Extraction SPE Vacuum Manifold 16 5 Removing the SPE ALP and SPE Collar Stand To remove the SPE ALP 1 Remove the vacuum attachment as directed by the manufacturer 2 Loosen the thumbscrews 3 Liftthe ALP in an upward motion to clear the locating pins from the deck To remove the SPE Collar Stand 1 Loosen the thumbscrews 2 Lift the SPE Collar Stand in an upward motion to clear the locating holes from the deck 16 6 Storage Return the SPE ALP to the original packing materials and store in a dry dust free environmentally controlled area Note It is desirable to allow the SPE ALP to air dry before returning it to the original packing materials 16 7 Preventive Maintena
381. t be clamped prior to homing 1 In Command select Home Figure 14 34 Advanced Manual Control OrbitalShakerALPO Command Home fed Go Abort Close Figure 14 34 Using Advanced Manual Control to home the microplate platform on an Orbital Shaker ALP 2 Choose Go The ALP homes the microplate platform OR Choose Abort to immediately stop the action in process 3 Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control 4 Choose Exit to close Manual Control Orbital Shaker ALP 14 47 14 6 Removing the Orbital Shaker ALP from the Deck To remove the Orbital Shaker ALP WARNING Disconnect main power before connecting or disconnecting uN CAN cables 1 Turn off power to Biomek instrument 2 Unplug the CAN communication cable from the CAN Port on the Orbital Shaker ALP 3 Unplug the CAN communication cable from the CAN Port on the Biomek instrument 4 Loosen the thumbscrews on the base of the ALP 5 Lift ALP straight up to clear the locating pins on the base of the ALP from the locating holes on the deck 14 7 Storage Return the Orbital Shaker ALP and CAN communications cable to the original packing materials and store in a dry dust free environmentally controlled area Note It is desirable to allow the Orbital Shaker ALP to air dry before returning it to the original packing materials 14 8 Preventive Maintenance Follow the appropriate decontamination and cleaning procedures outlined by the labor
382. t complete the entire step For example if the Biomek instrument is in the process of performing a Transfer step and an error occurs while it is aspirating selecting Snap results in completing the aspiration but not the Transfer step 14 4 4 1 Choosing Snap Snap allows the method to be modified without changing the original method When Snap is chosen a Continuation is created A Continuation is a new method consisting of the step causing the error any steps not yet completed and if applicable any incomplete substeps of the step which generated the error refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 25 11 2 Snapping a Continuation To use Snap 1 Choose Snap to create a Continuation refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 25 11 2 Snapping a Continuation 2 Delete all partially completed Orbital Shaker ALP Device Action steps 3 Reinsert the deleted Orbital Shaker ALP Device Action steps by inserting a new fe Device Action step into the Method View Figure 14 17 Device e Aa a Action Note A new Device Action step must be inserted for each Orbital Shaker ALP step deleted ALPs User s Manual 14 36 Orbital Shaker ALP 4 In Device select the desired OrbitalShakerALP OR Click on the Orbital Shaker ALP in the Current Deck Display to select it The configuration for the ALP appears Figure 14 18 Note Any devices installed in Hardware Setup except Tip Loaders and Device Controllers
383. t number 6485 36 in the opposite direction through the out pump head on the peristaltic pump Note The peristaltic pump must be connected to the Device Controller The Device Controller turns the pump On and Off as requested by the software refer to Appendix A Device Controller Attach the opposite end of the out hose to the waste reservoir Fill the source reservoir with the desired cleaning fluid Turn on the pump ALPs User s Manual 13 8 Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs 13 3 Configuring Multiple Wash Stations on an Instrument Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs and other wash ALPs are identified as wash stations in the Biomek Software To ensure that the correct wash station is used on an instrument with two or more wash stations each wash station must be configured to use a unique liquid type To configure a unique liquid type for a wash station 1 In the Liquid Type Editor create a new liquid type or copy an existing liquid type for the wash station for example create a new liquid type called WS1_Liquid Note Each liquid type must have a unique name for example WS1_Liquid or WS2_Liquid Note Refer to the Biomek Software Users Manual Chapter 8 2 Creating New Liquid Types for more information on creating new liquid types and Section 8 4 Copying and Pasting Liquid Types Within a Project File for more information on copying liquid types 2 In the Instrument Setup step double click the desired wash statio
384. t or behind e Ifthe ALP is placed in the third row from the front the gripper can grip from behind the ALP but not from the front e Ifthe ALP is placed in the back row it can grip only from the front The bottom panels on the instrument must be removed before mounting the Half Position Disposal ALP with Slide to the deck refer to Section 5 3 1 1 Removing a Bottom Panel Half Position Disposal ALP NX S8 only 5 9 5 3 1 1 Removing a Bottom Panel After choosing an appropriate deck position the panel that is adjacent to the chosen position must be removed to allow the slide to be directed through the gap between the deck and Plexiglas shield To remove a bottom panel 1 Remove the two screws that attach the bottom panel to the instrument base Figure 5 5 2 While holding the loosen panel remove the two screws that attach it to the side bracket where the Plexiglas shields are also attached Figure 5 5 3 Store the removed panel in a dry dust free environmentally controlled area ALPs User s Manual 5 10 Half Position Disposal ALP NX S8 only Beckman Coulter Inc Screws that attach bottom panel to instrument base Screws that attach bottom panel to side bracket Figure 5 5 Removing bottom panels 5 3 1 2 Mounting the ALP to the Deck To mount a Half Position Disposal ALP with Slide 1 Attach the slide to the ALP by lowering the into the grooves in the
385. tand to the deck using the thumbscrews on the base of the stand Figure 16 4 Beckman Coulter Inc d Phase Extraction SPE Vacuum Manifold ALP 16 7 16 3 Framing Instructions gt P Special framing instructions are necessary for the SPE ALP and the SPE Collar Stand 16 3 1 Special Framing for the SPE ALP The SPE ALP is framed using the AccuFrame but not the Framing Tool Adaptor To frame the SPE ALP 1 Attach the SPE ALP to the deck using the thumbscrews on the base of the ALP stand Figure 16 2 2 Place the AccuFrame inside the SPE ALP 3 Frame the ALP according to procedures outlined in the specific user s manual for the instrument 16 3 2 Special Framing for the SPE Collar Stand The SPE Collar Stand is framed using the AccuFrame and the Framing Tool Adaptor To frame the SPE ALP Collar Stand 1 Place the Framing Tool Adaptor on the SPE Collar Stand so that the locating pins on the bottom of the Framing Tool Adaptor align with the locating holes on the SPE Collar Stand Figure 16 5 CAUTION Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before attaching or removing AccuFrame from the instrument deck 2 Turn off power to Biomek instrument before connecting the AccuFrame 3 Plug the AccuFrame into an available CAN port on the Biomek tower WARNING Make sure the light curtain is not violated by the AccuFrame cable If the light curtain is violated the framing process halts immediately WARNING
386. tective Shield Blanking Plate on the Biomek FX WARNING To reduce risk of personal injury operate only with all AN protective shields in place When components of the Biomek FX instrument are installed so that they extend beyond the edge of the work table a protective bottom shield must be installed by the Beckman Coulter Service Engineer to ensure operator protection on the side overhanging the table This protective bottom shield contains a solid blanking plate and a cutout blanking plate Figure 17 11 When the Biomek FX instrument does not extend beyond the edge of the work table the solid blanking plate is installed To accommodate the slide on a Span 8 Disposal ALP the solid blanking plate is replaced with the cutout blanking plate To accommodate the slides of two Disposal ALPs Multichannel or Span 8 the solid blanking plate and cutout blanking plate are removed leaving an opening for two slides Note When the Span 8 Disposal ALP is in deck positions R1 R4 L1 and L4 no modifications to the deck blanking plates are required There are eight deck positions available for a Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide Figure 17 10 lt LIRI lt L2R2 L3 R3 L4R4 Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide left positions right positions Figure 17 10 Span 8 Disposal ALP with Slide deck positions for a Biomek FX ALPs User s Manual 17 16 Span 8 Dis
387. tely according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer WARNING Disconnect main power before connecting or disconnecting CAN cables To mount the Tip Loader ALP FPPP 1 Turn off power to main unit before installing any active ALP 2 Position the Tip Loader ALP so the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP slip into locating holes on the deck and the air input output aligns horizontally with the ALP edge ALPs User s Manual 23 4 Tip Loader ALP 3 Attach the CAN communications cable Figure 23 2 to the CAN communications Port Sensor Verifies the presence of a tip box CAN communications port Address switch Air inlet Figure 23 2 Tip Loader ALP Connections 4 Attach the opposite end of the CAN communications cable to an available CAN Port on the instrument tower or Device Controller Note Make sure the cable routing does not interfere with the operation of the Biomek FX 5 Verify that the address switch on the outside back of the Tip Loader is preset to zero 0 Figure 23 2 Note The default setting for the address switch is zero 0 If only one Tip Loader ALP is on the deck the address switch should be left at the default setting If multiple Tip Loader ALPs are on the deck set or reset the address switch to a unique address between one 1 and F Beckman Coulter Inc Tip Loader ALP 23 5 6 Attach the Tip L
388. tems as the trash receptacle is capable of holding The gripper can drop most types of used labware and tips directly into the Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide Note Separate Multichannel Disposal ALPs with Slides must be used for disposing of tips and labware Used tips may stick to the slide which could cause labware to jam in the chute Check the slide periodically during the method run to ensure it is clear of tips Note Since the slide of a Multichannel Disposal ALP extends beyond the edge of the Biomek deck the deck must be modified to accommodate the slide Refer to Section 12 4 Installing Protective Shield Blanking Plate for more information on modifying the deck to accommodate a Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide CAUTION When using the Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide remove the bagging extension to avoid collisions between the pod and the Multichannel Disposal ALP Q Q I Aa S f a A A Disposal lt N ALP base iy Multichannel Disposal chute mounting screws Multichannel L Disposal chute Figure 12 2 Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide ALPs User s Manual 12 4 Multichannel Disposal ALP 12 2 Installing the Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide A A A Beckman Coulter Inc Installing the Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide includes choosing a deck position and mounting the ALP to the deck
389. tes that the Device Controller is on Beckman Coulter Inc PPR E gt HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 6 9 6 2 2 Installing the HDR Circulating Reservoir on the Deck The HDR circulating reservoir may be placed on any open centered deck position such as on a 1 x 1 Passive ALP or a 4 x 3 High Density ALP To place a circulating reservoir on the deck WARNING SPILL HAZARD WARNING Do not kink the hoses WARNING Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous materials WARNING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials WARNING Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer 1 Place the circulating reservoir labware on the desired deck position Note The circulating reservoir labware must be placed on an open centered deck position to accommodate the inlet and outlet connections on the bottom of the reservoir Note If adding multiple Circulating Reservoirs to the deck it is recommended that all Circulating Reservoirs are placed in the same column if possible 2 Connect one end of the smaller L35 Pharmed tubing to the inlet quick disconnect fitting on the bottom of the reservoir Figure 6 4 Note The inlet quick disconnect fitting is located near the center of the reservoir ALPs User s
390. the laboratory safety officer for appropriate biohazard bags and procedures CAUTION The Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide must be mounted in the 2nd or 3rd row in the left and right outside columns of the Biomek FX deck to avoid collisions WARNING To reduce risk of personal injury operate only with all protective shields in place PRPRPRPEPPPRPRP PPR PPP BE Safety Information XV WARNING The waste bag may be contaminated Follow the appropriate decontamination and disposal procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer WARNING Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous materials WARNING Observe cautionary procedures as defined by the laboratory safety officer when using toxic pathologic or radioactive materials CAUTION Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer CAUTION SPILL HAZARD CAUTION Do not spill liquids on or around the instrument Wipe up any spills immediately according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer WARNING The Multichannel Disposal ALP may be contaminated Follow the appropriate decontamination procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer Multichannel Tip Wash ALPs WARNING SPILL HAZARD WARNING Do not kink the hoses WARNING Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazardous materials WARN
391. the Test Tube Rack ALP Note Ifusing a partially full tube rack place an equal number of test tubes on each side of the test tube rack or add blank test tubes to the opposite side to balance it This helps to provide a level surface for the septum piercing tips and equalizes the force distribution when the tips press down on the septa covered tubes ALPs User s Manual 22 12 Test Tube Rack ALPs Septum Piercing Test Tube Rack Position on ALP such that position labeled A1 is to the front and left of the position Figure 22 9 Septum Piercing Tube Rack positioned on ALP left facing 4 Position one of the side plates so that back slotted thumbscrew is aligned with the the bottom of the screw hole on the left side of the ALP position 5 Push up on the slotted thumbscrew to engage the threads with the screw hole and turn the thumbscrew counterclockwise to fasten the side plate to the ALP 6 Position the other side plate so that the front slotted thumbscrew is aligned with the bottom of the screw hole on the right side of the ALP position Beckman Coulter Inc Test Tube Rack ALPs 22 13 7 Push up on the slotted thumbscrew to engage the threads with the screw hole and turn the thumbscrew counterclockwise to fasten the side plate to the ALP Jae plates aN SSS D J Slotted thumbscrews Fasten one of these to screw holes on ALP base Figure 22 10 Septum Piercin
392. tion containing the tipbox by selecting that position in the Current Deck Display ALPs User s Manual 18 8 Span 8 Tip Wash ALP 11 Choose Next Manual Teaching appears Figure 18 5 Graphic alignment tool Delta value The graphic alignment tool is a visual representation of the tip The magnitude of change applied to the tips each small circle and the framing points large circle The small time a directional button is selected or when the circle is moved until it represents the tips position in relation to graphic alignment tool is manipulated the framing points on the ALP Manual Teaching The tips should be about a half centimeter above the ALP Drag the circle to where the tips are in relation to the white dots and press Go Press Next gt when the tips are directly above their target Waring Directional buttons The directional buttons move the pod by the amount shown in Delta with each press of a button Delta 0 05 cm Setup a Back J Left 4 Right Teach X Y i eac b Fwd Down JV Hysteresis compensation lt Total Moved From Start cm TeachZ jo 0 p p Reset Total Move From Start cm Each time a directional button is Ly selected the pod moves by the amount shown in Delta The total amount moved in each direction
393. tion shown in Figure 5 2 An opening like the one in Figure 5 2 should be created ALPs User s Manual 5 4 Half Position Disposal ALP NX S8 only CAUTION Make sure the bag is tight to tops of the flanges The gripper A N tool must have enough room to move over the ALP 6 Ensure the bag is tight to the tops of the flanges Figure 5 2 Rubber band placement Position the rubber band so it is secured using the notches Tops of flanges Bag placement To create an opening for the disposed items place the bag inside the bagging extension using the dashed lines as a guide Figure 5 2 Half Position Disposal ALP rubber band placement Beckman Coulter Inc Half Position Disposal ALP NX S8 only 5 5 7 Pull the bag through the Half Position Disposal ALP so the opening looks like the photo in Figure 5 3 Correct opening for disposed Pull the bag through the ALP to create the correct opening for disposed tips ition Disposal ALP with correct bag placement Figure 5 3 Half Pos ALPs User s Manual 5 6 Half Position Disposal ALP NX S8 only A A A A A Beckman Coulter Inc 5 2 2 Removing a Half Position Disposal ALP WARNING The waste bag may be contaminated Follow the appropriate decontamination and disposal procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer WARNING Use an appropriately contained environment when using hazar
394. tive Position ALP 15 5 Controlling the Positive Position ALP Outside a Method To control the Positive Position ALP outside a method use Advanced Manual Control for e Clamping or Unclamping Labware on a Positive Position ALP Section 15 5 1 Verifying the Sensor on the Positive Position ALP Operates Properly Section 15 5 2 Note Generally the only time the sensor is verified is during troubleshooting Verifying the Positive Position ALP Recognizes a Type of Labware Section 15 5 3 Beckman Coulter Inc Positive Position ALP 15 11 15 5 1 Clamping or Unclamping Labware ona Positive Position ALP To clamp labware on a Positive Position ALP l 2 3 nH Ua A Choose Instrument gt Manual Control Manual Control appears Choose Advanced Controls Select the desired Positive Position ALP Advanced Manual Control for the selected Positive Position ALP appears Figure 15 5 Advanced Manual Control PositivePositionALP1 Command Clamp l From Command choose Clamp Unclamp VerifyLabware or VerifiyNoLabware Figure 15 5 Advanced Manual Control for a Positive Position ALP From Command choose Clamp Choose Go The clamps actuate Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control 7 Choose Exit to close Manual Control To unclamp labware from a Positive Position ALP I 2 NY HD WN A Choose Instrument gt Manual Control Manual Control appears
395. tiwabe A 3 Figure A 3 Digital connections attach devices here 2 0 0c eee ee eee A 8 Figure A 4 Advanced Manual Control for a selected Device Controller with channel HV3 onA 9 Figure B 1 Source Waste Sensor Controller 2 0 0 0 eens B 2 Figure B 2 Source Waste Sensor nuun Cede ns cane Rae daa kadesweaadetaeiaanes B 3 Figure B 3 Source Waste Sensor Controller 0 0 0 0 0c eee ee B 4 Figure B 4 SenSOt 4 656045 64k 4 2a EER tdri ans EH AEE ER EKER EEA EOT Ea AER KARR EES B 5 Figure B 5 Deck Editor with wash ALP 64 14 2 t50t44400 46046ned2404b R0S004 404 RE5 B 7 Figure B 6 Position Properties for selected wash ALP 0 ce eee eee B 7 Figure B 7 SourceWasteSensor selected in Sensor Device 00 0c eee eee eee ee B 8 Figure B 8 Source Waste Sensor error 0 2 0 eect enenes B 8 Figure B 9 Advanced Manual Control for a selected Source Waste Sensor B 9 ALPs User s Manual List of Tables Table 3 1 Example of a Method Where Bar Codes are used for Decision Making 3 10 Table 3 2 Troubleshooting the Bar Code Reader ALP sissscsissessscsescissssveadsostsasescsecsoutsosavavencaiaes 3 12 Table 4 1 Troubleshooting the Drainable Refillable Reservoir ALP ceceseeseeneereeeeeeeeees 4 19 Table 6 1 Troubleshooting the HDR Pin Drying ALP oo ec ecceceeceteceeeeeeeeeeseecsaeenteenees 6 44 Table 6 2 Troubleshooting the Circulating ReServoir cc cee
396. tne n en neeees 18 5 18 4 Removing the Span 8 Tip Wash ALP 2 0 00 18 11 1S3 SIO Onar e EE tea ek wd ee ae a i ee es WS oe ee ae 18 12 18 6 Preventive Mamitenantes 22ccacceaehecSeesdaxe aretha eeenseees Sue 18 12 18 7 WroubleshoonG lt 2adts nea ei vue vetadua tents tads wand een Oe eateeas 18 12 19 Standard Passive ALPs 19 OVERVIEW idk bi ba RANGA aha Ea RR Sd he Ed CA ae Be AAA ae 19 1 Ia IA Passive ALP oc iyas cere aee paika aaae eee aaia a kiant 19 2 19 1 2 1x1 Passive ALP with Indented Sides 2 0 19 6 191 3 1X3 Passive ALP ih 0teentee stu cnudne teka Eer aaee e 19 7 19 14 TXS Passive ALP nc aay siitia e aed E EA KAES 19 8 19 2 Installing Standard Passive ALPs 0 0c eee eee eens 19 9 19 2 1 Choosing a Deck Position 0 0 00 00 ccc eee 19 9 19 2 2 Mounting Standard Passive ALPs to the Deck 19 9 19 3 Framing Insivctons 444 4 6262440 exdeas buash cei daaddedeseedeeeatuee 19 9 19 4 Removing Standard Passive ALPs from the Deck 0004 19 9 195 TAOS eentu peg aed ee REA Rae Ra ERS Ree eee EKER 19 10 19 6 Preventive Maintenance 2544406 3 sc4sGav eve towebhaeeG vei dan deena de 19 10 20 Stirring ALP 20 1 OVGVICW sais di Aned Sad eRe ieee hoe EE EREET EEEIEE KIRA SS 20 1 20 2 Installing the Stirring ALP 26 24 42 4 20044 28405624 46R26004 646080040883 20 3 20 2 1 Mounting the Stirring ALP to the Deck 0 20 3 20 3 Framing Instructions 2
397. to a height set for the labware type before clamping and incorrect settings may result in inaccurate clamping 6 Choose Go The Magnetic Bead ALP clamps the selected labware A CAUTION Make sure the labware on the Magnetic Bead ALP matches 7 Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control 8 Choose Exit to close Manual Control Beckman Coulter Inc Magnetic Bead ALP 10 31 To unclamp labware from a Magnetic Bead ALP 1 Choose Instrument gt Manual Control Manual Control appears 2 Choose Advanced Controls A list of all the installed pods and devices appears 3 Select the desired Magnetic Bead ALP Advanced Manual Control for the selected Magnetic Bead ALP appears From Command choose Unclamp Choose Go Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control NY DH Wn A Choose Exit to close Manual Control 10 5 5 Verifying the Sensor on the Magnetic Bead ALP Recognizes a Labware Type The sensor on the Magnetic Bead ALP detects all of the default microplates and lids installed with the Biomek Software However some other microplate designs may not be recognized by the sensor To verify if the sensor on the Magnetic Bead ALP recognizes a specific labware type 1 Place the desired labware type on the Magnetic Bead ALP 2 Choose Instrument gt Manual Control Manual Control appears 3 Choose Advanced Controls A list of all the installed pods and devices appears 4 Select the desired Magnetic Bead ALP
398. ual Control for a continuous shaking motion on an Orbital Shaker ALP 2 In Shaking speed indicate the desired shaking speed in RPM Note The minimum Shaking speed allowed is 0 RPM while the maximum Shaking speed allowed is 1800 RPM Refer to Section 14 4 1 Establishing a Safe Maximum Shaking Speed for more information 3 In Time to reach full speed enter the duration in seconds the Orbital Shaker ALP takes to reach full shaking speed Note The minimum value allowed in Time to reach full speed is 1 second while the maximum value allowed in Time to reach full speed is 600 seconds 4 In Direction select whether the orbital shaking motion shakes in a Clockwise or CounterClockwise direction Note The default Direction is CounterClockwise ALPs User s Manual 14 40 Orbital Shaker ALP 5 Choose Go The ALP shakes the microplate platform according to the specified parameters OR Choose Abort to immediately stop the action in process 6 Choose Close to close Advanced Manual Control 7 Choose Exit to close Manual Control 14 5 2 Manually Controlling a Shaking Procedure of a Specific Length of Time To configure the Orbital Shaker ALP to shake labware a specific length of time Note The default configuration for a timed shaking sequence is to shake labware for 10 seconds in a CounterClockwise direction with a 1 one second ramp up to 300 revolutions per minute RPM 1 In Command select Timed Shake Figure
399. uctions Special framing instructions are necessary for Test Tube Rack ALPs which are framed using the AccuFrame and the Framing Tool Adaptor Each deck position occupied by a Test Tube Rack ALP can be framed for increased pipetting accuracy however framing only one of the positions is generally sufficient Both the 1 x 2 Test Tube Rack ALP and the 1 x 3 Test Tube Rack ALP are framed using the following instructions To frame a Test Tube Rack ALP 1 Place the Framing Tool Adaptor on the x 2 Test Tube Rack ALP Figure 22 3 or the 1 x 3 Test Tube Rack ALP Figure 22 4 so that the locating pins on the bottom of the Framing Tool Adaptor align with the locating holes on the Test Tube Rack ALP AccuFrame Framing Tool Adaptor Locating holes 1x2 Test Tube Rack ALP Figure 22 3 Framing for the 1 x 2 Test Tube Rack ALP left facing ALPs User s Manual 22 6 Test Tube Rack ALPs Framing Tool Adaptor Locating holes 1x 3 Test Tube Rack ALP Figure 22 4 Framing for the 1 x 3 Test Tube Rack ALP left facing CAUTION Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before attaching or AN removing AccuFrame from the instrument deck 2 Turn off power to main unit before connecting the AccuFrame 3 Plug the AccuFrame into any available CAN port on the Biomek FX tower WARNING Make sure the light curtain
400. uctions Section 10 3 e Using the Magnetic Bead ALP in a Method Section 10 4 e Controlling the Magnetic Bead ALP Outside a Method Section 10 5 e Removing the Magnetic Bead ALP Section 10 6 e Storage Section 10 7 e Preventive Maintenance Section 10 8 e Troubleshooting Section 10 9 ALPs User s Manual DUETS LIIL X Lo WAN E oa 10 2 Thumbscrews Figure 10 1 Magnetic Bead ALP o IE ay D z O O c z xX O a Magnetic Bead ALP 10 3 10 2 Installing the Magnetic Bead ALP Installing the Magnetic Bead ALP includes e Choosing any standard deck position Note After a deck position has been chosen on which to physically mount the ALP configure the ALP in the Deck Editor refer to the Biomek Software User 5 Manual Chapter 5 Preparing and Managing the Deck e Mounting the Magnetic Bead ALP to the Deck Section 10 2 1 e Using Interchangeable Magnets Section 10 2 2 10 2 1 Mounting the Magnetic Bead ALP to the Deck To mount the Magnetic Bead ALP to the Biomek deck CAN cables 1 Turn off power to the Biomek instrument before mounting any ALP f WARNING Disconnect main power before connecting or disconnecting 2 Position the Magnetic Bead ALP so the locating pins on the bottom of the ALP slip into locating holes on the deck 3 Fasten the Magnetic Bead ALP to the deck using the thumbscrews on the base of the A
401. uence A pulsing shake sequence applies a series of shaking motions to a piece of labware The Pulse configuration shakes labware in one direction at the indicated speed for the specified length of time followed by shaking the labware at the same speed for the same length of time in the opposite direction The labware is shaken in this manner in alternating directions the specified number of times Note The default configuration for a pulsing shake sequence on the ALP is to pulse labware 1 time each direction for 1 second at 300 RPM The default values do not correspond with the parameters displayed in Table 14 1 Refer to Table 14 1 for recommended shaking speeds for tested labware and fluid combinations WARNING The type and amount of fluid being shaken will impact the UN maximum shaking speed for all types of labware Conduct testing according to the procedures outlined by the laboratory safety officer to determine the safe maximum shaking speed for any type and amount of liquid To configure the Orbital Shaker ALP to shake labware using a pulsing motion 1 In Command select Pulse Figure 14 21 Biomek Software Method6 Development File Edit Project Instrument Execution Options Help D ei mR a aeoe a r 0 o x Ea a Start Device OrbitalShakeALPO x Tenure Instrument Setup Command Setup eyo Wii Load tips from TL1 Pulse speed 300 RPM 1 1800 4 Device Action Time to pulse fi seconds 0 5 5 ig Finish Number of times t
402. ues Show original values for F Gripper OffstX fl cm 0 AP96_200uL_Barier gt I Gripper OfseY om fo I Gripper Offsez om o I GiipperSqueee oom pe I Gripper Unsqueeee om fT I Gripper Speed Limit 7 7 IMethod2 Tutorial BiomekFX ETC 0 00 03 Figure 21 12 Storage ALP Move with Advanced Controls selected Beckman Coulter Inc Test Tube Rack ALPs 22 1 Overview Test Tube Rack ALPs are open structured passive ALPs that hold test tube racks or septum piercing tube racks on the Biomek deck during liquid handling procedures Test Tube Rack ALPs ensure that test tubes are accessible by a Span 8 Pod at a predetermined height Test Tube Rack ALPs come in two sizes e 1x 2 holds up to two racks of test tubes e 1x3 holds up to three racks of test tubes Both the 1 x 2 and 1 x 3 Test Tube Rack ALPs can be positioned with the overhang on the left or right of the ALP When the overhang is to the left of the ALP the ALP is left facing Figure 22 1 Conversely when the overhang is to the right the ALP is right facing Figure 22 2 Test Tube Rack ALPs are mounted in specific deck positions based on the overhangs left or right orientation refer to 22 2 1 Selecting the Deck Positions for a Test Tube Rack ALP CAUTION Different sizes of test tubes must not be mixed in one test uN tube rack To avoid a collision between the pod and Test Tube Rack ALP all of the test tubes in t
403. umn Figure 19 6 Note Labware positioned on the 1 x 3 Passive ALP is gripper accessible and stackable 1x3 ALP Labware positions Thumbscrews Two thumbscrews are used to secure the 1 x 3 ALP to the deck Figure 19 6 1 x 3 Passive ALP ALPs User s Manual 19 8 Standard Passive ALPs 19 1 4 1x5 Passive ALP A 1x5 Passive ALP occupies one column on the Biomek FX deck and holds up to five pieces of labware Figure 19 7 Note Labware positioned on the 1 x 5 Passive ALP is not gripper accessible or stackable 1x5 ALP Labware positions Thumbscrews Two thumbscrews are used to secure the 1 x 5 ALP to the deck Beckman Coulter Inc Figure 19 7 1 x 5 Passive ALP Standard Passive ALPs 19 9 19 2 Installing Standard Passive ALPs Installing Standard Passive ALPs to the deck includes choosing the deck position and mounting the ALP to the deck 19 2 1 Choosing a Deck Position Use the Deck Editor to determine where the ALP may be mounted on the deck Positions capable of supporting the ALP are indicated by dashed lines Note After a deck position has been chosen on which to physically mount the ALP configure the ALP in the Deck Editor refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 5 Preparing and Managing the Deck 19 2 2 Mounting Standard Passive ALPs to the Deck To mount Standard Pas
404. up Command E Setup Wi Load tips from TL1 4 Device Action g Finish Labware Pause Comment Method6 BiomekFX BiomekFx ETC 0 00 22 Figure 14 23 Device Action step configured to actuate the clamps on an Orbital Shaker ALP 14 4 3 7 Homing the Microplate Platform on the Orbital Shaker ALP Homing the microplate platform ensures that the Biomek instrument can accurately access labware on the ALP for pipetting operations The microplate platform on the Orbital Shaker ALP can be homed at any time during a method run as long as a shaking operation is not already in process on the ALP The home position for the microplate shaking platform is in the center of the ALP Note The microplate platform automatically homes at the beginning of each method No configuration is necessary beyond the selection of Home in the step configuration To configure the Orbital Shaker ALP to home the microplate platform during a method run ALPs User s Manual 14 34 Orbital Shaker ALP In Command select Home Figure 14 24 The microplate platform moves to the center of the ALP H Biomek Software Method6 Development File Edit Project Instrument Execution Options Help De eat ORS s BOO ale 0 ol xea B Start Device OrbitalShaker LPO gt QE Instrument Setup Command A COU May wii Load tips from TL1 o Device Action g Finish Transfer
405. ure 14 4 Figure 14 5 Figure 14 6 Figure 14 7 Figure 14 8 Figure 14 9 Figure 14 10 Figure 14 11 Figure 14 12 Figure 14 13 Figure 14 14 Figure 14 15 Figure 14 16 Figure 14 17 Figure 14 18 Figure 14 19 Figure 14 20 Figure 14 21 Figure 14 22 Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide 0 0 0 0000005 12 2 Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide 00 0 0 cee eee eee 12 3 Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide exploded 12 5 Multichannel Disposal ALP without Slide grounding tab and screw 12 6 Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide 0 0 0 2 ee eee eee 12 8 Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide thumbscrews bottom view 12 9 Multichannel Disposal ALP slide attachment 0 0 000 ee 12 9 Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide ground screw placement 12 10 Multichannel Disposal ALP with Slide deck positions 12 11 Left side bottom shield with solid and cutout blanking plates 12 12 Right side bottom shield with solid and cutout blanking plates 12 13 96 Channel Tip Wash ALP 625 43 satee sev arbowe thereto seicaboaw estas 13 2 384 Channel Tip Wash ALP 0 cece eee eee 13 3 Tip wash reservoir and tip wash stand to create the 96 Channel Tip Wash ALP 13 6 Labware Properties for a Wash Station ALP 00 0000 13 8 AccuFrame Framing Tool Adaptor and the 96 Channel Tip Wash AL
406. using in a method 23 6
407. varys depending on the ALP Each ALP has specific input output power requirements so each connecting wire is labeled to ensure appropriate connections Refer to the individual ALP chapters for information on the appropriate connections ALPs User s Manual A 6 Device Controller A 3 Setting Address Switches When more than one Device Controller is attached to the system a separate address must be set for each one to enable the software to identify the Device Controller being used for specific operations Each address is set using the address switches Figure A 2 To set Device Controller addresses 1 Make sure the power to the Biomek instrument is off 2 Make sure the power switch on the Device Controller is off Figure A 2 3 For the first Device Controller check to make sure address switch 2 is set to 0 4 On the first Device Controller using a flathead screwdriver turn address switch 1 to 0 5 On the second Device Controller turn address switch 1 to 1 6 Continue setting address switch 1 in increments of 1 for the first 16 Device Controllers on the system 7 To set addresses for the second 16 Device Controllers used on the system move address switch 2 to 1 This makes the next 16 addresses available on address switch 1 8 After setting address switch 2 to 1 set address switch to 0 again to set the address for the next Device Controller on the system 9 Continue setting address switch 1 in increments
408. veling the Positive Position ALP 0000 00 ee 15 5 15 2 3 Aligning the Top of the Positive Position ALP with the Multichannel Head or Span 8 Probes 0 000000 15 6 15 3 Framing Instructions 34 6 604629 44 na 5 bath oes Che VR REN OE AV ERNE EEE 15 7 15 4 Using the Positive Position ALP ina Method 00002000 15 8 15 5 Controlling the Positive Position ALP Outside a Method 15 10 15 5 1 Clamping or Unclamping Labware on a Positive Position ALP 15 11 15 5 2 Verifying the Sensor on the Positive Position ALP Operates Properly y 23c0e 5 beeibueaet es EINER a eee eee bane 15 12 15 5 3 Verifying the Positive Position ALP Recognizes a Type of Labware 15 13 15 6 Removing the Positive Position ALP from the Deck 15 14 I5 ROTA S Ss onare ta Saket reaoneeda dee tae a E eda aaa aa se bod eewne 15 14 13 8 Preventive Maintenance 4 si5 dc 62d KG EAA Ra AI ERE KA RRR E ROR TARE ROS 15 14 15 9 Troubleshooting resarcir teretes Peo bey ee ee heh eee EEN EOS 15 14 ALPs User s Manual xxviii Table of Contents 16 Solid Phase Extraction SPE Vacuum Manifold ALP 16 1 OVGIVIOW ovate ecatnnge beahees tien E aAG reece Ge eee es enna eas 16 1 16 1 1 Components of the SPE ALP 0 0 eee 16 3 16 2 Installing the SPE ALP and SPE Collar Stand 004 16 5 16 2 1 Choosing Deck Positions for the SPE ALP and Collar Stand 16 5 16 2 2 Mounting the SP
409. vice and its command Comment A j Method6 BiomekFx BiomekFX ETC 0 00 10 Figure 10 16 Device Action step for the Magnetic Bead ALP Beckman Coulter Inc Magnetic Bead ALP 10 23 2 In Command indicate the desired action for the Magnetic Bead ALP e Disengage lowers the magnet to its home position e Engage raises the magnet to the engage position specified in the Labware Type Editor for the labware and magnet type Note The Engage command automatically senses and clamps labware if specified in the Labware Type Editor Refer to Section 10 4 3 Configuring LabwareTypes for Use on the Magnetic Bead ALP for more information e Clamp actuates the clamp to hold the labware in place and flatten warped microplates e Unclamp releases the clamp to allow the labware to be removed from the ALP Note Clamping and unclamping of labware occurs automatically if Clamp during pipetting or engaging magnet is selected in the Labware Type Editor for the specified labware type refer to Section 10 4 3 Configuring LabwareTypes for Use on the Magnetic Bead ALP e VerifyLabware verifies that labware is currently on the Magnetic Bead ALP an error displays and the method stops if no labware is found e VerifyNoLabware verifies that there is currently no labware on the Magnetic Bead ALP an error displays and the method stops if labware is found Note The Engage command requires further configur
410. vice that holds a filtered microplate to protect it from damage Note The process of stacking the components of the SPE ALP during a method creates the SPE ALP The SPE ALP can be assembled and or disassembled during a method The two ALP stands are e SPE ALP Stand supports the SPE ALP Base Figure 16 2 where filtration occurs and occupies a position in the back row of the Biomek FX deck the SPE ALP Stack is constructed on the SPE ALP Stand Note The SPE ALP is the combination of the SPE ALP Base and the SPE ALP Stand The SPE ALP Base and the SPE ALP Stand are treated as a single unit the SPE ALP in the Biomek Software SPE Collar Stand supports the SPE Collar Manifold in the software Figure 16 3 and occupies a deck position adjacent to the SPE ALP Stand in the same column Note The two ALP stands occupy two deck positions on the DNA Preparation Deck Layout ALPs User s Manual 16 4 Solid Phase Extraction SPE Vacuum Manifold A SPE Collar Manifold Referred to as the Manifold in the SPE step from the Devices step palette SPE ALP Base The SPE ALP Base connects to the e vacuum and all i filtered fluids are drained through the SPE ALP s SPE ALP Base Combination of i the SPE ALP SPE ALP Stand Base and the ig i Supports the SPE SPE ALP Stand EN F pia ALP Base N Jo Thumbscrews Tr Figure 16 2 SPE Collar Manifold SPE ALP Base and SPE A
411. ving 7 5 storage 7 6 troubleshooting 7 6 High Density Passive ALPs 4x3 ALP adding an LLS plate 8 4 deck positions 8 6 8 7 defined 8 3 installing an LLS plate option 8 5 mounting to the deck 8 6 4x4 ALP defined 8 2 mounting to the deck 8 8 defined 8 1 framing 8 8 installing 8 6 preventive maintenance 8 8 removing 8 8 storage 8 8 L labware applying labels to 3 5 Labware Types configuring for use on Magnetic Bead ALP 10 17 LLS plate option installing on a 1 x 1 ALP 19 4 M Magnetic Bead ALP adding to the Deck 10 10 clamping or unclamping labware on 10 30 configuring Device Action Step for 10 21 controlling outside a method 10 24 defined 10 1 defining per labware offsets for 10 13 determining magnet engage height for labware types 10 27 disengaging magnet 10 26 engaging magnet 10 25 framing 10 7 homing the magnet 10 24 how it performs automatically 10 20 installing 10 3 installing and configuring in Hardware Setup 10 8 installing magnets 10 5 interchangeable magnets 10 5 installing 10 5 preventive maintenance 10 33 removing 10 33 removing magnets from 10 7 storage 10 33 supported interchangeable magnets 10 5 troubleshooting 10 34 using in a method 10 8 using labware with 10 17 Microplate Shaking ALP controlling outside a method 11 6 defined 11 1 framing 11 5 installing 11 3 installing in Hardware Setup 11 5 mounting to the deck 11 3 ALPs User s Manual preventive maintenance 11 9 removing 11 9
412. ware offsets for any labware types that extend below the ALP surface 1 Select Instrument gt Deck Editor Deck Editor appears 2 Select the deck position to modify 3 Select Properties OR Double click the deck position OR Right click the desired position and select Properties Position Properties appears ALPs User s Manual 10 14 Magnetic Bead ALP 4 Choose More to expand Position Properties if necessary Figure 10 10 Position Properties Name MagB ead ALP Type MagBeadALP x cm Y cm Z cm Precision Pod1 Coordinates 24 434 6 737 fa 5 7 Not Framed Pod2 Coordinates faa 434 737 j 5 7 Not Framed P Podi Advanced MC Teach C Pod2 Manual Teach Auto Teach Device ttnonett x Device Inder xem Yiem Ziem Labware O ffset 0 635 0 635 fo Per labware Offsets Position Span fi 4 087 9 837 Min Safe Height 2 8 em OK Cancel Figure 10 10 Position Properties Beckman Coulter Inc Magnetic Bead ALP 10 15 5 Choose Per Labware Offsets Per Labware Offsets appears Figure 10 11 Per Labware Offsets AP384_30uL AP96_200uL AP96_200uL_Barrier AP96_200uL_LLS AP9B_20uL AP96_20uL_Barrier AP96_20uL_LLS BCDeep96Round BCDeep96S quare BCFlatS6 BCFullReservoir BCSPECollar BCTuberack_10mm BCTuberack_12mm BCTuberack_13mm BCUpsideDownT ipBoxLid Collar_36mm CollarSpacer_23mm CostarConeS6R ound CostarDeep9BS quare CostarFlat384S quare CostarFlat384S quareLid F
413. with the desired deck position it is necessary to tell the software where the circulating reservoir is placed on the deck in an Instrument Setup step for obstacle avoidance To add a circulating reservoir to the deck 1 Insert an Instrument Setup step at the start of the method OR Select the first Instrument Setup step found in the method The Instrument Setup step configuration appears Figure 6 13 Note The first Instrument Setup step must be located before any pod movement for obstacle avoidance Biomek Software Method1 New Oo x File Edit Project Instrument Execution Options Help D w OAS B lo gt a gt 0 o x Ea A Start Deck HOR Deck x JV Pause to confirm setup Pause for bar code input Instrument Setup Labware Category e Sains IV verify Pod Setup Configure IB Finish BAJE BCFulReser BCUpsideE Biomekz00 BiomekFKH BiomekFXF FanShroud FilterHolder IMReservoir Labware Category Used to filter labware types to display only labware of a selected category Method1 BiomekFX BiomekFx ETC 0 00 09 Figure 6 13 Instrument Setup step configuration 2 Place the BiomekFXHDRCirculatingWashReservoir labware type on the position s that are associated with a WashPump in the Deck Editor refer to the Biomek Software User s Manual Chapter 15 2 4 Populating the Deck with Labware Note Use Labware Category to filter the
414. xecution Options Help De eB AS seMloe al yw ol lt ea 5 x Deck Position w n D m T Device n olk 5 Device Action Tip Loader G Instrument Setul P Transfer 2 Combine eS Move Labware Pause Comment lg Finish Instrument Setup device performing the o Device Action Indicates the location of the action on the deck Device Action Step Configuration Method View specifies an operation performed on a The Device Action wash station ALP caption indicates the device and its status The Device Action step configuration Method3 BiomekFx BiomekFX ETC 0 00 10 Beckman Coulter Inc Figure 6 24 Device Action step for the Circulating Reservoir 3 In Command indicate the desired state for the Wash Pump On or Off Note The Wash Pump automatically stops when the Finish step is executed HDR Pin Drying ALP and Reservoirs FX only 6 39 6 6 2 2 Configuring the Device Action Step for the HDR Pin Drying ALP To configure the Device Action step for the HDR Pin Drying ALP Figure 6 24 1 Insert a Device Action step into the Method View 2 In Device select the Fan performing the required operation OR Click on the HDR Pin Drying ALP in the Current Deck Display to select it The configuration for the HDR Pin Drying ALP appears
415. xtraction SPE Vacuum Manifold ALP Figure 16 1 is an active ALP used to filter fluid from samples by pulling the fluid from a sample through a filtered microplate and disposing of the filtered fluid A user supplied vacuum supply must be provided Note The SPE ALP requires a minimum vacuum supply of 20 in Hg 4 5 SCFM 67 7 kPa 0 127 m min The SPE ALP is required to complete the Plasmid DNA Miniprep process and is configured by using the SPE step from the Devices step palette The components of the SPE ALP are stacked on two ALP stands the SPE ALP Stand and SPE Collar Stand refer to Section 16 1 1 Components of the SPE ALP The two ALP stands occupy two deck positions on the DNA Preparation Deck Layout and are used simultaneously during a method run Note Since the gripper fingers must open wide enough to grip the SPE Collar on the SPE Collar Stand and would hit an adjacent ALP use the 1 x 1 Passive ALP with Indented Sides to allow the position adjacent to the SPE Collar Stand to be retained The 1 x 1 Passive ALP with Indented Sides allows enough clearance for the gripper to extend and move the SPE Collar without hitting it refer to Section 19 1 2 x 1 Passive ALP with Indented Sides The sections in this chapter include Installing the SPE ALP and SPE Collar Stand Section 16 2 Framing Instructions Section 16 3 e Using the SPE ALP in a Method Section 16 4 Removing the SPE ALP and SPE Collar Sta

ALPs User`s Manual.book

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents